Home

EP10™ - IngenuityWorking

1. 6 11 6 Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle Do not immerse the unit in water Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean e Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the vehicle cradle e Avoid abrasive cleaners solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning e The vehicle cradle has a plastic case that is susceptible to harsh chemicals The plastic is partially soluble in oils mineral spirits and gasoline They slowly decompose in strong alkaline solutions e To clean ink marks from the label use isopropyl alcohol 6 12 EA11 Imager O Note Refer to Appendix C Imagers Applet for details about configuring your imager The EP10 hand held supports the EA11 Decoded 2D imager This imager can be configured using the Scanner Settings located under Settings gt System gt Scanners see Scanner Settings on page 174 and the Manage Triggers application see Manage Triggers on page 156 Refer to Appendix C Imagers Applet for details about imager settings It is critical that you review the safety information in the EP10 Hand Held Computer and Accessories Regu latory amp Warranty Guide PN 8000235 before proceeding 6 12 1 Operating Two Dimensional 2D Imagers An imager takes a snap shot of a single bar code or multiple bar codes at one time It can find a bar code regardless of its orientation that is even a bar code printed at a 45 degree angle to the EP
2. EN Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories 6 11 1 A 6 1 1 1 RV1005 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations Figure 6 10 RV1005 Ports Cable restraint RS 232 port y DC IN port Micro USB AB port RV1005 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations Important Before mounting a vehicle cradle in a vehicle there are a number of operator safety issues that require careful attention An improperly mounted vehicle cradle may result in one or more of the following operator injury operator visibility obstruction operator distraction and or poor ease of egress for the operator Psion strongly recommends that you seek professional mounting advice from the vehicle manufacturer Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful consideration especially for separately tethered scanners and other devices with loose cables If you are unable to obtain suitable advice contact Psion for assistance In addition for safety reasons only pedestal mounts with fully locking joints should be used in vehicles Always adjust the pedestal for the optimum viewing angle and securely tighten the hex and wing screws The EP10 Powered Vehicle Cradle is designed to be compatible with any RAM B mounting interface Model number RAM B 166 202U Use the four M4X12 screws
3. Enrollment Password x Automatically discover server Privacy statement online e a ime F j ES if 2 a ze Cancel Be Next e Enter your enrollment password supplied by your company s network administrator or generated from your company pre enrollment wizard e Type your company e mail address and the enrollment password provided by your network administrator O Note If you uncheck Automatically discover server a Server field is displayed where you must manually enter the server name Allow a few minutes for your EP10 to sync and enroll in your company domain You may need to restart your unit after the enrollment process is completed 5 8 7 Network Cards O Note The Network Cards icon is only visible when Windows Zero Config is enabled Refer to Wireless Zero Config on page 131 for details When the network card is inserted in your unit for the first time the Network Settings screen is displayed automatically so that you can configure the card If it does not appear or if you want to change settings e Tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections e Tap on the Network Cards icon ns Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Network Cards Network Cards ac e Yap f 9 14 Network Adapters My network card Connects ta i he Internet Y Tap an adapter ta modify settings Bluetooth PAN Driver SMSC9500 USB2 0 FAST Ethernet Drivel ASIX AXBE77
4. 50 Ae Phone Security laD csser renesse siras VGC ruren ieas tei ads 55 4 3 3 3 Phone Services Tab sanaaa a we ER a eNews 56 4 3 3 4 Phone Network Tab a of 43 39 Phone Data Tab arios ee ae ce we Os ee ee Ses 57 A Phone Bonds TaD sers ke near A RA A ER e 58 AT PHONE DIAONOSUCS labs vs Bas caro ra AAA AAN E 58 A330 Phone Hearing Aid laD lt 4 46 a lt 64004606 eed a4 ob Se BERS AA 58 Aa Text MCSSAGCS 4 lt bean de eb DAA we ROE radar 59 AS EM orcas rara aer dre 60 AO FS a bw es arde HE ae ee we aaa 60 4 5 2 Synchronizing E mail with Outlook PC with Windows XPOS 60 4 5 21 Changing Synchronization Settings 2 0 6 ce ee ee ee ee ee ee 61 4 5 3 Synchronizing E mail with Outlook PC with Windows Vista or Windows 7 62 ES AS 63 de COMAS rias Be oe dara diaria Aa aa dv a ee 63 4 61 Working with the Contacts LIST occ ocorarss eee creara 64 4 6 2 Communicate Tab Adding Contacts ciu coronas das eee wee a oa ews 65 Ao do Tabs ecards ee ea ee ee we Bie we A aw ee AR ee 8 66 Al Noe TOD noroeste e A RR Hee we ae 67 AF internet EXOICel lt gt 4 604 os amp hos aa AAA AAA 67 Ad Browsing WED SIES lt a sonara uu Hebe Oe oe a SE HORE KE ee OEE So 67 AG CO ee serere hw eae ea a e eaa ed AAA e a 68 AO PIAS E E E ee eee ew E E eee ee eee ee eee es 68 AiO PICe a MAGOS gt y ona 4 62 a oe Oe Hw Be a A A e OB AOS ae oe AS 68 AiO Using he CAMA
5. neShot Lock i The options in this tab allow you to determine how modifier keys on your EP10 behave For each modifier key ALT SHIFT CTRL SYM and BLUE FN you have the following options in the drop down menu Lock OneShot and OneShot Lock AN Important Once you ve assigned a OneShot mode to a modifier key you need to tap on the OK button at the top of the tab to activate your selection Lock If you choose Lock from the drop down menu pressing a modifier key once locks it on until you press the modifier key a second time to unlock or turn it off OneShot If you choose OneShot the modifier key remains active only until the next key is pressed OneShot Lock OneShot Lock allows you to combine these functions When you choose this option and you press the mod ifier key once it remains active only until the next key is pressed If you press the modifier key twice it is locked on remaining active until the modifier key is pressed a third time to turn it off 5 9 2 4 Macro Keys NE Yal amr 7 34 One Shots lt Macros gt Unicode Macro Key Sequence Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual MT Chapter 5 Settings Buttons Macro keys can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes along with the function of executa ble keys including ENTER BKSP and DEL IBLUE FN BKSP function keys and arrow keys Recording and Saving a Macro You can prog
6. 0 ccc ccc ccc cece cece cence nee e nee e cence eee e eee eee ete rr 190 A A o o PI Pe ri POC v0 OOO AA dale Sha 190 511 271 Advanced Tab Advanced CE Services Settings ccc cece cece cece ee eeeeeeeneeeees 190 5 11 27 2 Advanced Interface and Network Settings cc ccc cee cece cence eee cent eeeeeeeeeeeees 191 vi Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Table of Contents 511 273 Advanced Services Settings ccc cece cece cee cece cece cence teen eeeee teense rr 192 Dd sa Eg EOE asics cs cantar teen ndaee A se sageassenaumeanueds cectesaw anes 193 Ae A o o E O O o A 193 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices Accessories A ir rr AP O A A TEE 191 6 1 1 Te nand Strap Model NORV O02 esiss sranioiass detona rs 197 Ole Carrying Pouch Model No RUSO xcs cccccnctctesesnetacsuecuosce innne aii aan 197 OLS Plastic carmrying Case Model ING ROO 2 uerrrrebebe ri Erroi Taner Ere Ebr E EERIE Tie AEEA 198 62 The pecs cece beeen eet n EEE E S RE EPOR E AER EEE EE 198 63 Chardersand DOCKING SEAUONS 2c scx tesekcs rirani ses Anaran A A A Aa 198 6 3 1 important safety INSET MICHIONS sates anu aiecnnenceonewatesyasene AN E rera 198 632 Installation Chargers and DOCKING SUAUONS s es iieaseandadavabeerceeia sdcdecdavewanaesecedcsecadeds 199 63 3 POWer Consampu n Considera css ee 199 6 AC Wall Adaptor Model No PSIODOSO occcdecetccuesacnwnorcedwawsst idos orita as 199 6 5 Desktop Docking Station Model No RV 40
7. Tap in the drop down menu next to this option and choose the number of minutes the unit can remain idle before the screen is turned off To determine behaviour when the unit is running On external power tap in the checkbox to the left of Turn off screen if device is not used for and choose a value in the associated drop down menu Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 101 Chapter 5 Settings Battery Details Tab 5 6 3 Battery Details Tab In the scrolling tab bar scroll to the Battery Details tab Power P T t maa Advanced lt Battery Details gt Suspen Remaining Power 2196 mAh Full Capacity 2231 mAh Time to Empty Mo data Operating Time Mo data Voltage 41 Current O m Temperatura 32 1 ee Chemistry Li Ion Serial Number RMS TW BO OOO 1 This tab lists the specifications and battery capacity status of the battery installed in the EP10 This is a view only screen 5 6 4 Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup Power Er Vy Me Gam 3 34 Bate Suspend Threshald gt Bate Suspend Threshold Maximize Maximize operating backup time time Main Battery Status Estimated Operating Time Estimated Battery Backup Time PQ _ nn The Estimated Battery Backup is the amount of battery power that has been reserved or set aside to protect data until a fully charged battery can be installed in the EP10 When the battery capacity is depleted up
8. Warranty Guide PN 8000235 For a complete list of EP10 Hand Held features physical attributes and approvals refer to Appendix D Specifications Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Overview of the EP10 Hand Held Computer The EP10 hand held computer is a small and durable PDA device that has been built to withstand challeng ing weather and environmental conditions It features a 3 7 full VGA transflective display 3G and CDMA Wi Fi and Bluetooth and a full range of interactive sensors including Digital Compass Gyroscope light sensor proximity sensor and Accelerometer If required customization is available for unique and specialized applications through software develop ment kits hardware developer kits and the EP10 expansion module Model e EP10 Hand Held Model Number EP10 7515 Platform e Industrial class AM3715 Sitara Microprocessor e 800 MHz ARM Cortex A8 e On board RAM 256 MB SDRAM e On board ROM 2 GB Flash Operating System Microsoft Windows Embedded Hand Held 6 5 User Interface e Display Backlit 3 7 in VGA portrait mode Backlight feature 165 cd m2 output Sunlight readable with integrated touchscreen Colour 480 x 640 graphic TFT Passive stylus or finger operation e Audio amp Voice Built in 85db mono speaker Microphone Receiver Supports VoIP speed recognition amp Push to Talk applications Wireless Bluetooth headset support
9. Certificates EI yt Til Gm 8 53 i Intermedi lt Root gt Personal Use root certificates to positively identify root certification authorities VeriSign Trust Network 8 1 28 VeriSign Class 3 Public P 7 16 2036 VeriSign Class 3 Public P 7 16 2036 Thawte Server CA 12 31 20 thawte Primary Root CA 7 16 2036 L 146 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Compass To view details about a certificate who issued the certificate to whom it was issued the issue date and the expiry date tap on a certificate in the list To delete a certificate tap and hold the stylus on a certificate In the pop up menu tap on the Delete command 5 11 4 Compass Like all compasses the EP10 compass indicates the direction in which the unit is pointed Tap on Start gt Settings and then tap on the System icon Tap on the Compass icon Compass ea gr Ta mi 6 11 If you find that the compass is inaccurate you may need to calibrate it Tap on the Calibrate button and follow the directions to calibrate the compass Make certain that you perform the figure 8 indicated in the instructions in a fairly wide loop to better ensure successful calibration Compass Calibrati g gt Ti 4 am 2 52 To calibrate turn the device in a figure until this message disappears When the compass calibration is complete a message appears on the EP10 screen indicating successful cal ibration O Note
10. Dx Gsm 850MHz Bands gt Diagnostics x GSM 900MHz x GSM 1800MHz x GSM 1900MHz x UMTS 850MHz x UMTS 1900MHz By default all frequency bands are enabled Bands should not be disabled without knowledge about which bands are used by your network an incorrect setting will prevent the WWAN modem from finding the network 4 3 3 7 Phone Diagnostics Tab Phone Bands Diagnostics gt Hearing Aid Signal Strength Bit Error Rate Mobile Country Code MOC 302 Mobile Network Code MMC 720 Location Area Code LAC 75 dBm 61 Unknown 17400 0x43f8 Cell ID CID 33082 0x000813a The Diagnostics tab lists details about each network found The information in this screen may be useful to support personnel if they are attempting to diagnose a problem with your network 4 3 3 8 Phone Hearing Aid Tab This tab allows you to enable the hearing aid service ES Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Text Messages Phone ac gt oe m om 5 25 Diagnostics Hearing Aid gt Sounds ia Enable hearing aid mode 4 4 Text Messages Tapping on the Text option in the Today screen displays this screen Text Messages g Til aff am 12 52 Inbox w From wy ai A BEE Me 4 00 still ok This option allows you to compose send and receive text messages using your EP10 AN Important For details about using the Text Messages feature refer to Text M
11. Me HKEY_USERS RegPersisterl 1 0x00000001 3 ENS alete ox J The EP10 is available with one of the following Wireless WAN WWAN radio options the Cinterion PH8 for GSM UMTS networks worldwide or the Sierra Wireless MC5728V for the Sprint and Verizon CDMA networks AN Important Refer to Appendix A Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN for details Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 193 PERIPHERAL DEVICES amp ACCESSORIES Carrying Accessories 611 The Hand Strap Model No RV6021 197 6l2 Carrying Pouch Model No RVOO liri sssri cassete aa 197 643 PlasticCarrying Case Model No RV6092 cx 2 484640 86 sara ras 198 Ce INS BaNG acepaceavauke euch Gea peGeee ee sae eee aeud suena e hen ea hoe here nees 198 6 amp 3 Tiara Sant Docking Stations ec also aran ee heen hee eee nodos aaa 198 6 31 Important Safety Instructions es 198 6 3 2 Installation Chargers and Docking Stations 2 0 199 6 3 3 Power Consumption Considerati0ns e 199 64 AC Wall Adaptor Model No PS1050 G1 oo a Dee Pe oe ee Ow 199 6 5 Desktop Docking Station Model No RV4000 saaana aaa eee 200 e 201 Bose DUST ricas eh ae reos HES eS Ge arar AAA 201 6 5 21 Charging the EPIO Battle cinicecererriaia rare rr 201 6 5 2 2 Charging a Spare Battery deudas add ra ee ee RS 201 6323 Linking an EPIO aPC pees Bae eee ees Bee ee eee a 202 6 53 Cleaning the RV4000 sa seade Esa nm a
12. The EP10 scans for Bluetooth devices within a 10 meter range Any Bluetooth devices within range appear in the Bluetooth list box Any existing devices previously discovered and listed will also be displayed 106 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Bluetooth Setup 5 8 2 1 1 Note To limit the scope of the scan to a particular type of device refer to Filtering by Class of Device COD in the next section The Clear button removes all Bluetooth devices listed except those with currently paired and connected services Device Pop up Menu Tapping on a device name displays a pop up menu that allows you to pair a device update a device name or delete a device from the list Bluetooth ac go Ty a Gar 9 11 Paired lt Device gt Servers Select device to start pairing Refresh Name Delete Pair begins the pairing process by querying the services and profiles of the discovered device An authenti cation dialog box is displayed the first time a Bluetooth device is paired Rename allows a new name to be assigned to a highlighted device Refresh Name repeats the device name query updating the name This command is useful if a device is listed without a name unknown or if a device name has been changed remotely Delete removes this device from the list Filtering by Class of Device COD The drop down menu at the top of the top of the Device tab allows you to limit the scope of the sca
13. 6 11 11 MOUNTING Template cascara css dE 211 Ollie Cable Arrangement rece aras cee eo AAA eo eee ee ew EA A 212 6 11 3 Electrical Requirements eee 212 6 11 31 Wiring Vehicle Power to the Cradle 2 ee ee 213 6 11 4 USB and Serial CONNECTIONS cou cs ce ee he we ee Eee eee ww eee ee ew HOS 213 6 11 5 Inserting the EP10 in the Vehicle Cradle 2 e 213 6 11 6 Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle ee ee 214 baie EAI O jeans nario sra aaa arar eee hee eae ee eeaes 214 6 12 1 Operating Two Dimensional 2D IMagerS 214 6 13 Bluetooth Peripherals 2 ee 215 614 Digital Camera e as os Bae ee ee RD SSE ee ee ae a ew Ee Es 215 196 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Carrying Accessories 6 1 Carrying Accessories There are a variety of carrying accessories to help the operator work safely and comfortably with the EP10 Table 6 1 AN Important Do not use adhesives such as Loctite to secure screws on carrying accessories These chemicals may damage the plastic casing 6 1 1 The Hand Strap Model No RV6021 Each EP10 is shipped with a hand strap attached 6 1 2 Carrying Pouch Model No RV6091 A protective carrying pouch Model No RV6091 is available for the EP10 The pouch is equipped with a belt clip to allow the operator to safely carry the EP10 when it is not in use Figure 6 1 EP10 Carrying Pouch
14. AT Wireless WAN sssssssssssresseessscssscsessecssecessosssessesccesscsescssscsrsscsssecrescesscrssererseeesseeseee A 3 Ae Wa DA ICON Swte yc erat aan unas acs ta E op A EENE A E EEE ARS A 3 A 3 Establishing a Packet Data Connection src ii A 3 A31 TDiscommectina TKOINMT AINCUIWOIM ccceccdecdmeakedoccevesaddventaudedavaheeueeaesg id tada ica A 5 A32 Advanced GSM GPRS Data COnmOUranlOW escciwrencstsawesvinwssaseeninaerrscdiowennieiavargnianenvies A 5 A 3 2 1 Manually Adding a New Modem Connection ccc cece cece cece eeen eee eeneeeeeneeeees A 5 A322 Ihe Security Tab Entering a PIN NUMDON cedecavetesacccdaccevsadetccexedoccscaneseonaeaes A 7 A A oo O PO Ion eceuaeserieeesesss A 7 A324 Network Configuratio A A A A A 8 A 4 Establishing a CDMA Radio Modem Connection ocoococccccccnccccncncnnccnnn cnn cnn acarrear A 8 AZ SOFIE CONNECUON daa ias A 8 A 411 Repairing a Network CONMECHON ocicccsusecadia narra Adi A 9 AAi2 Sound Tab andthe Voicemail Held escrita rica A 10 PA VeVIZOWCOMICCIION serrer racer sGtdesaareansesnieses A 11 AMZ21 Repairinga Data COMMECHON c2ccccesncccusesrderdeceacewetcseeusereselcccceceseewencxeaesss A 11 Appendix B Port Pinouts B 1 DOCK POM FINO rocosa artis EET B 3 Be Banery Contact PNO acusaciones ceo doctores cross B 3 Appendix C Imagers Applet Cll REQUIFSd BODIES cc xascseareraconsent vance ous cecevecces seroncusvecesusssasneeresecsusouvueseesss aoeseeealeconceescues C3 Ce NCS O aer a
15. C 4 14 Translation Tab Configuring Rules Translation rules enable the automatic processing of bar code data Up to 10 cases can be defined each consisting of up to 10 sequential rules Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab e Tap on the Imagers icon and then tap on the Translation tab PTS Imager Settiny ea en Tg oe Gam 9 22 Filter lt Translations gt Advanced To change a setting press edit button or space or double click Case 1 empty Case 2 empty H Case 3 empty Case 4 empty FH Case 5 empty H Case 6 empty In the Translations tab double tap on a Case to create rules Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix C Imagers Applet Translation Tab Configuring Rules PTS Imager Setti EN g7 Ta EME am 10 25 Alter lt Translations gt Advanced To change a setting press edit button or space or double click No rule Mo rule No rule No rule No rule e Tap on the No rule drop down menu to display the rules PTS Imager Setti EN e Ta YU am 10 26 o rule Noe Match at index Match and replace at index Replace at index Add barcode prefix suttix Verify barcode size Search and replace Verify SAS C 4 14 1 Case Rules The case rules are defined as follows e No rule ignored e Match at index matches the match string at a specified index Match and replace at index matches the match string at a specified index and repla
16. C1 Required Applets Ge IES aaa AAA AAA ARAS C 2 1 C22 Bar Code Predefined Presets 62 maca dadas aa AAA A OA wo C3 C 2 21 Bar Code Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets o 5 C 2 3 Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets C 4 C 2 4 Image Capture Predefined PresetS eee C 4 C 3 Using the lmagers Applet ee e C 5 C 3 1 Configuring the Image Capture PresetS es CS C32 Selecting a tamed e sas sae bo e sa a G5 6 3 3 Setting ine Active Preset act heridas caras ces seat bets AN C5 C 3 4 Viewing a POSO oras ks ebb Oo ee wee ad C3 C 3 5 Creating a Custom Preset aaau diri C6 C 3 6 Modifying a Custom Preset 2 lt 6 rones arar Ls ER whee SB ESTES SEs cr C 3 7 Removing a Custom Preset ee ET C 4 Configuring the Bar Code Decoding Camera PresetS eee 58 CAl Serene Camera se ea Dala a a a BERS ss A De Se Ges C 8 C 4 2 Setting the Active Preset ee ee C 8 C43 Viewing A PICSel cau cca ve ba bee D6 EDT ORR REE ERE OEE wD HD Ow SS C 8 C 4 4 Creating a Custom Preset ceca ida aaa ada bebe ada eee oe eG C9 CA5 M difying a Custom Pr set 4 5 65 406 e464 we eV ow ROG eS CEES ee Ee ee ee RS C10 C 4 6 Removing a Custom Preset aaaea ee C 10 C 4 7 Configuring the Bar Code Decoding Symbologies ee Cll C48 Setting the Active Preset s ss o s eu Gio dae e ee Rew Oe a Be ee RS eR Ee
17. Front and rear speakers e Keyboard Backlit QWERTY Numeric AZERTY High reliability keypad ultra white backlight Ergonomically enhanced for ambidextrous one hand operation e Camera 3 2 Mega Pixel Colour Auto Focus Dual LED Flash Video capture capability Wireless Communication e On board IEEE 802 11a b g n CCX V4 Certified radio e Bluetooth v2 0 radio EDR radio e UMTS 3 5 G HSPA radio e CDMA EV DO Rev A radio options e Integrated 5 band Antenna supports both voice and data SIRF starlV GPS with SiRFinstantFix AGPS support 48 channel EN Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Active jammer removal Chapter 1 Introduction The EP10 Hand Held i Note 802 11a b g n and Bluetooth are available simultaneously 1 3 1 Enhanced Features Accelerometer Compass Gyroscope Light Sensor Proximity Sensor Expansion Slot One microSD slot The EP10 Hand Held Figure 11 EP10 Hand Held QWERTY and Numeric Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual ER Chapter 1 Introduction The EP10 Hand Held Figure 1 2 Phone Keys O Note Refer to Sending amp Ending Phone Calls using the Phone Keypad on page 50 for details about these keys EN Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual GETTING STARTED 21 Features of the EP10 Hand Held 2 2 ee 3 2 2 EP10 Accessories Available eee 10 2o D cuments AVAlaDlO asis asa ce Gaede enews ORS RRB ERE ERROR E See
18. Home ao e Tl 0 7 16 Appearance lt tems gt Appearance Checked items appear on the Home screen E Windows Default a Move Up lave Down Opbohz The items you select will appear in the Today screen Once you ve chosen the items to appear on the Today screen you can also tailor the order in which you want the items to appear e Highlight an item Tap on the Move Up and Move Down buttons to order your selections When you choose items for the Today screen using this method the appearance of the Today screen will change to a list format a gr T E mu 5 31 A Friday April 01 2011 4 i ROGERS EJ On Internet Calling OFF a E E F a i nE Phone Psion 3 10 2 The Today Screen Default Options A list of options are available from the Today screen Keep in mind that these can be altered using the method described above in Customizing the Today Screen on page 31 You can also refer to Shell Set tings on page 163 for additional customization options 3 10 2 1 Pictures This option provides access to the Pictures amp Videos applet Refer to Pictures amp Videos on page 68 for details 3 10 2 2 Music Tapping on the Music option displays the Windows Media applet Refer to Windows Media on page 72 for details 3 10 2 3 Phone e Scroll to and highlight the Phone option to learn if you ve missed any calls e Tap the stylus on the highlighted Phone option to display the ph
19. e Inthe scrolling tab bar tap on the Battery Health tab Power EI yt Til d Gm 3 39 Suspend Battery Health gt Battery Current Battery Health TETE x Enable Battery Health service C Wakeup device on battery insert Show popup UI on device resume once For each Rating decrease o seconds te auto dismiss UI Edit rating descriptions Current Battery Health The Current Battery Health default values are shown here as Excellent Used and Battery should be replaced To display the Battery Health screen e Tapon the navigation bar scroll to and click on the battery hotkey Power E eh Ta 4 Gar 3 43 Navigation bar Battery hotkey x Enable Battery Health service BatteryHealthIcon ao gh Ty 3 15 Advanced Battery Health Battery C Wakeup device on battery insert a lt ry gt solicit Show popup UI on device resume Battery Power 99 Battery Health KKKKK Excellent The image above shows the default Excellent status screen Enable Battery Health Service This option allows you to enable or disable the battery health service Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Sounds amp Notifications Wakeup Device on Battery Insert When this option is enabled whenever the battery is replaced the EP10 is powered up from a suspend state and the current health of the battery is displayed Show Popup UI on Device Resume The drop
20. Belt Clip Back of Pouch Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual MEN Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Plastic Carrying Case Model No RV6092 6 1 3 Plastic Carrying Case Model No RV6092 A plastic carrying case model number RV6092 is available for the EP10 This carrying case has a plastic Sleeve and belt clip and is designed to rotate 90 in either direction for easy use and is compatible with the EP10 hand strap and stylus Figure 6 2 EP10 Plastic Carrying Case Belt Clip 6 2 The Battery The EP10 operates with either a 2400 mAh or a 3600 mAh Lithium lon battery pack O Note For information about inserting removing and charging the battery refer to The Battery on page 17 For battery specifications refer to Lithium lon 3600 mAh Battery Specifica tions on page 220 6 3 Chargers and Docking Stations AN Important Keep in mind when ordering a charger or docking station that you must also order the country compatible power cord separately Psion offers a variety of chargers and docking stations for the EP10 These include Snap Modules are mobile adaptors designed for the EP10 Two models are available Charger Snap Module with USB and DC Model RV4001 and Charger Snap Module with RS 232 and DC Model RV4002 AC Adaptor Model PS1050 G1 is used to power both snap module variants AC Adaptor Model RV3055 is used to power the following docking stations and chargers deskt
21. Insert the spare battery in the charge well at the back of the RV4000 aligning the contacts on the battery with the contacts in the spare battery charge well A full charge takes between 3 and 4 hours for the battery When the battery capacity reaches 95 the LED turns solid green and remains in this state once the battery is completely charged Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual EN Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Cleaning the RV4000 6 5 2 3 6 5 3 A 6 5 4 6 5 4 1 6 5 4 2 6 5 4 3 6 5 4 4 6 5 4 5 Linking an EP10 to a PC The desktop docking station can be connected to a PC so that you can exchange files in the same way that you would between PC drives A USB cable is included with your docking station Note For details about data transfer through Windows XP and ActiveSync and through Vista and Windows 7 refer to Data Transfer Between the EP10 and a PC on page 44 To link the EP10 to a PC e Insert the EP10 in the desktop docking station e Insert the micro USB connector into the docking station Attach the other end of the cable to a USB port on the PC Cleaning the RV4000 Important Do not immerse the unit in water Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean e Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the RV4000 Avoid abrasive cleaners solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning The plastic case is susceptible to harsh ch
22. Low light near Predefined preset C 5 Low power Predefined preset C 4 M Macro keys 22 deleting a macro 138 executing a macro 138 Macros menu accessing 137 recording and saving 137 maintenance of EP10 45 Managed Programs 159 mapping Scancode 140 Unicode 138 Matrix Predefined preset C 4 Memory 159 Storage Card tab 160 menus pop up 42 using 42 messages Scan Indicator 176 scanner warning message 176 Scan Result 176 Messaging Outlook e mail synchronizing 60 62 Microphone adjusting volume Built in Headset and Bluetooth 167 microSD inserting 26 Microsoft ActiveSync 44 Mode Bluetooth 110 modem setup 115 Server Settings 117 TCP_IP Settings 116 modifier keys 19 locking amp unlocking 20 OneShot Mode 137 shift state indicator icon 20 40 Motion Meter 150 N name assigning to WORKABOUT PRO3 143 network selecting 123 network phone setting up 57 Note recording a message audio 76 renaming 75 soft keyboard 74 text converting handwriting into 74 transcriber 74 Notes 73 Notification setting 104 Notifications and Sound defining 104 O OneShot Mode 137 OneShot tab modifier keys 137 Options tab bar codes 175 orientation screen 24 Outlook e mail synchronizing Windows Vista and 7 62 Outlook e mail synchronizing Windows XP 60 Pp Paired tab Bluetooth 111 pairing Bluetooth devices 108 Parity port replicator 180 Password admin changing PsionVU 163 Paste data Data Trans
23. Power button Keep in mind also that all EP10s are equipped with internal super capacitors that will save the current data for up to 2 minutes while the battery is swapped Refer to Preparing the EP10 for Operation on page 11 for more details about removing and installing the battery 3 2 3 Battery Swap Time Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered battery swap time is approximately 2 minutes you will not lose data if the battery is replaced within this time frame To protect data the safest place to store data is on a microSD memory card or externally to the device ona USB memory stick or on a PC The Suspend Threshold feature allows you to determine the battery capacity at which the EP10 will be shut down If left at the default value Maximum Operating Time the EP10 will run until the battery is completely empty the RAM is only backed up for a short period of time If you choose Maximum Backup Time the EP10 shuts off with more energy left in the battery so RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time Refer to Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup on page 102 for details about reserving battery power for data backup purposes 3 2 4 Charging the Battery Batteries shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40 of capacity They must be fully charged prior to use AN Important Do not leave a spare battery to charge for more than 72 hours
24. Scanner Settings 1 gr Pp Me 12 11 Default Local ASCH 150 8859 1 Latin 1 If you choose Default Local ASCII the code page of the local OS is used For example if the local OS uses double byte Chinese characters choosing this option will filter data through the local ASCII of that OS and display it accurately in this example using double byte characters If you choose SO 8859 1 Latin 1 data will be displayed according to the character mapping of this Latin 1 code page ignoring the local OS code page Data Transmission Scanner Settings C A 2 Gm 7 34 Paste data Wedge data If Paste data is enabled highlighted the barcode output is copied to the system clipboard and then auto matically pasted to an application If Wedge data is enabled each character that composes the barcode data is turned into a keyboard se quence that is transmitted to the cursor location of the current application that is to the application it looks like the barcode data was typed on the keyboard Note The default Paste data option is a faster method of data transmission Translations Tab The Translations tab allows you to define up to 10 cases each consisting of up to 10 rules in sequential order Only one case will be applied to a bar code and a case will only be applied if all rules specified in the case are successful if a rule within a case fails the entire case fails Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 177
25. Take Picture When you tap on this option the EP10 switches to camera mode so that you can snap a picture to include in your note EN Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs OneNote Mobile Insert from Came E gr Ti Me que 11 36 Press ENTER to snap a photo that is automatically inserted into your note OneNote Mobile F gt Ti Me 11 41 e Insert Picture Tapping on this command automatically displays your My Pictures folder where you can tap on an existing picture to insert it into your note e Insert Recording When you tap on this command a recording panel is displayed OneNote Mobile li Y E Ge 11 45 e gt or gt Tap on the Record button to record your message Tap on Stop when you ve completed your message Tap on Play to listen to your voice message Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Word Mobile To discard your message tap on X the Cancel button To save your message tap on OK An audio icon is displayed in your note You can tap on it to listen to your message OneNote Mobile EN g gt Y yj qu 11 50 NE 3 A e F 5 Pie Ap ie al a i Fi i Done E Menu OK J Synchronizing EP10 One Note With PC OneNote e Connect the EP10 to your PC using either a USB cable or Bluetooth When the connection is complete take one of the following steps e In Microsoft ActiveSync on your PC choose Sy
26. The accuracy of the digital compass Is affected by the following a close proximity to large magnets or metal structures and b internal scanner imager activation Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 147 Chapter 5 Settings Contrast 5 11 5 Contrast Tapping on the Contrast icon displays a screen in which you can tailor the screen contrast Cg Tal Gam 9 24 Contrast Customize settings Ay g pr a a as e Drag the sliding button between Light and Dark to achieve the desired screen colour contrast 5 11 6 Customer Feedback This option allows Microsoft to track how you use your EP10 so that they can make improvements to the software The radio buttons allow you to turn this feature on or off Customer Feedback Customer Feedba T 2 Y 2 qm 10 21 You can make Windows Mobile software better by participating in the Customer Experience Improvement Program If you participate information about how you use Windows Mobile software will be sent te Microsoft This helps identify trends and usage patterns in order to improve the software This data does not intentionally include any information that could be used to identify or contact you Information will pe sent over WEF Activesync or _ Send Feedback Recommended O Don t Send Feedback 5 11 7 Dr Debug Dr Debug is an error diagnostic tool e Tap on Start gt Settings gt System Tap on the Dr Debug icon
27. Think of batteries as perishable goods Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual EN Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 Storing Batteries Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 Navigating in Windows Embedded 6 5 and Applications 3 9 Navigating in Windows Embedded 6 5 and Applications Graphic user interfaces like Windows Embedded 6 5 for portable devices or desktop Windows 2000 XP etc utilize point and click navigation On the EP10 this is accomplished using a touchscreen and stylus rather than a mouse 3 9 1 Navigating using the Touchscreen and Stylus ap Note If the touchscreen is not registering your screen taps accurately it may need recalibration Refer to Aligning Calibrating the Touchscreen on page 24 A touchscreen is a standard feature on all EP10s Each is equipped with a stylus a pointing tool stored in a slot at the top right side of the unit e Use the stylus to tap on the appropriate icon to open files and folders launch applications and pro grams make selections and so on You can also use your finger rather than the stylus e Tap and flick the stylus or your finger on the screen to scroll through the options on a screen e Tap on the navigation bar to display additional icons 3 10 The Today Screen The Today screen provides quick access to a default list of applets such as phone voicemail and so on This screen is also equipped with
28. their identification version or part numbers and whether they are enabled or disabled Tap on Start gt Settings gt System and then tap on the System Properties icon Components Hl Hardware E Keyboard Data Capture GPS WiFi Tapping on the Export button creates a log SystemProperties xml of your current components which is placed in the My Devices folder in Windows Explorer Instead of expanding each section individually you can also choose to open all the lists at once by tapping on the Expand button which will then change to a Collapse button to enable you to collapse all the sections as well Task Manager The Task Manager screen lists all running tasks applications or processes This applet provides a number of options to manage these e Tap on Start gt Settings Tap on System and then the Task Manager icon the Task Manager screen is opened Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 183 Chapter 5 Settings Total Recall Task Manager ActiveSync A File Explorer Task Manager AP Era E Ma 6 End Task To shut down an application highlight the program in the list and tap on the End Task softkey in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen Task Manager Menu The Task Manager menu provides additional options to help you manage your applications Tap on the Menu softkey at the bottom of the screen Task Manager eo E E qu 1 10 Application Fr Switch To 2 Intemet Explor w
29. xml and save it in the location of your choice In addi tion an Administrator has the option to Import these settings from one device to multiple devices of the Same operating system AN Important A copy of this file should also be saved in a central repository for all Psion xml files with a predefined name so that other Psion utilities can locate it ET Ti m 10 59 Import Export Fi en Import settings from a file F Export settings to a file Tapping on the Export button displays an Export Settings screen The default Name PsionVU_Settings can be changed by the administrator even after it has been saved Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual MTA Chapter 5 Settings PsionVU Import Export Fi I g Pp E Gr 11 10 Export Settings Main memory Save Cancel The xml file contains all of the PsionVU configured settings including the Administrator Password When the file is imported to a device the new password is applied immediately Import Export Fi ET e Y 11 09 Folder la Folders y Cancel Type xml Y Whether choosing to import or export files the same file location options will be listed Following the action a message stating the success of the operation and the location of the file will be displayed With the exception of the password changes made to settings will take effect only after a warm reset If further changes to the configuration are made
30. 0 GP gt Yil 4i Gi 8 20 Total Recall 5 0 g Y Gi 8 32 Options C Contacts _ Deleted System files All C GPS O Selected Options C Wi Fi All files registry settings etc are cloned 5 11 26 3 Managing Profiles You can view profiles and choose profile options from the menus in this section 5 11 26 3 1Viewing a Profile Tap on the Manage Profile button to see your list of profiles Highlight a profile and then you can choose to View the Profile Summary and go on to the next menu Profile Details List of profiles Profile Summary Profile Details Total Recall 5 0 ET E Ti E 8 43 Please select a profile from the list or click browse Total Recall 5 0 GP gt Yi di E 8 45 Total Recall 5 0 Hg Vy 4c Ge 8 46 Profile Summary Profile Details Profile Version 12 Psion 7515 Windows Mobile 6 5 Professional OS Release 3 2 23797 0 Cloning Disabled Added Files Flash DiskiClone1 pfl Flash Disk DefaultL pfl Files Removed csP Registry 5 11 26 3 2Profile Options Tap on the Manage Profile button to see your list of profiles as shown above Highlight a profile and tap on the Next button to choose from options to restore or clone the profile You can choose from four profile options Restore Now Set for Autorestore Upload to A R C and Clone to USB Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 187 Chapter 5 Settings Total Recall Total Re
31. 11 15 Excel Mobile 2010 PowerPoint Mobile 2010 La fa a re ote Mobike F 2010 SharePoint WorkSpace Mobile j 2010 Word Mobile 2010 4 22 1 Excel Mobile Excel Mobile is an abridged version of Microsoft Excel an electronic spreadsheet program If you re familiar the Excel application on your PC you ll be able to navigate Excel Mobile In addition to providing the tools to manipulate text and numeric values like statistics percentages using formulas that perform calculations and so on this program can also include graphics such as pie charts 84 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs OneNote Mobile Excel Mobile allows you to copy Excel workbooks from your PC onto your EP10 and update them while you re away from your desk e Tap on Start gt Office Mobile gt Excel Mobile e Ifa list of workbooks is displayed rather than a new sheet you ll need to create a new workbook To create a workbook e In Excel Mobile tap the Menu gt File gt New 4 22 2 OneNote Mobile You can use OneNote Mobile to take notes wherever you are and then synchronize your notes with a note book section in the OneNote version on your PC For example you can Snap pictures of business cards on your EP10 and then bring them into OneNote on your PC e Create short text notes and voice recordings on your EP10 to remind you about important meetings ideas etc and synchronize them with your notes e
32. 148 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Dr Debug 5 11 7 1 Status Dr Debug Co gt Ti d 6 31 Seting Status gt Ublities EA No error logs Found lA Dr Debug is on Ly Dr Watson ls on Y Motion Meter is off Browse logs This tab indicates the status on off of the tools Tapping on Browse logs displays error logs for your review 5 11 7 2 Utilities ea z Yi si Gm 6 34 lt Utilities A File prefix netlog File size Sono Netlog is stopped Two utilities are available NetLog and RilLog The NetLog utility is used to log network traffic The RilLog utility captures Radio Interface Layer RIL debug outputs When you tap on the Start button debug data Is collected so that if necessary it can be forwarded to a Psion technician for evaluation Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 149 Chapter 5 Settings Encryption 5 11 7 3 Motion Meter Dr Debug en Ti 4 32 Ublibes lt Motion Meter gt settings Displays the 40 most severe Tapping on the Start button enables the Motion Meter feature Once enabled this applet records the number of impacts the EP10 has sustained the distance of the fall in meters the duration in io ofa second and the date and time that the event occurred The top 40 events are logged in a non volatile loca tion and can be used for diagnostic purposes by Psion or the site administrator 5 11 7 4 Settings Dr Debug Cr gt Ti
33. 3 Getting to Know the EP10 The Today Screen Default Options Text Messages ac gv f Gm 2 01 To create a new message tap Menu then tap New Text Messages 0 Items O Mowe Mes Menu softkey To compose and send a text message on your EP10 e Tap on the Menu softkey and choose New from the menu Text Messages ac ge yl o Gam 5 23 From Text Messages In the To field type the name of the person to whom you want to send a text message or to insert a number from your contacts list tap on Menu gt Add Recipient and choose a name Tap your stylus in the message area and type your message Tap on the Send icon to deliver your message Text Messages ao ge Ta a 7203 From Text Messages Sammie lt 212 gt 555 1212 4 00 still OK 14 160 a psfif2f3f9fsfsf7fslolol Je Tablqlwfelrdilydudlidodedid cspladsfdlidolhlidedid J hife ed d eded bd ndol tale MORG Send softkey Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual EJ Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 E mail Notification Once you send the message your message is displayed in the Inbox and a conversation icon is displayed in the softkey bar 3 Sammie Me 4 00 still OK Conversation softkey Highlighting the text message and tapping on the conversation softkey automatically connects to the sender s information so you can compose text and reply 3 10 3 E mail Notification If you have any e mail highlighting this option lets
34. AC adaptor the RV4000 or the RV4004 if it is struck by a sharp blow dropped or otherwise damaged in any way it should be inspected by qualified service personnel e To reduce the risk of electric shock unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet before attempting any maintenance or cleaning e An extension cord should not be used unless absolutely necessary Use of an improper extension cord could result in fire or electric shock If an extension cord must be used make sure The plug pins on the extension cord are the same number size and shape as those on the adaptor The extension cord is properly wired and in good electrical condition and that the wire size is larger than 18 AWG e Do not expose the AC adaptor to rain or snow However both the RV4000 and RV4004 are designed to accept a wet EP10 hand held without harmful effect e Do not place batteries in the docking stations if they are cold temperatures below O C 32 F Allow them to warm up to room temperature for at least 30 minutes e Do not use a docking station if after an overnight charge the battery feels warmer than the charger housing The dock should be inspected by qualified service personnel e Do not use a docking station if the battery while charging becomes more than lukewarm 6 3 2 Installation Chargers and Docking Stations When installing a charger or docking station consider the following guidelines e Keep chargers and docking stations away from exc
35. ASCII Code Page 176 Demo Scanner 83 KA Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual desktop docking station RV4000 200 desktop screen Home Screen 31 Device ID tab 143 digital camera description 215 digital camera specifications D 4 display backlight adjusting 24 docking port B 3 docking station RV4004 quad operator controls 203 205 uploading data using 45 docking stations 198 desktop docking station 200 installation at site 199 quad docking station 203 double click appending characters to a decoded bar code 176 scanner trigger 175 Double Click Manage Triggers menu 157 Dr Debug 148 150 DSSS 802 11a b g n radio D 5 E E mail 60 folders 60 Outlook e mail synchronizing Windows Vista and 7 62 Outlook e mail synchronizing Windows XP 60 e mail notification 36 Encryption storage card 150 EP10 Specifications D 3 Error Reporting 151 Ethernet connecting with docking station 204 Excel Mobile 84 External Power settings 145 F Favorites 39 Add Remove 39 features EP10 hand held 3 file renaming 41 File Explorer 41 79 copy 42 copying a file 41 deleting file 42 folders creating 41 renaming file 41 files amp folders managing 41 folder copying 42 folder creating 41 folder deleting 42 folder renaming 41 Function keys 22 G Glossy surface Predefined preset C 4 Good and Bad Scan Vibrates 176 Good Scan Beep 176 GPRS bluetooth 112 GPS external 151 GPS Settings built in profiles 153 Gr
36. Chapter 4 Programs Using the Camera Pictures amp Videos Be Camera f Menu gt ee Keep in mind that if there are no pictures stored on your EP10 as yet you ll only see the Camera icon in this screen e Tap on the Camera icon to activate the camera The screen will display the image your camera is pointed at The camera is built into the back of the EP10 Pictures amp Videos Cy go Tal Gam 5 11 Photo Film Icon indicates the camera is active Tapping on this softkey displays thumbnails of photos stored on the EP10 Bz Thumbnails E Menu OK A i e Frame the image in the EP10 screen Press ENTER to snap the photograph Photo Menu When the camera is activated tapping on Menu displays a set of commands to help you modify how your camera operates the quality of the photos it takes and so on You can also use this menu to activate the video recorder rather than the still camera Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual EJ Chapter 4 Programs Moving Photos to the EP10 Pictures amp Videos FH go Ti af 5 17 A Mode Resolution Flash b Full Sereen Options Thumbnails E Menu OK ie yf A wt Noe O Note Video is a toggle command When the Still camera is activated Video is available in this menu When the video recorder is activated Still camera is available in this menu 4 10 2 Moving Photos to the EP10 Connect your device
37. Chapter 5 Settings Scanner Settings Scanner Settings Fl 2 Y edo am 12 13 Options lt Translations gt Barcodes Case 1 empty E Case 2 empty E Case 3 empty E Case 4 empty E Case 5 empty E Case 6 empty E Case 7 empty To change a setting press space or double click e Inthe Translations tab double tap on a Case to create rules Scanner Settings 1 2 Y PB am 11 06 Options lt Translations gt Ports To change a setting press space or double click e Tap on the No rule drop down menu to display the rules Scanner Settings CF g gt T qr 12 15 9M Scanner Settings GI g gt Yj f am 12 16 ho rule 1 y Verify No rule Match at index Match and replace at index Replace at index Add barcode prefix sufra E x DERE When you choose a rule an associated screen is displayed in which you can define the rule Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Scanner Settings pmm Settings 7 gt Til Me Gr 12 17 A Ma Match at index pr Verify BREE Erom right Action 5 11 21 2 1 Case Rules The case rules are defined as follows No rule ignored Match at index matches the match string at a specified index Match and replace at index matches the match string at a specified index and replaces changes it e Replace at index replaces changes unspecified data in a given range Add barcode prefix suffix adds a globa
38. Cradle full configuration consists of one serial DE 9M port and one micro USB port located at the base of the cradle These are COM and USB ports that allow serial and USB devices to com municate with the EP10 These ports include e One powered USB micro AB e One full Serial port Peripherals such as scanners printers GPS etc may be used with the EP10 and the cradle Check with Psion if there is any compatibility issue with the device you want to use with the EP10 and the cradle 6 11 5 Inserting the EP10 in the Vehicle Cradle The Powered Vehicle Cradle has a spring action that allows it to stretch up to accommodate the EP10 and then snap in place to hold the hand held securely You do not need to remove the hand strap to insert the hand held in the cradle To insert the EP10 in the Powered Vehicle Cradle e insert the top of the EP10 in the cradle and push the unit upward while you align the bottom of the EP10 with the base of the vehicle cradle e Release the EP10 to allow the cradle to firmly grip the hand held in place e Push down on the top of the cradle to ensure that the EP10 docking port is firmly connected to the Powered Vehicle Cradle Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle M o Bhan
39. E mail with Outlook PC with Windows Vista or Windows 7 PCs running Windows Vista or Windows 7 use Windows Mobile Device Center in place of ActiveSync ome 5 i f Mobile AMA connect without setting up your device e In the Windows Mobile Device Center tap on Set up your device Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Sending an E mail Wehat kinds of items do you want to sync The types of content you select will be kept up to date on both your device and the PE PA m 7 Calendar oop Calendar up bo date E mail cd a bes Mail up 16 durbe z Tasks Keep Tasks up to dete Fl Moies Lip Ov hoek rrira up te dat gi d Mobile Favorites Syne pour dire Web Erig e Make certain that a check mark is displayed in the checkbox next to E mail Tap on Next Note If an Exchange Server is detected a screen is displayed where you can enter the Server address your user name and so on and sync the EP10 with the Exchange Server directly over a cellular or wireless network when you are not connected to your PC This is an optional step that you can skip e Tap on Skip and then tap on Setup When E mail is checked for synchronization Outlook e mail messages are synchronized as part of the general synchronization process The next time you synchronize with Windows Mobile Center the e mail in Outlook on your PC will be transferred to the Messaging program on your EP10
40. Environment HTML XML Mobile Devices SDK JavaTM Visual Studio 2008 Standard protocol APIs Windows sockets Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual D 3 Appendix D Specifications Wireless Communication Application Software e Internet Explorer Mobile included with Windows Mobile 6 e Wordpad e ActiveSync e Mobile Control Center MCC device management D 1 3 Wireless Communication O Note 802 1lab g n and Bluetooth are available simultaneously e On board IEEE 802 11a b g n e Bluetooth v2 1 radio CCX V4 Certified UMTS 3 5G HSPA radio options TBD Integrated 5 band Antenna supports both voice and data SIRF starlV GPS D 1 4 Power Management e Optional 3 7 V 2400 mAh or High Cap 3600 mAh Li ion rechargeable batteries e Full Shift operation e SMART battery System backup 2 minutes during battery swap D 1 5 Expansion Slot One microSD slot D 1 6 Bar Code Application O Note User upgradeable e 2D EAI imager D 1 7 Digital Camera e 3 2 mega pixel colour e Auto Focus Dual LED Flash e Video capture capability D 1 8 Voice Over IP VOIP Push to talk D 1 9 Accessories For details about accessories available with the EP10 refer to Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accesso ries e Carrying Accessories Hand strap Carrying pouch and plastic carrying case e Communications Quad dock 4 site with 10 100 BaseT Ethernet and charge functions D 4 Psion
41. II A AR 13 Za PRONS COMU ON ERAN od E sawed 13 Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 3 1 a A e e O PUES po 17 A ll a AA a O e PR E E o E EO 17 3 2 1 Battery SE ta td ta praia 17 322 Removing Ihe Battery PACK ccc sr Ata 17 S20 Baer sWap iuris aora ias datan 17 See CHOPIN Ge Dalle E E E e o SU A eee saan 17 3 2 4 1 Chargers and DOCKING STO S smbasaiasrcda iii 18 Jo RO al a raras rada aaa circo aba OARE ES S 18 3 3 1 EPIO Alpha and Numeric KeybDOal dS sscrrissicaran irrita 18 332 LOCKING iNe he DO A e US NO E 19 Jo MOISES e od A o N EA 19 EROS Activating Modifier KeyS ccc ccc cece cence cence eee eee cent eee ee eens eneteeteeteesneteeees 20 Sc LOCKING MOdiNer Oy Sasa carne cc ccc cae anae ne eecdeawcunecagss caewis centauneweunccagsasaesnsees 20 334 A el A O oO EE naa aetadanesias 21 J393 The standard o A A 21 3 3 5 1 The Funcion Keys FI to Odessa eii 22 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual EN Table of Contents 3 4 33 3 6 3 7 3 8 39 3 10 3 11 3 12 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 17 3392 INE Mao KEYS A 22 3 3 6 The Numeric Keyboard Accessing Alpha K YS cece cece cence cece eee eeeeeneeeeeeeeteeenenes 23 3 301 Choosing a Single Alpha Character vasicn n rra 23 S200 Creating Uppercase LCUlelS c cacccadaceeunsccbinwedeuaiasenctdasexscsobbewelescecucestwecees 23 3 5 0 8 Choosing Multiple Alpha Characl S urinarias arar 23 334d o a o e O OP oi o air aTa 23 A e a O O on 24 3
42. Info Tab GPS Settings fH yt Ti Me qu 11 16 lt Info gt Power This tab provides general information about the GPS module such as the firmware version the date on which files were last updated and so on If GPS module support service is required you may be asked to tap on the Save button in this tab and forward the information to Psion support staff Advanced Tab GPS Settings Cr gt Tili Gm 6 58 Inta lt Advanced gt Power Enable 5545 ia Enable Static Navigation C Enable Smooth Tracking Factory Reset Satellite based augmentation systems SBAS support wide area or regional augmentation through the use of additional satellite broadcast messages When SBAS is enabled the accuracy of any fix is improved pro viding it is supported in the operator s region Static navigation helps eliminate false movements caused by poor fixes usually in a vehicle like a truck where the metal roof and sides may limit the receiver s view of the sky It also improves accuracy in down town areas with multi path interference caused by the GPS signals being reflected off large buildings Static navigation locks onto a calculated position and keep it until it detects that the receiver s position has changed significantly due to movement or simply getting a reasonably different calculated position Smooth Tracking uses an algorithm to calculate the next logical track in the projected path during brief sat ellite dat
43. Prepare information in OneNote on your PC and then transfer it to your EP10 where it will be available to you wherever you and your EP10 go AN Important Remember that you must have Microsoft Office OneNote 2010 and the latest version of ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center installed on your PC before you can set up a partnership between your EP10 and your PC Setting Up a Partnership e Start Office OneNote and ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Center on your PC e Connect the EP10 to your PC you can use a USB cable or a Bluetooth connection When a connection is established between the EP10 and your PC ActiveSync displays a New Partnership screen New Partnership Set Up a Partnership This wizard helps you establish a partnership between your mobile device and this computer You can set up either a standard partnership to synchronize data between your device and this computer or a guest partnership to simply transfer data between your device and this computer What kind of partnership would you like to establish between your device and this computer want to synchronize data between my device and this computer keeping data such as e mail and calendar items up o date in both places Guest partnership want to only copy and move information my device and this computer add and remove programs or restore a backup image on a device whose memory has been reset do not want to synchronize data e Choose Standard p
44. TCP IP Use server assigned addresses O Use specific server address Servers requiring assigned IP addresses may also need a way to map computer names to IP addresses The EP10 supports a variety of name resolution options DNS Alt DNS WINS and Alt WINS Your ISP or network administrator can determine which name resolution you need and can also provide the server address In addition you will want to ask if alternate addresses are available An alternate address may allow you to connect when the primary server is not available Domain Enroll To protect sensitive company data businesses use firewalls and proxies servers to limit access to company resources to company employees only If you need to access information on your company server remotely the Domain Enrollment utility allows you to sync your EP10 credentials with your company enrollment server allowing you to access your work remotely e Tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections gt Domain Enroll Domain Enrollment ac e Y f uu 8 52 Domain Enroll Enrolling in a domain will connect your phone with company resources Your phone may be restarted Back up your data before continuing You will peed the enrollment password provided by your system administrator Click Enroll to continue Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 117 Chapter 5 Settings Network Cards e Tap on the Enroll button ao qe Yule am 8 54 Company E mail Address
45. Ti NE E 12 42 My Connection User name Domain Tf provided by ISP or network administrator Fa Advanced y Back i Finish 7 Type the User Name Password and Domain Name as provided by your ISP or network administrator O Note Generally you will not need to change any of the Advanced settings For information about Advanced Modem Settings review the next section Changes to Advanced settings are only required in the following instances To change the baud rate settings dialing string commands or credit card options To change port settings To enter TCP IP settings because the server to which you are connecting does not dynamically assign addresses 8 Tap onthe Finish button 5 8 5 1 Advanced Modem Settings TCP IP Settings Tab If your server assigns IP addresses dynamically you will not need to change these settings If you need to make changes contact your ISP or network administrator for addresses 16 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Domain Enroll 5 8 6 Advanced ao e Y d qu 12 46 Servers lt TCP IP gt Servers Use server assigned IP address D Use specific IP address eza Use stip x Use sofware compression x Use IP header compression Server Settings Tab If your server assigns IP addresses dynamically you will not need to change these settings Advanced mo gt Y a 12 50 TCP IP lt Servers gt
46. User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Microphone 5 11 16 Microphone a TA A ENTE Default Default All Use this dialog box to adjust the gain for the specific microphones associated with your hand held Tap on Start gt Settings gt System gt Microphone icon Tap on the drop down menu and choose the microphone for which you want to adjust the gain Microphone a Y al m qu 2 18 Built in Micraphone Bluetooth Microphone Built in Microphone in call Bluetooth Microphone fin call Slide the tab at the top of the dialog box to the left to decrease the gain and to the right to increase the gain Tapping on the Default button sets the current microphone you ve chosen to the default gain Tapping on Default All sets all microphones listed to their default gain 5 11 17 PartnerUp This app displays a number of pre loaded applications Tapping on an app in the list takes you to an associ ated web site Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual EGI Chapter 5 Settings PsionVU 5 11 18 KA Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual The operator can then install the application If a license is required it can be obtained by sending an e mail to the software license mailbox or by contacting a Sales Rep from the Psion contact web page www psion com us about contact_psion offices htm Additional pieces of software such as a server must be obtained through Psion Tapping on a preloaded client in the PartnerUp
47. User Manual 163 Chapter 5 Settings PsionVU Er Vy 4 T 11 26 lt Applications Advanced Psion u Phone Select applications to be accessible from the Today screen DataGateway _ ActiveSyne _ Calculator _ Calendar Bs E Add E Edit OK e Tap in the checkbox next to each application you want displayed on the Today screen Tapping on the Add button displays a screen from which you can choose additional applications to add to the Applications tab Once the EPIO is reset the look of the Today screen differs significantly from the original version Adding Applications Yo ey om 5 34 Contacts Calendar Alarms Calculator PsionVu App Launch Keys y PaonLl Notification The Add and Edit buttons allow you to search for applications in the storage areas on your EP10 e g Win dows My Device etc and add applications to the list of items in the Today screen You can add a maximum of 18 applications after which the Add button is greyed out and the following message is displayed Maximum 18 entries reached e To add additional applications that will be accessible to the user from the Today screen tap on the Add button at the bottom of the Application screen The Select File screen is displayed 164 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings PsionVU PsionYU E Ti 11 25 Pone Applications Y Advanced Select applications t
48. Word Mobile ao g gt Ya 4 17 Soft keyboard icon TETE E RY A E ET K EES ES aaa Softkey Bar Softkeys Tapping on a softkey displays information associated with the softkey for example in the sample screen above the Menu softkey displays the commands associated with Word Mobile The View softkey allows you to tailor how the Word document will be displayed The Soft Keyboard Icon Tapping on the soft keyboard icon displays an onscreen keyboard you can use as an alternative to the EP10 keyboard Shift State Indicator Icon The softkey bar can also display the shift state indicator icon This icon indicates active modifier keys SHIFT ALT CTRL SYM and BLUE FN Word Mobile Pe YM 2 31 Shift state indicator icon When a modifier key is pressed it is displayed in the shift state indicator icon In the example above the BLUE FN key was activated To distinguish a locked modifier key a key that has been locked on from a modifier key that is only active until the next key is pressed locked keys are encircled in a black frame in the shift state indicator icon Refer to Activating Modifier Keys on page 20 for details 40 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 The Start Button 3 12 1 The Start Button The Start button provides access to a screen of applets available on your EP10 Tap on the Start button in the lower left corner of the
49. a navigation bar along the top of the screen which provides access to hotkeys Hotkeys act as shortcuts to apps Along the bottom of the screen a softkey bar contains softkeys that help you navigate in particular the Start button which provides access to everything else you ll need to work with Windows Embedded 6 5 PARE RATE tes Navigation bar phone voicemail 11 15 No New Messages e mail calendar Start button By Natificatior Compose i Soft key bar Softkeys e Use the stylus or your finger to scroll to and highlight the option you want to work with The high lighted option displays information specific to the applet For example highlighting the Calendar option lets you know if there are any appointments e Tap on any highlighted option to display the associated dialog box Note that you can also double tap on any option to display the dialog box Depending on which option you tap on the softkeys at the bottom of the screen change to help support working with the particular option you ve chosen 3 10 1 Customizing the Today Screen The items you see in the Today screen are Windows defaults To customize the screen to suit your purposes e Tap on the Start button Tap on the Settings icon followed by the Home icon e Inthe scrolling tab bar at the top of the screen scroll to Items Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 The Today Screen Default Options
50. below the drop down menu marks the disallowed items in red PsionVU Restrictions eres Advanced gt Cal go Ti 11 07 Phone Disable access to Start and Notificatio i x Administrator access in Start Menu Administrator Key Sequence Sn Blue Y C Launch an application on Startup To remove PsionVU from the Start screen e Tap in the checkbox next to Administrator access in Start Menu to deselect it The x should not be present in the checkbox The Administrator Key Sequence drop down menu provides a two key sequences you can use to gain access to PsionVU when it is not accessible from the Start screen 166 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings PsionVU Cr gh Ta wE Ge 11 07 Applicabane Advanced gt Phone ion u EL Pp E E 11 05 Disable access to Start and Notifcatio T cd plicabans lt Advanced gt Phone ee eee en amo i a EME y uli A x ae y Chi i Q Shift Blue 0 x Administrator access in Start Menu a ENE o o Administrator Key Sequence shift Blue Space Snir Blue 0 Y FP Launch an application on Startup O Note If you disable Administrator access in Start Menu or if you Disable Start the only way to access PsionVU or the Start screen applications is to type an Access Key Sequence In these cases it is important that you make note of the key sequence you ve chosen Launchin
51. blue characters above the numeric key 2 AN Important The letters you choose appear in the shift indicator icon at the bottom of the screen providing a visual indicator of which letter will be displayed on the screen To choose the letter a e Press the SHIFT key and type the numeric key 2 O Note To choose the second third or fourth alpha character assigned to a numeric key you may want to lock the SHIFT key on Remember that depending on how your EPIO is set up in the One Shots tab you may find that you need to press the SHIFT key twice to lock it on Refer to OneShots on page 137 for details To choose the second letter in the sequence in this example the letter b e Lock the SHIFT key on The shift state indicator icon in the taskbar represents the SHIFT key in yellow with a black frame around it to indicate that this key is locked on e Press numeric key 2 twice to display the letter b To choose the third letter in the seguence in this example the letter c Lock the SHIFT key on Press numeric key 2 three times to display the letter c O Note Keep in mind that there is a time out if you pause for one second between key presses when selecting the second third or fourth letters on a key For example suppose you want to type the letter c you would need to press the 2 key three times With the SYM key locked on if you press 2 twice and
52. button your device will repair the connection settings for PCS Vision Repair Connectoid By clicking the Provision button your device will attempt to auto update your Vision profile PTS Vision Provision By tapping on Repair Connectoid your data connection is restored Note that PCS Vision is the default name assigned to the Sprint network connection Phone ea en Tg oe Ge 1 47 Phone ea en Yi i m 1 48 Location Data Settings gt Systems Y Location Data Settings gt System 5 By clicking tie Repair Connectoid By clicking the Repair Connectoid button your device will repair the b connection settings tor PCS Visi Repair Connectoid 4 utton your device will repair the itera connection settings for PCS Vision Repair Connectold Repair PCS Vision ss connectoid cd Fo Connectoid successfully Ye repaired Frewision A 4 1 2 Sound Tab and the Voicemail Field If you need to find your voicemail number e Tap on the a Navigation bar at the top of the screen to display the hotkeys Tap on the Phone Set tings hotkey Phone Settings hotkey Phone wh ee yy ME 11 26 m all mi This tab displays the pre configured voicemail number A 10 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix A Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Verizon Connection Phone iia MA de 11 21 Version I lt Sounds gt Location Number 359 912 2685 Voicemail A 4 2 V
53. customize the screen to suit your purposes O Note Refer to Customizing the Today Screen on page 73 for details about this screen 5 6 Power The Power applet provides information about the battery installed in your EP10 and it allows you to define the behaviour of your EP10 to minimize power consumption 100 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Battery Power 5 6 1 5 6 2 Battery Power CH Er Ti m m 3 30 Battery H Battery gt Advanced Main battery Lilon Battery power remaining a gt Power mAH consumed 35 This tab monitors and displays the current battery capacity of the battery installed in the EP10 Advanced Tab Power Co gt Ti A m aa Battery lt Advanced gt Battery D On battery power O Tum aff screen if device not used far Lrminute 7 On external power ik Tum off screen if device nok used for 5 minutes This tab allows you to tailor how long the EP10 can remain idle before the screen is turned off while running on battery power and also on external power Note The options in the screen behave like Suspend mode If the screen turns off the unit is in suspend mode tapping on the touchscreen or pressing a key opens the screen in which you were working before it was turned off To determine behaviour when the unit is running On battery power tap in the checkbox to the left of Turn off screen if device is not used for
54. eae ae ee eee 159 Silo Mail econo nia AAA 160 Ole Stolade Lal cosas caros oia eae coe dadas E eee s 160 SMIO WICTODNONGS 65 eses rara EG oh eee Ree es rr AE ss EES 161 Sila POROS erre cae aras Rea ee eee oe ee eee aa 161 AMO POM Ve cda iron aserrada radares 162 Silo PSION MU MENU 22 e Be ese ea e aa A AE A 163 Sila AMINO Pass WOTO o a3 a oak daa ai E A a E 163 SIS SNEISCIUNOS e croxss de cetro 163 lo RESC 2 6 eee Gna an te woe Oe Ee ES owe ee ars 168 5 11 18 5 Control Panel Settings lt lt u lt lt siere weeee ede 4 bow e CSE S SS ES HS 170 5118 6 Import and Export Settings ss sa ec 0 edu eb se dw GE ow ew See eS ee ee SEES 171 5 11 18 7 Activating a Change User Mode 172 S119 Regional SENOS lt lt ass Bee eee raros maes BORE A eee Ga Gs 173 94 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 511 20 Remove Programs lt cd dssa ceases adiks ban ob44 dee we eae EA See GSE EES S 174 Dalz Scanner eNOS secarse sms daran aras Shee ara 174 Sle ADOS labs secs dass oe eek dada aan dao eek eee ee eee 175 SUL Translations lave 44 44 a4 44 teh Gwe ee EES Se Bae eee he eee 177 511 213 Ports Tab Port Replicator Port A COM5 Port B COM6 Port C COM7 179 EZ e a ce ask aoe ba eee wie oR bee As Bo Sale ee eS AAA 181 Dildo SENSO RAON e ies da a a AAA a a ee eee 182 5 11 24 System Properties e ada ds Gee 183 EA A oe oe eee ee Be eee ees 183 Olle Ole necdilang cat aeaaeae
55. ee ees 143 Ollie Battery Power TaD censores creiras eee Ewe AAA oe Eee 144 Sila Advanced TID amasar 144 511 24 External Power Tab lt 145 Silo COMICAS e444 6454 bee cn ra aa a ERA A 145 5 1 31 CHOOSING aGertificate asec aoe a oa rara RARE RRS 145 Ale COMPASS sierra Cobo ee be ew Re eee ee eo ee ee Ad 147 Ole COWIE encia resis raras iaa Fee ee eee Ee eS he ees 148 Olle CUSTOMS FSC seee Ga Ok E Ae Oe Oe OO At ee ee A 148 Oe 0 aaopeeee tae anes ebeeaee bee he tens he ees whe eee he ae eee 148 Olt SNUG 24 oe ees bo be ee Oo ee Re ee ee ee he ee ee eee ge wae ee ee eG 149 Slee OUMICS e seso rocosa Ba oe SO eee he eek Ge bee ee ee ee Ae A 149 S743 WOUON Mel 2 cirio usarse 150 DIGG SENOS aa gt endesa da aa A RA AA 150 Sl ENO e esae eee e bee ee ee hee eee eee eee ee eee ee eee tee ee eee 150 Sle ENO REDONO 3 sis eee eek Bara a ar AAA 151 5 11 10 GPS Global Positioning System lt lt 46646 60342268 6464 Sa KEES E RE HS SRR Ew OHSS 151 5 11 11 GPS Global Positioning System Settings 68 cis ecos bee iwc avGee See eww se ees G 153 5 11 12 Imagers Settings ocioso Se ww he wd a a AAA A 156 3 143 Manage TFIOOBES s lt lt eae we 2 ee ke das e dara a oe eee kd a a we he AY GH SS 156 BALIS Tigg f MappINGS se scs renere 28 eta Lekak eee ebeeSee eden deed 157 51 14 Managed POTTS s e ue e 6 eed ue de we a BOSS Eo A ewe oe Bes 159 Dll MEMO crean ads ano asa a a eee ee ee ee eek
56. ete ica lor 151 GPS Global POSITIONING System SCUUINOS c2 lt c 0s0ccesuvenckweddaentenduededabus Seavdcdddeeleeeedawtaw sees 153 ME EEEE e Sere sees 156 Manage NGOS prat rr yin E ESERE REENE 156 Nr AAA e E O 157 ME GeO lOO 100 e AAA on e E OR N 159 o AP e E o A A TE A T 159 SASL MAI TO e e rr Er IAS ERE EEA 160 aoe SOEC y AAA o UU E 160 A O oo ee ee Oe 161 PEPTIC cotorra tera toda cea aged 161 A o PO A 162 A A o OP EE O hesera tented i E 163 SMS AQUA Sator PassWord arde rar rides 163 DANG SV a po cnetcaccdigussi E O E EE AE S E A E E TES 163 A A 168 BANG COMM A e RO heceeend acetates daa 170 5 1118 6 Import and Export SettingS cece cece eee cece cence nee e cence ee ee eee eeneteeneeteens 171 31118 7 Activating a Change User MOC ics ccccdicecdaanewedewstecneuaeed ecidad dd leceseteseawees s 172 Redional OCIO coronas dise os ias 173 REMOVE POON SINS pecar ds ate AR dara lio 174 E N EEEE eo O TEETER EEEE 174 WR ORS T aae E E ee E RE ee EEEE T 175 SEL o SS TE ETA 1 7 5 11 21 3 Ports Tab Port Replicator Port A COM5 Port B COM6 Port C COM7 179 a E E EE IE TEE A EEE unaahn 181 AA AI IA 182 O PP ORO paearacaras cesaayae tauesaweraeoneees aR E 183 Tas MANO rural Cs OE racers ERAS as 183 aa AAA A 184 SA ALS A a A ccvecenenuededcestcesucereceecousueae 185 511262 CVCAUNO SCION treated dais dae 186 izo Mandoia POTOSI eecdDacece taseawated ic cieus td EEEN EAA ENA 187 5 11 26 4 Deleting a Profile
57. ge yl a TA Meeting 1 00 p m monday Edit Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs File Explorer Editing a Task Tap on a task in the task list to highlight it Tap on the Edit softkey in the softkey bar to display a detailed task screen where you can define task characteristics Figure 41 Task Details Screen Tasks ao go Ye Gam 9 58 Notes Task gt Notes Tasks ac gr f m 9 57 Notes Task gt Notes Due Subject Meeting 1 00 p jW Priority Normal status Mot Completed Occurs Reminder Starts None Categories No categories Due Mone Occurs Once Sereibvity Normal Reminder None Each of the nine items in this screen when tapped displays a drop down menu where you can choose from a list of options Once you ve completed all the appropriate fields tap on OK to save your changes O Note You can also tap on the Notes tab to add additional information about the task you are defining Deleting a Task e Press and hold the stylus on a task until a pop up menu is displayed e Tap on Delete Task Marking a Task as Completed e In the Tasks list tap the checkbox next to the items that are completed Sorting Tasks Tap on the Menu softkey and tap on Sort By You can choose from Status Priority Subject Start Date or Due Date The tasks are arranged in the list according to the criterion you chose Limiting the Tasks Displayed in the Ta
58. he Be BGs ow Se Pee SRS e ES 33 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual KN 310 2 5 Time Date and AlarMS 0 0 0 eee ee ee ee 33 3102 6 Text Messages sake neds teed ee baw nk eG da 34 ADS E MAIL NOCIO 44 comas ee pe eee ee ewe ee ee we ee A Be 36 3 10 4 Calendar of Upcoming Appointments 36 310 41 Creating and Editing Appointments of 3 10 4 2 Deleting Appointments 2 0 ee 39 Oto FNO S a e i e kw ako eee pee bees hee ee eee Oh ee Oe ee eo a te 39 3 11 Using the Navigation Bar and Hotkeys 0 e 39 ole WNC SOMME Dols eee e porn oo Os Pee a Peake bee e eG ee Oe ee GHEE SESE TE OY TN 40 Slee TAEST BUON 2 rosaa ea ee ee he Eee A Al 3 13 Managing Files and Folders 2 2 e Al 3131 Creating a New Folder 22 4444 256544648 680 ded eee ead wd bb Sew AA Al Silo2 Penang PIC so 4 4 64 bee 4 lt q 8 amp eae e BG Swe OSS BSS HS SESE EH EGE HSE HEH Gs Al alos COPYING OTIC sre sarei eeee solia Bee Eee Eee ee Bee ete aa 42 3134 Deleti ga File cance enegadeeeek ude ede te snaki cd eeas era ds 42 Sle HSIN Mens 4c eee peep eee eo ee eee eee ee eS AA ee oe ees 42 Sil POPUD MENUS errores Be eR ERS EER HERES Re ow eS EEE EE OER 42 315 Programs Using Applications 4 lt 4 lt 0 c d4 need bee Eaaee hee dude dees Re EH Eee RE 43 314G SENOS see errada cos ee we ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eae ee eee es 44 3 17 Data Transfer Betwee
59. hi F 4 26 1 Connecting to a Terminal Server e Tap on Start gt Remote Desktop Mobile In the Remote Desktop screen choose a Computer from the drop down menu e Type your User name Password and Domain if required Tap on Connect 4 26 2 Disconnecting Without Ending a Session AN Important These commands are accessed from the Start menu in the Terminal Services screen used to access the PC s commands Do NOT use the Start menu on your EP10 In the Remote Desktop Connection window tap on Start gt Shutdown e Tap on Disconnect gt OK 4 26 3 Ending a Session e Inthe Terminal Services Client screen tap on Start gt Shutdown e Tap on Log Off gt OK 4 27 SIM Toolkit Ul A UI SIM Toolkit Ul is an ETSI SMG standard for Value Added Services and e commerce using GSM phones The EP10 operator can for example check bank accounts and pay bills using a SIM Toolkit enabled phone with an appropriate SIM Toolkit specific SIM card which will provide much of the information required to conclude a transaction over GSM If this service is available in your organization the system administrator can provide the set up information for your service Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual NM Chapter 4 Programs WiFiConnect A R C 4 28 WiFiConnect A R C WiFiConnect e Tap on the Start button to access the WiFiConnect A R C icon The WiFiConnect A R C utility provides a quick method to configure a device for use on a pri
60. ie dE ae iia ES Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Table of Contents C 2 1 Predefined Presses rro ota nie pelao ipod C3 C22 BarCode Predefined Presets viaria macia naa Eo CLel Bar Code Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets ooocoococcoccoccorcorcoomoooo C3 C 2 3 Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets cc ccc ccc cee cence eee n cen eeneeeceeeeeeeeeeneees C 4 C24 Image Capture Predefined Presets soria si ad RENERT EIVA C 4 Coo USING IMG IMaders AD DIET o cxcctccccessexoslecdseues sceadeccnnes ale das Co Cal Configuring the Image Capture Presets ccc cceccocdececseeeedetawcne erro oe ES C 3 2 Selecting a Camorra nt ias C5 C33 Setting Me ACUSE Preset eroris sridi a rE A it C5 WOW A edeneiaaeneia anos anaes oueesaueueee cS C33 Creanga CUSTOM PreSet lt icncceaceawscaucanes deeanaecenesdeswaunesnesasaeasaeestevincetwascsaeeseeensees C 6 Cao MOCITVING a Custom Prese lc sscccctatcucciactacand in osa GT Col Removifida Custom Preset escrinesriesraisdinrniri rne a a a aana EY C4 Contiguring the Bar Code Decoding C mera PreSets snicccincecccdevnacaesacensndscsdaceudeseswondsdcesesceodes Co Cadi a Aral A ASS C 8 CA Setting the Active Presei tasa A aaa Bu C 4 3 Viewing aPreset ooococcoccoccocnoccncnor corno rro CO CAG Creanga CUSTONTPTESOL oceccccneadwnecepeatccas rre nese gat ese nee pendewedvneseqiasseauieas Co Cao Modiiyinga Custom Prese rain Rin C 10 CAG Removilind a CUSTONTPreSP Licitacion C 10 C 4 7 Conf
61. indicator 208 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Charging Cable RV6008 6 10 2 3 6 10 3 6 10 4 6 10 5 Inserting the EP10 in the Vehicle Cradle The Unpowered Vehicle Cradle is equipped with a spring so that it can stretch up as the EP10 is inserted and then snap back into place to hold the hand held securely when the EP10 is released You do not need to remove the hand strap to insert the hand held in the cradle To insert the EP10 in the Unpowered Vehicle Cradle Insert the top of the EP10 into the top of the cradle and push the EP10 upward while you align the bottom of the EP10 with the base of the vehicle cradle Release the EP10 to allow the cradle to snap into place firmly gripping the hand held gt S SES rw 0 Ni a Charging Cable RV6008 Power can be added to the Unpowered Vehicle Cradle using an optional charging cable model number RV6008 When attached to the cradle the RV6008 Charging Cable can be connected to the EP10 16 pin docking connector providing a female DC jack connector that is compatible with standard vehicle power adaptors like the RV3050 Vehicle Power Adaptor or other standard adaptors that provide 5V 2A DC Vehi
62. is not in use tap in the checkbox to the left of Turn off backlight if device is not used for O Note This option is essentially suspend mode If the backlight is turned off tapping on the screen or pressing a key displays the screen in which you were working before the backlight turned off e Tap on the drop down menu and choose the number of seconds or minutes the backlight will remain on when the hand held is idle e Jo Turn on backlight when a button is pressed or the screen is tapped tap in the checkbox to the left of this option 5 11 2 4 External Power Tab Turn on backlight when a button is pressecd or Me screen is tapped Adjust power settings to conserve power i AN FA Pa Bs j E OK This tab determines the behaviour of the backlight when the hand held is using external rather than battery power Refer to the instructions in Battery Power Tab in the previous section for details 5 11 3 Certificates e Tap on Start gt Settings and then tap on the System icon e Tap on the Certificates icon A public key is transmitted as part of a certificate The certificates listed in the Certificates tabs ensure that the submitted public key is in fact the public key that belongs to the submitter The hand held checks that the certificate has been digitally signed by a certification authority that the hand held explicitly trusts Your EP10 has certificates already preinstalled in the unit Personal certificat
63. keyboard numeric or alpha Function keys can be used with the Windows Embed ded 6 5 operating system or another application Numeric Keyboard Access On a numeric keyboard the Function keys F1 to F10 are assigned to numeric keys 1 through O e Press SHIFT followed by a numeric key from 1 to 10 to activate the associated Function key Alpha Keyboard Access On an alpha keyboard the Function keys are labelled in blue print in the lower right corner of alpha keys Y through N To access Function keys F1 to F10 e Press the BLUE FN key followed by the alpha key that corresponds with the Function key you want to activate For example press BLUE FN Y to activate F1 press BLUE FN U to activate F2 and SO on The Macro Keys While Macro keys are not physically stamped on the keyboard up to 12 macro functions can be added using the Scancode Remapping function Refer to Scancode Remapping on page 140 for details about mapping keys For details about creating a macro refer to Macro Keys on page 137 22 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 The Numeric Keyboard Accessing Alpha Keys 3 3 6 The Numeric Keyboard Accessing Alpha Keys On numeric keypads you ll need to take a few extra steps to access the alphabetic characters 3 3 6 1 Choosing a Single Alpha Character The examples below illustrate how to access A B and C all of which are printed in
64. operation C 4 13 Filter Tab Manipulating Bar Code Data To configure rules for manipulating bar code data Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab e Tap on the Imagers icon and then tap on the Filter tab PTS Imager Settini ea pbs Tal 20 gm 9 16 Barcoding lt Filter gt Translations To change a setting press space or double click to cancel press lt Esc gt Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix C Imagers Applet Translation Tab Configuring Rules C 4 13 1 Modifying a Bar Code Setting The rules for manipulating data from selected bar code symbologies can be modified To change the set tings for a symbology Tap on the symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change For a parameter that can take a range of values Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click the parameter An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting is displayed Type a value in the field provided For a parameter that takes a single character Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click on the parameter The fol lowing screen is displayed PTS Imager Settini ea a Til SE om 9 20 l Press the Key to Insert Press ESC for the default value When you ve completed your edits tap on OK
65. scan code that is mapped to a virtual key a function or a macro Scancode Remapping allows you to change the functionality of any key on the keyboard A key can be remapped to send a virtual key e g VK_F represents the F key VK_RETURN represents the ENTER key etc perform a function e g turn the scanner on change volume contrast etc or run a macro There are three different tables of scancode mappings the Normal table the FN table and the SYM table The Normal table defines unmodified key presses the FN table defines key presses that occur when the FN BLUE modifier is on the SYM table defines key presses that occur when the SYM modifier is on The default mappings of these scancodes can be overwritten for each of these three tables using Scancode Remapping Buttons el 4 Gar 4 15 Unica Scancode Remap gt Auto 8 Norma sym O EN Se a a add 3 Menu OK The first column in the Scancode Remapping tab displays the scancodes in hexadecimal If the scancode is remapped to a virtual key that virtual key is displayed in the next column labelled V Key A virtual key that is Shifted or Unshifted is displayed in the third column labelled Function If the scancode is remapped to a function or a macro the first and second columns remain blank while the third column contains the function name or macro key number e g Macro 2 Adding a Remap To add a new
66. softkey bar to display your programs 3 13 Managing Files and Folders Windows Embedded 6 5 files are stored in folders and sub folders that are accessible with File Explorer You can open Save rename copy and paste files in the same manner as you would on any desktop PC Tap on the Start button Use the stylus to scroll to the File Explorer icon G gr K d uu 4 09 settings sa TE Windows Media Tap on the icon to display the File Explorer screen Tap to display additional Tap to display sorting option storage files ull ConnMgr File Explorer an gt Ti d qm 4 44 an gt Ti d qm 3 45 A My Device w Name w Files stored PGS a E tically y PP BN RAM Disk ull Documents an By Flash Disk p Flash Disk Select Files MUSIC music di My Documents di My Documents ij Program Files via Program Files Ey 5 eA H 3 13 1 Creating a New Folder Tap Start gt File Explorer Tap the Menu softkey and in the pop up menu choose New Folder Use the EP10 keyboard or the soft keyboard to assign a name to the folder 3 13 2 Renaming a File Press and hold the stylus on the file you want to rename A ring of dots is displayed followed by a pop up menu Tap Rename The file name is highlighted Type a new name Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual EN Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 Copying a File 3 13 3 Copying a File e Press and hold the stylus on the file you wa
67. ss 10 24 Preparing the EPIO Tr Operon ea acs wa Ale wok ee AE ae Ew RG eee RE OEE BSE EES Oe 11 2 41 The Batteries 2400 mAh and 3600 mAh Lithium ION o 11 242 Were We bane 6 eeee ea thee oe heeds hee eee bs Ce HE RSG d Se eee Hee es 11 2 4 3 Removing the Battery ee 11 2 4 4 Switching the EP10 Hand Held On 2 e 11 2 4 5 Switching the EP10 Hand Held Off ee 11 A9 Reen EPIO 44 6 Bu eee BS be tenidos ens BE Rw eee oe A 12 25 Performing a Warm Rese os hee booed SOA EAE MERE AAA BAO SEE A 12 Zoe FPerrormind da Clean Stall conan ie we ER Oe OH RH OH re HOE a 12 Ce POLOO be cis ee ee cee Poe eee eee be EES EE Sw eee eae eee eee 13 2 5 4 Performing a Hardware Restt ee 13 26 The IOUCASCIO sara ods whee aaa aa aa a ow 2 EEG 13 2 61 Aligning Calibrating the Touchscreen ne 13 26 2 LOCKING the TOUCHSCTEEN esca eras oe or oo ee ee EA A PORE Oe Se eo a 13 OE ca eee ob hee eH REED URS RES ERS EERE eee eS 13 29 Date WaN eo caus err ewes eee eee SRE OSE ee oo eee ee ewes 13 22 Phone COMMUNICACI N se sesos amp beds Beh SSSR GEE aa aa 13 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 2 Getting Started Features of the EP10 Hand Held Features of the EP10 Hand Held Receiver Light sensor 3 Light emitting diodes Stylus Vertical scroll button Scan button RIGHT SIDE Microphone FRONT Volume button Scan button LEFT S
68. that NationalAccess is the default name assigned to the Verizon network connection Phone ET gt e E 4 25 PM Phone T gt Yi te Ge 4 25 Location lt Data Settings gt System 5 E E lt Data Settings gt System 5 By clicking the Repair Connectold By clicking the Repair Connectoid air the button pour dewce will repar the connection settings for Nationaidccess a Repair Connectoid TE Repair NationalAccess m 3 connectoid b gt Connectoid successfully repaired Yes rer Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual APPENDIX PORT PINOUTS B3 DOCKPOrCPINOU A bo Be Battery Contact PINOUT sisas oe A ee eRe ew AAA B 3 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual E Appendix B Port Pinouts Dock Port Pinout B 1 Dock Port Pinout Direction Rela VDD_EXT PWR 3 VDD_EXT PWR VDD_EXT PWR Input These 3 pins are connected together VDD_EXT PWR BATT OUT VDD_BATT_OUT Output PO AUDIO_P Output Audio positive ey IO E Audio negative VDD_USBOTG Bi directional USB Power 5 5V As output sup plies external devices when EP10 is in USB Host mode As input charges battery when EP10 is in USB Client mode od 14 15 16 ND TXDATA RS 232 data transmit Max bit rate 115 kbits sec RXDATA RS 232 data receive Max bit rate 115 kbits sec ae B 2 Battery Contact Pinout pe e ELA HN Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual ES APPENDIX IMAGERS AN dl el S Y
69. the 1D and PDF symbologies that the imager can decode For a list of these symbologies see Imager Bar Code Symbologies on page C 18 and Color Camera Bar Code Symbol ogies on page C 19 Matrix This preset enables the decoding of all 2 D symbologies that the imager can decode See Imager Bar Code Symbologies on page C 18 and Color Camera Bar Code Symbologies on page C 19 for a list of these sym bologies Postal This preset enables the decoding of all the postal symbologies that the imager can decode See Imager Bar Code Symbologies on page C 18 and Color Camera Bar Code Symbologies on page C 19 for a list of these symbologies C 2 3 Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets The following presets enable successful bar code image capture in almost all conditions O Note It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible Default This preset works in a wide range of conditions It is optimized for a normal office lighting about 300 Lux Low light This preset is designed for very dark conditions such as inside a warehouse where the lights are kept low or inside an unlit truck This preset increases either the exposure time or the gain Low power This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to conserve the battery power on the EP10 Glossy surface This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to reduce reflection This preset is used to read bar codes that are behind gl
70. the cable in again e Ifthe EP10 indicator still shows a fault the EP10 requires service 6 6 5 5 Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off e Check the AC cable Replace with the same type if the cable is suspect e Ifthe adaptor LED stays OFF the adaptor is defective and requires service 6 7 Quad Charger Model No RV3004 6 7 1 Charging the EP10 Battery Quad Battery Charger Model No RV3004 can charge up to four batteries simultaneously 6 7 2 Installation The charger can be wall mounted using the wall mount bracket model number RV6009 or it can be oper ated on a flat surface Install the charger in an area that is free from excessive dirt dust and contaminants The ambient temperature must be in the range O C and 40 C 32 F to 104 F The charger will not charge batteries outside of this temperature range For maximum performance it is recommended that the charger be operated at room temperature a temperature range between 18 C to 25 C 64 F to 77 F The charger can consume up to 1 5 A at 100 240 VAC Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying the charger is adequate for this loading especially if several chargers are being powered from the same cir cuit After unpacking the unit e Visually check the charger for damage e Install the IEC power cord and apply power AN Important Use IEC 320 C13 power cords approved by Psion with the ground pin connected to a proper earth grounded receptacle Check with a qualified ele
71. then pause between key presses for 1 second the letter b will be selected automatically 3 3 6 2 Creating Uppercase Letters To display capital letters Lock the SHIFT key on All alpha keys are displayed in uppercase until you press the SHIFT key again to unlock switch off the function of this key 3 3 6 3 Choosing Multiple Alpha Characters e Lock the SHIFT key on Each time you press a numeric key from 2 through 9 an alpha character will be displayed on the screen Remember that you can refer to the shift state indicator icon in the taskbar for a visual indication of which alpha key will be displayed on the screen AN Important Once you have finished typing alpha characters remember to turn off or unlock the SHIFT key Check the shift state indicator icon refer to Figure 3 3 on page 21 to make certain that the key is turned off 3 3 7 The Keypad Backlight The intensity of the keypad backlight can be configured using the Backlight icon accessed by tapping on Start gt Settings gt System gt Backlight Refer to Backlight Screen and Keypad on page 143 for details about this option Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 The Display 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 3 The Display EP10s are equipped with display backlighting to improve character visibility in low light conditions The backlight switches on when a key is pressed or the screen
72. to your PC with ActiveSync e Locate the pictures on your PC and drag photos from their folder to the Mobile Device EP10 The EP10 can be found under Computer My Computer on PCs running Windows XP 4 10 3 Opening a Photo To open a photo tap on Start gt Pictures amp Videos You ll see a thumbnail of your photos e Tap on a thumbnail to open the photo i mt TEE FE gt a Pictures amp Videos EN g gt Ti edo Gm 5 01 ap Camera K Menu eS pa O Note If you ve stored your photos on a storage card you ll need to tap on the storage card icon to display your photos 4 10 4 Deleting a Photo Press and hold the stylus on the thumbnail photo you want to delete to display a pop up menu Tap on Delete e Confirm your choice when prompted Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Editing a Photo 4 10 5 Editing a Photo Tap on a thumbnail photo to open it e Tap on Menu gt Edit The Rotate command is now displayed in the softkey bar Additional editing tools are listed in the Menu 4 10 6 Creating a Slide Show To view a Slide show e Tap on the Menu gt Play Slide Show The slide show begins in slide show mode photos are displayed for about five seconds one after the other e To display the slide show tool bar tap anywhere on the photo Pause Previous Play Next me p m Close 4 10 7 Using the Video Recorder Tap on the Camera icon Pictures amp Vide
73. turn the hand held off before removing the battery it may be necessary to reboot the unit Any active sessions may be lost Battery packs shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40 and must be fully charged prior to use Batteries can be charged using a variety of chargers and docking stations along with an EP10 inter nal charger When using the internal charger a suitable power source is required All chargers and docking Stations are described in Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories 2 4 2 Installing the Battery e Match the contacts at the bottom of the battery with those in the battery well of the EP10 hand held and gently snap into place 2 4 3 Removing the Battery e Slide the battery release button located just above the battery to the right to release and remove the battery from the unit 2 4 4 Switching the EP10 Hand Held On e Press and release the Power button The centre LED flashes yellow and the desktop Today screen is displayed O Note If the EPIO was already in use pressing the Power button wakes it from suspend The screen in which you were working prior to the suspend state is displayed AN Important If your EP10 fails to power up consider the following troubleshooting options the battery capacity may be lower than the suspend threshold it may be overheated gt 60 C or the battery may have fallen below the configured suspend threshold Refer to Section 5 6 4 on pa
74. type will appear The BKSP DEL Key The BKSP key sometimes referred to as destructive backspace moves the cursor one character to the left erasing the incorrectly entered key stroke The DEL key BLUE FN BKSP erases the character at the cursor position The ALT and CTRL Keys The ALT and CTRL keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are application dependent A key combination is required to access these keys e To access the ALT key press BLUE FN TAB e To access the CTRL key press BLUE FN ESC The TAB Key Typically the TAB key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or downward The ESC Key Generally this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu dialog box or activity and return to the previous one The SPACE Key Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters In a Windows dialog box pressing the SPACE key enables or disables a checkbox The SCAN Keys The EP10 is equipped with three SCAN keys two are located on the keyboard just below the display and a third SCAN key is situated on the left side of the hand held SCAN keys activate the scanner beam For a unit that does not have an internal imager these keys can be remapped to serve other functions The Function Keys F1 to F10 Function keys F1 to F10 perform special custom defined functions These keys are accessed differently depending on the type of
75. using GTC as the inner method which utilizes one time passwords OTPs for authentication against OTP data bases such as SecurelD e TLS Provides strong security via the use of client certificates for user authentication 5 8 9 2 5 Verify Server Certificate When the Verify Server Certificate box is checked the EP10 will verify the certificate provided by the au thentication server during the authentication process This requires that an appropriate certificate be man ually installed on EP10 for the verification 128 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Wi Fi Config Setting Up the 802 11a b g n Radio Wi Fi Config ao gv Vy ie m 5 52 SSID Auth Mode WP42 Enterpnise EAP j Encryption TKIP 2 isl EAP FAaST MSCHAP 2 Leer name Passw Anony Icl Tunnel PAC Mach PAC Provisioning verify Server Certificate Enable GPMK 5 8 9 2 6 Enable OPMK When used with compatible wireless infrastructure Opportunistic Key Caching OPMK reduces the number of full authentications required when roaming This option is only visible when WPA2 Enterprise EAP au thentication mode is chosen Wi Fi Config ao qe Y pe am 5 53 sip leet Auth Mode WRA2 Enterprise EAP Encryption TKIP EAF FAST MSCHAP 2 Leer name Passel Anony Ic EA Tunnel PAC E po E Provisioning nony maus 4u then bcate i _ verify Server Certificate 5 8 9 2 7 Connecting the Wireless Ne
76. want to record Tap on the Stop button when you ve completed your recording e Tap on OK to save the recorded note A speaker icon is displayed in the note indicating the presence of a recording within the note Notes Cr gt A Gm 8 56 E an A E E x e To play the recorded note tap on the speaker icon Tap on Menu and choose View Recording Toolbar again to turn off the feature 4 15 Task Notification Tasks lets you create lists of entries representing your responsibilities upcoming projects and so on If you ve assigned any tasks this option lets you know how many active tasks you have O Note You can synchronize the Task Notification option so that any tasks are displayed on your EP10 as well as your PC Refer to Synchronizing E mail with Outlook PC with Windows XP OS on page 60 and Synchronizing E mail with Outlook PC with Windows Vista or Windows 7 on page 62 Each section outlines how to synchronize options other than e mail e Tap on Start gt Tasks to display the Tasks screen Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Task Notification Tasks ac go Tye Ga 9 42 E Tap here to add a new task Creating a Task e Tap in the field labelled Tap here to add a new task e Type your task description ao qe ul A E 9 53 Tap here to add a new task Meeting 1 00 p m monday 000g j a F Press ENTER to add the task to your list 7 F ac
77. with devices such as Imagers It is also possible to map different sources to the same module trigger consumer Add Key Only existing trigger sources are shown in the Source combo box To add a new source to this list tap on the Add Key button A dialog box pops up allowing you to select the keyboard key to use as a trigger source Press a key to use as a trigger source Trigger Press Type You can enable either an Up Down or Double Click response to a trigger press Normally when a trigger keyboard key etc is pressed and released a trigger down event is sent to the owner that is the ap plication receiving the trigger press information followed by a trigger up If Double Click is chosen in this menu when the trigger is pressed released and then pressed again a double click event will occur If a mapping with the Up down type has also been configured for the same source it will only receive the first set of trigger events Module to Trigger This identifies the driver or application receiving the trigger presses 158 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Managed Programs Show All Modules By default inactive owners are not shown By checking this checkbox all owners both active and inactive are displayed 5 11 14 Managed Programs Managed Programs lets you view download and install applications that are deployed by the System Center Mobile Device
78. 0 If you are using a USB cable to connect to your PC you will need to disable the ActiveSync USB connection e On your PC open the ActiveSync window and tap on File gt Connection Settings If you are using Windows Mobile Device Center tap on Mobile Device Settings gt Connection Settings e Disable Allow USB connection by tapping in the checkbox to the left of this option e Connect the EP10 to your PC using Bluetooth or a USB cable e On your EPIO tap Start gt Internet Sharing e Choose the PC Connection type USB or Bluetooth e Choose the network connection that the EP10 should use to connect to the Internet e Tap Connect It takes approximately 30 seconds to establish a connection If you are prompted to turn on Bluetooth tap Yes For PC Running Windows XP or Earlier If you are using a Bluetooth connection execute the following steps on your PC e Tap Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections e Right click on Bluetooth Network Connections and click on Bluetooth Network Devices If the EP10 is listed as a Network Access Point choose Connect If it is not listed choose Create a new connection and use the New Connection Wizard to add the EP10 to the list For PC Running Windows Vista or Windows 7 If you are using a Bluetooth connection execute the following steps on your PC e Tap Start gt Control Panel gt Network amp Sharing Center e Double tap on Set up a new connection or network e In the Cho
79. 00 sc cacceeccsecacdecessecdoncss sitio 200 6 5 1 WOOO AEEA EE AEE EA E E NE E ET EE ER 201 Oae 0121 A E ENE EEEE EEA E E EEE E EEEE E E 201 6 5 2 1 cnaroina the EPIO Baie Y uesrserrreti ai E a as 201 zz Chargnga Spare Balear vi ada daa oo ados 201 Gads a SS 202 Sn Ckonno the RADO rosana 202 o o RR aversaarosnseeencece 202 6 5 4 1 Docking Station does NOt POWer DA resoosmmratent nacar rd cd 202 Soliz EPIO Chade LED Stays Ol eevevercecavsuteavssenceceswcan sor soussencuaeesescearens sapos 202 6 5 4 3 EP10 Charge LED Flashes Yellow cccccccscccceccscecvsccccecsecescscecssceseeces 202 6 5 4 4 Dock Battery LED Fast Flashes Red with Spare Battery Inserted o o o 202 6 5 4 5 Dock Battery LED does not Turn On when Battery is Inserted oooomocoooo 202 66 Quad Docking Station Model No VADOA corran Eee 203 661 Operator CONO Saasonciacaddos roer iria 203 ES PA VNC raat eee EEE e N Inn A ts 203 Sos Oa DOCK ODE ato case cscc se cnces ese ERAT EET ERATE 203 6 6 3 1 charging the EP10 Batlle ys accion toscswedaceaweawesnsineeadedceeasdewausueweiewaeetndeeeseadec 203 Oe O a EEEE E E EEA E E EEEE E EET 203 6 6 3 3 Connecting to the Ethernet Network ssssssssesssessrressressseeseeeeseeesseesesresee 204 GOA Cleaning me VAOO4 sieis EERE E E EE EEEE AE EENAA ARAT 204 669 WROUDIESIOOUNG corrieri reiter moises 205 5691 EPIO Charg indicator LED Stays Off esprrtres citar ena dn renos 205 6
80. 10 Hand Held Computer User Manual EJ Chapter 4 Programs PartnerUp Modem Link Co gt Ty d 1 17 Status Inactive Connection Mess poni name lt none gt fa 4 24 PartnerUp This app displays a number of pre loaded applications Tapping on an app in the list takes you to an associ ated web site The operator can then install the application If a license is required it can be obtained by sending an e mail to the software license mailbox or by contacting a Sales Rep from the Psion contact web page www psion com us about contact_psion offices htm Additional pieces of software such as a server must be obtained through Psion 4 25 PsionVu PsionVU allows the administrator to tailor how the EP10 operates and the options the user can access Note that the look of the Today screen will change from icons that are finger accessible to a list of items that is best accessed using a stylus AN Important For details about this application refer to PsionVU on page 162 4 26 Remote Desktop Mobile This program allows you to log onto a Windows Terminal Server and run the desktop programs from the server on your EP10 90 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Connecting to a Terminal Server om X d Remota Desktop Mobile Remote Desktop M Cy e Tiji Gar 1 45 Status Not connected Computer C Save password OL Fores ag ei Ta k dl Nile 7 ho a ae
81. 10 programs are all available from the Start screen Tap on the Start button in the lower left corner of the Today screen to display the Start screen O SL Ga 12 31 Phone Tapping on an icon in this screen launches the associated applet AN Important For details about the options contained under the Settings icon refer to Chapter 5 Settings 4 2 Home Tapping on the Home icon in the Start screen displays the Today screen EN Yal 4 amr 12 21 MUSIC phone voicemail 12 21 iu ROGERS text e mail rm oy pen J he 4 3 The Phone EP10s are equipped with phone capabilities as a standard option Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual EN Chapter 4 Programs The Phone Keypad 4 3 1 The Phone Keypad The phone keypad provides phone services like those you may find on your cellular phone You can use the phone keypad provided with your EP10 to for example send and receive phone calls make conference calls view your call history set up speed dial numbers etc 4 3 1 1 To display the phone keypad e Tap on Start gt Phone icon Note Sending amp Ending Phone Calls using the Phone Keypad You can also press the Talk key on the EP10 keyboard to display the phone keypad providing it has been activated The Talk key is labelled with a green telephone receiver icon Refer to Sending Ending Calls using the EP10 Keyboard on page 53 for details Phone settings Directory assis
82. 10 will be decoded successfully O Note When scanning multiple bar codes ensure that all of the desired bar codes are within the field of view of the scanner It is possible that even when all bar codes are within the field of view not all of them will be decoded Only successfully decoded bar codes are passed to the application program The application program then issues a warning asking that you scan the missing bar codes When scanning a single bar code ensure that only the desired bar code is within the field of view of the scanner E Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Bluetooth Peripherals A 6 13 6 14 A A Because imagers generally have a shorter depth of field than laser scanners some practise may be re quired to find the optimal distance from the types of bar codes being scanned Although the imager in cludes illumination LEDs ambient light will help the imager decode the bar codes especially if the bar code is far from the EP10 Important Keep in mind that the imager scanner is a camera and the LED illumination is a flash Glare can be an issue on reflective media such as plastic coated bar codes just as glare is an issue for photographers When pointing at a shiny surface either shift the bar code to the side or top or angle the bar code so that the glare reflects away from the imager scanner Most imagers take several snap shots of the bar
83. 2B USB 2 0 Fast Ethernet ASIS AXSBY 72 USB 2 0 Fast Ethernet D e If you need to specify server information double tap on the appropriate adaptor and then tap on the IP Address and or Name Servers tab Network Cards ao go Yil 1 55 Network Cards ao qe Vy rd Ga 2 05 Name Ser lt IP Address gt Name Ser IP Address lt Name Servers gt IP Address RA2070 Wi Fi Adapter Name server addresses may be automatically assioned if DHCP is enabled on this adapter RA2070 Wi Fi Adapter 8 Use server assigned IP address C Use specific IP address 5 ae80 4eed degg ged my ea O Note Because most networks use DHCP you should not need to change these settings unless instructed to do so by your network administrator e If necessary use a network cable to connect the network card to your network Refer to the documen tation shipped with your network card for details e To activate the connection launch the desired program e g Internet Explorer The EP10 will connect automatically 5 8 7 1 Changing Network Card Settings e If you use your network card in two locations like work and home you ll need to change the network to which the network card connects e Tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections gt Network Cards e Inthe Configure Network Adapters dialog box tap on the drop down menu below My network card con nects to and choose either The Internet or Work Psion EP10 Hand Held Compu
84. 33 3 10 2 6 Text MESS ADE rias es tor a eii ade 34 AOS EW AOU CaO Flees ret ae ate 36 3 10 4 Calendar of Upcoming Appointments ccc eee e cece eens cee ceeseecestesceetesceessseeessseeess 36 310 41 Creating and Editing ADDOIRTIMONIS scinciinsanncas dices cidade ads 37 3042 Deleting ADPOIMIMEN ES sossorors arar oras ina ries 39 IO F VO Scar T A A E EERE 39 Using the Navigation Bar A cece A A 39 TRO OT Bal cerises E RE EEEE Sn 40 BAA A a An Al Managing Files and FOIOS coros iii ninas ataca 41 Sal Ccredtinda New Folder a tarsniracicalas criada tias e dias ds deta Al Sie e o EE EEE EEA Al IS TCO SP E UE A r e eia 42 eee DELU A E oh oo EER 42 USO MEUS ede bona naaa eE a aaa aaea ss 42 AL POPUP MENUS gee ee a EAER EASAN AE EE ALEEA EAN S 42 Programs gt USING Applications rssrierstiiscsrsniiesrerit etaik e 43 Syn o ENEE E RI EAE ula aa E o PE OCA ESEE I EEA 44 Data Transfer Between the EP10 and a PC coocccccccccccnccncnncnocnnc corn cnc rr 44 olin WJooadingd Data Wie DOCG SLaCION ass cceeeswccescccu wctescet ceesasweceneuaninctesses caedeacesenex 45 ER Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Table of Contents 3 18 319 3 20 317 2 Microsoft ActiveSync mia di ii is 45 317 3 WIndows Mobile Device Center ssssssssessreessressecssecessresereeseresseessreeseeeeseeesreessee 45 POAN aaa a A E E E E E A A as 45 A n ys EEEE E EEEE T UI 45 General MaMe ANC rara rinitis A5 3201 Caring tor the OUEN rostro t
85. 4 1 Setting the Backlight Intensity DUratiON ooooocooccoccocnoccncnn cnn ono cnn ono nr rn 24 3 4 2 Aligning Calibrating the TOUCNSCIrEEN ccc cece este eens cee cnsteccnstesceesesceesesceessseeess 24 3A SCPECWrOl An II 24 344 LESCANO Te TOUSCO CEN ia ienccecsenenwnminayaciwaiaesdaacseuineaniaasas ataron 25 EPIO MAC 110 Er PA II e a r e a a e E ORO O 25 3 5 1 A ET TO acaotwresia ia E E E E aaaaes 25 AdO MACON rirnori EERTE E EATE EEEE EAT EE EEE EEEE 26 3 6 1 ao errenneren EETA EEE RNA EE EEE a EE 26 362 AQUSTNO Speaker VOUE xc ccciseswagaeeavwncs se neweedeee des seeeeouss sana vonaedeGadeean oueusssauaree 26 Inserting the microSD and SIM Card ec c ccc cee cece ence eee ence eee eee e teen eee eeeeeteeeeeteeeeeteenas 26 34 dsd AMAS 26 Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing RUN TiM cooccoccoccoccoccnccncnncnn cnn nono rro 28 3 81 ONO EAE ara AA EEE A E E E E ESERE 29 Navigating in Windows Embedded 6 5 and Applications cece ccc ccc cence cence eee neeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 31 32 Navigating using the Touchscreen and StyIUS cece cece cece cece cece eee nese eeeeeeeeeneees 31 TAS Toda E eaae paces co EE ceesawuce canes sae E E EE A E EE EE AET 31 3101 Customizing the Today SC it id e candace 31 310 2 The Today Screen Default ODO vr aaa 32 IA E A o o UU OOOO E E 32 AOL MSIE tai dra ranas 32 SMA PION arrienda da Es oa 32 SOC VOR sete nc E E E E EE E E E EEE EE 33 Oea He Dave ASS EOE EEEE Ar A
86. 4 5 4 Sending an E mail E mail messages are stored in the Outbox folder and are sent to recipients the next time you sync or connect to your e mail server to send and receive mail Tap on Start gt E mail e Choose the e mail account you want to use e Tap on Menu gt New e Inthe To Cc or Bcc fields enter an e mail address Keep in mind that you can also use your Contacts to choose an e mail recipient provided an e mail address is associated with the contact Tap Menu gt Add Recipient and then choose a contact from the list e If you re sending an email to multiple people use a semicolon between addresses 4 6 Contacts Contacts are available with your e mail text messages voice messages and your phone e Tap on Start gt Contacts to display your contacts Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 63 Chapter 4 Programs Working with the Contacts List SERTE 411 Assistanca a 411 corr E Publishing Smarter 4 wr E Clugston A 416 504 1212 4 mo 4 6 1 Working with the Contacts List The Contacts screen allows you to work with existing entries search for a particular contact and create new entries Contact Menu Commands A Menu softkey at the bottom of the screen provides additional commands that allow you to work with the contacts in this list Contacts Enter a name Copy Contact Delete Aschwand Publishing Options Clugsten r 64 Psion EP10 Hand Held Comp
87. 49 auth Mode Encryption EAF TRIP Usar name TKIP AES AES Pass Aneny Tcl ol Tunnel PAC ES Mach Pac J Provisioning Verify Server Certificate _ Enable OPME 5 8 9 2 4 EAP This menu allows you to choose the EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol type used for 802 1x authen tication to an access point ao qe Ty de a 5 50 SID evel Guth Mode WWPA2 Enteronse EAP 7 Encryption TKIP i EAP FAST MSCHAPY _ FASTMSCHAR ME 1 Leer name Passel Anony Ic wma E Mach Pac Provisioning Verify Server Certificate _ Enable OPME The following EAP types are supported by Wi Fi Config e FAST MSCHAPv2 Is a successor to LEAP and does not require strong passwords to protect against off line dictionary attacks Like LEAP EAP FAST does not require the use of server or client certificates and supports Windows Active Directory and domains e LEAP Is an authentication method for use with Cisco WLAN access points LEAP does not require the use of server or client certificates LEAP supports Windows Active Directory and domains but requires the use of strong passwords to avoid vulnerability to off line dictionary attacks e PEAPvO MSCHAPv2 Provides secure user authentication by using a TLS tunnel to encrypt EAP traf fic MSCHAPv2 is used as the inner authentication method This is appropriate for use against Windows Active Directory and domains e PEAPv1 GTC PEAP authentication
88. 5 8 10 Wireless Manager The Wireless Manager icon acts as a connection manager providing access to all network connection types e Tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections folder icon Tap on the Wireless Manager icon Wireless Manager 2 2 uu 2 17 Available This screen is used to switch the wireless network connection on and off this screen also provides access to the setup screens for each wireless connection e To turn connections on and off tap on the item s in the list e To turn off all wireless connections tap on All The Menu softkey at the bottom of the screen provides a shortcut to the setup screens for each of the options listed in the Wireless Manager screen Wireless Manager Y 27 mm 3 03 Disconnect Cellular Data Wi Fi Settings Bluetooth Settings Phone Settings i y 4 F z f 5 Menu 5 9 Personal Folder e Tap on Start gt Settings gt Personal icon Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 133 Chapter 5 Settings App Launch Keys 5 9 1 App Launch Keys Cg Ty se uz 5 01 App Launch Keys Cemer Information vim 4 Buttons Phone This icon allows you to map a key to an application so that you can then launch the application from a single key press App Launch keys App Launch Keys de Yj d Gm 5 05 To assign an application key e Tap the Add button App Launch Keys ea 4 Yl q m 6 40 134 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Ch
89. 728V D 2 3 Sierra Wireless MC5728V Table D 5 Physical Small PCI Express Mini Card standards based form factor Adheres to Rev 1 2 of the PCI Express Mini Card Specification Two U FL RF connector jacks Electrical The MC5728V Mini Card is self shielded no additional shielding is required Environmental Temperature operating range IS 98D compliance 30 to 60 C Reduced RF performance 60 to 75 C Dual band support for both the 800 MHz cellular and 1 9 GHz PCS bands Receive diversity support for the 800 MHz cellular and 1 9 GHz PCS bands Adheres to CDMA authentication as specified in CDMA 1X Support for IS 95A B and CDMA 1X Release O A Support for 15 856 1xEV DO Revision A Support for gosOne and stand alone GPS Application Interface USB supporting multiple logical channels over the USB MUX protocol USB selective suspend supported for maximum power savings Wakeup Enable the modem can be set to wake the host device upon ring resto ration of radio coverage and or receipt of SMS AT command interface Voice The MC5728V Mini Card has internal 15 127 and 15 733 vocoders and supports Call origination Silent retry call origination protocol Echo cancellation E911 Incoming call notification Packet Mode IS 2000 data rates up to 1531 kbps simultaneous forward and reverse channel 15 856 IxEV DO Rev A data rates up to 3 1 Mbps forward channel and 1 8 Mbps reverse channel IS 95 circuit switched V 34 data rates to 14 4 kbps Qui
90. 80 418 2 Using Internet SianiNG e 6 ones co dan ee wee cee oe ee eG ES Ow RH KRG OR OE ew 81 Task Mando lt 3 bse se eee eee eee da Soh BEG Es Ewe bee Bed ad E a a A e A 82 Search PNONe oss Mes eee COS oe ee a we eee Se eh ee OS Ee es Cee ee Ee 82 Imager and Camera DOMO sa soeces s66 6 4 265 AAA Re Ow HE OED A A 83 OM E MODIG sa ee chee baw eee ae eee EES ee eee hae bee we ee eee 84 4224 EXCel MODIS ise eras ba he ee we we Ge CREE Ee ee AAA 84 4 22 2 OneNote Mobile xo esmerada Ee AAA AR KK 85 Areo WOTAMODIE sg a8 oh ones AAA A 88 42231 TEXTINPUCMOdES 42 6262S eed m ada ERS a a aaa 89 4 22 3 2 Sharing Documents with yourPC 2 aaea ee ee 89 A224 POWE POME MODNG p ara 6 a0 EEE ROE AA oe REDO Oe A ewe ORE 89 4 22 9 SharePoint MOONGs sesi 24 4 ea BARRE EES AAA e 89 Modem LINK es ae ne ee ae oe Go Pee AAA oe GR HSE oS Ge 89 PANPE UD ee ea aE bee beans es Pb een aee basen be ee eee eee eee oe oe 90 PONV oo wow eee hee AEE OEE AREER ESHA EROS HERE eS 90 Remote Desktop Mobile 2 ee 90 4 261 Connecting to a Terminal Server ise ena caes decides 91 4 26 2 Disconnecting Without Ending a Session ee 91 4 26 3 ENdINO a SESSION 644242 e4 4886 6b ee he era DEERE ES OHS REESE 91 SIM TOOK Ue ou aes eta ee wae a a e Bae ee aaa aa AE 91 WIFIGOMNGCEAR Cina tena we tweed de wee bene be aw OA aw Ee Bw Boe a ee wee A RA 92 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Programs 4 1 Programs EP
91. 98 chargers 198 AC wall adaptor PS1050 G1 199 installation 199 RV4000 desktop docking station 200 troubleshooting LED 202 RV4004 operator controls 203 205 RV4004 quad docking station 203 troubleshooting 205 cleaning EPIO 45 clean start 12 Click Data scanner double click 176 Click Time scanner double click 175 clone Total Recall 186 Clone to USB 189 Code Page Default Local ASCII 176 1SO 8859 1 Latin 1 176 code page Data Handling 176 communication ActiveSync 45 80 data transfer 44 EP10 to PC 202 Ethernet connection quad docking station 204 Windows Vista 45 Compass 147 connecting to a server with 91 Connections editing settings 121 Internet 114 managing 120 121 modem setup 115 network selecting 123 Network Cards 118 Proxy Server setup 122 VPN setting up 120 Wi Fi Configs 124 Wireless Manager 133 Connections Internet 114 Connections settings 105 Contacts Start screen 63 adding new 65 working with 64 Contrast adjustments 148 Control Panel Predefined presets C 3 Copyright information operating system 143 Custom preset C 3 D Data Bits port replicator 180 data entry modes handwriting 89 typing 89 Data Handling code page 176 Data tab setting up 57 data transfer between EP10 and PC 44 Data Transmission Paste data 177 Wedge data 177 debug error handling 148 Decoding symbology Predefined symbology C 3 Default Predefined preset C 3 C 4 Default identifier Preset group C 3 Default Local
92. Activesync End All Tasks 4 File Explorer View Task Manager Sort By Refresh Exit E End Task E E ES r Switch To Makes the highlighted application active End All Tasks Shuts down all applications listed View Allows you to list either all running applications or all processes Sort By Allows you to sort active applications or processes based on Memory size CPU or application or process Name e Refresh Updates the list of applications or processes e Exit Closes the Task Manager 5 11 26 Total Recall Total Recall is a Psion utility developed to maintain applications and settings during a cold boot as well as clone settings to other devices This utility creates a restore point of a device at a known state This can be used as a backup of the device the administrator can clean the terminal and restore the profile at any 184 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Total Recall time or a clone the administrator can store different configurations for different uses to clone to other hand held computers O Note Total Recall works differently e g restore on cold boot or on clean boot on different OS platforms and versions e g Windows CE 5 0 6 0 Windows Mobile Windows Embedded Hand held For detailed information and other updates on Total Recall information please go to the Ingenuity Working website at http community psion com knowledge w knowledgebase total recall a
93. Bes C 11 CAS VieWind A Preset ea se244 6486 we Oe BREDA A Sede Ee ESO ER HES ODE Es C 11 C 410 Creating a Custom PES cornada cute de ee we weeds cee sow oka Hae Aw c12 CAN Modifying a CUSTOM Preset ra scoe dsdi rida bbe4 chee Dae dees a ira CZ C 412 Removing a Custom Preset eee C 13 C 413 Filter Tab Manipulating Bar Code Data 4 lt e2 lt 2 ee ee bebe aos wave eieeea wade C13 C 4131 Modifying a Bar Code Setting oona ee ee C 14 C 414 Translation Tab Configuring Rules ee ee C 14 CAI Case RUGS 64465464 rara AR RO EE Ke C5 CAIS Advanced TaD 4 sei wih 4 HED ERE DERE E NED ORS EEAS A A EEE C 16 C 4151 File Locations for Captured Images saosaoa ee eee C 16 Cale CONMOUNNG IOUGIS seco carreras cres C16 Go Barcode gt IMbDOIOIES sed ees ta wee ea Eee a AAA Ge C 5 1 Imager Bar Code Symbologies 1 eee C 18 C 5 2 Color Camera Bar Code Symbologies ee ee C9 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual C 1 Appendix C Imagers Applet Reguired Applets C 1 C 2 C 2 1 C 2 2 C 2 2 1 The Imagers applet is used to create modify delete and activate imager settings The principle uses of the applet are to decode bar codes and to capture images A Demonstration Application is provided to demon strates how the imager works Refer to Imager and Camera Demo on page 83 for details Required Applets In order to configure imaging the Manage Triggers applet must be present in the Settings
94. Bluetooth Radio e cs oa a e aa a al a e D 6 D 2 3 Sierra Wireless MC5728V 44 05 ae ce hewn www wwe da AA D 7 D 2 4 Cinterion PH8 GSM GPRS EDGE Radio nonan eee D 7 D 3 Lithium lon 2400 mAh Battery Specifications 0 ee ee D 9 D 4 Lithium lon 3600 mAh Battery Specificati0NS D 10 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual DA D 1 D 1 1 D 1 2 Appendix D Specifications EP10 Specifications Model No EP10 7515 EP10 Specifications Model No EP10 7515 Note Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change without notice Hardware Physical Dimensions Device 6 2 x 31 x 1 2 158 mm x 78 mm x 30 6 mm Weight with battery pack Weight with 2400 mA battery 0 8 Ib 336 g User Interface Display Backlit 3 7 in VGA portrait mode Backlight feature 165 cd m2 output Sunlight readable with integrated touchscreen Colour 480 x 640 graphic TFT Passive stylus or finger operation Audio Built in 85db mono speaker microphone receiver Keyboard Backlit QWERTY High reliability keypad ultra white backlight Ergonomically enhanced for ambidextrous one hand operation Camera 3 2 Mega Pixel Colour Auto Focus Dual LED Flash Video capture capability Software Platform AM3715 Processor 800 MHz ARM Cortex A8 On board RAM 256 MB SDRAM On board ROM 2 GB Flash Operating System Microsoft Windows Embedded 6 5 Programming
95. Change User Mode on page 172 168 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings PsionVU Application Tab PsionVU Fi Er i s qu 10 04 Es UTA E Notificatio Applications gt Advanced View Windows Common Y i Fas a Restricted Files ain E Filename as Te la Windows Common E solitare exe Windows ae Windows All _ beam exe Windows EW EEN EN A En ED g abt dete DD td al ool oI Cl ray pam Disk SIr aed aul sal il tal ail nul ial ol al wal ppr egg py todoo dra ceii rail ail od all sal all oil ual al all al lt 3 e g E AE gt Gr My Device od Tapping in the View menu displays a drop down menu where you can define restrictions for each storage area of the EP10 Restricted items are marked in the checkbox to the left in the sample screen above soli taire exe is restricted Advanced Tab PsionVU F go Ty edi 10 10 Applications lt Advanced gt Motificatio Select the system feature to block or prevent Restrictions MM Prevent External Autorun Apps _ Prevent ActiveSync _ Prevent Unsigned CABs Prevents launching Autorun applications from a storage card The Advanced tab lists system features you can prevent or block from user access Tapping in the checkbox to the left of a feature adds a check mark indicating it is blocked Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 169 Chapter 5 Settings PsionVU Notifi
96. Charging for more than 72 hours may damage the battery or lead to charge capacity reduction Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 The Keyboard AN Important If the battery is overheated 60 C or if the battery capacity is very low lt 100 mAh the unit will not switch on when the Power button is pressed Under the above conditions when AC power is applied the EP10 will still refuse to power up instead a yellow LED will begin blinking and until the battery is replaced or in the case of low battery capacity the battery is charged to an acceptable level the EP10 will not switch on Also keep in mind that along with the battery the EP10 is equipped with internal super capacitors that pre serve data stored on the EP10 for approximately 2 minutes while the battery is swapped 3 2 4 1 Chargers and Docking Stations AN Important FOR DETAILED INFORMATION about chargers and docking stations refer to Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories beginning on page 195 Lithium lon battery packs must be charged before use These batteries can be charged with a variety of chargers and docking stations These include e Desktop Docking Station Model No RV4000 operates as both a charger and a docking station Oper ating as a charger both the battery installed in the EP10 and a spare battery can be charged simultaneously see Desktop Docking Station Model No RV4000 on pa
97. Confirm new password C Show password e Type a New password and then re enter it in the Confirm new password field Note Once an administrative password is assigned each time Psion VU is launched a dialog box will be displayed requesting the password Chapter 5 Settings 5 11 18 1 PsionVU PsionVU Menu PsionVU P oF Ty cm 2 06 Administrator password Ki Shell Settings ma A Restrictions 2202 Control Panel Settings nae Import Export to File The PsionVU menu provides access to the categories to help you tailor the look and operation of the EP10 for the user 5 11 18 2 Administrator Password If you want to change your password complete the fields in the Administrator Password screen Administrator Pass Co gt e Gm 2 23 Enter the current password New password Confirm new password C show password a 5 11 18 3 Shell Settings Note Remember that changes do not take effect until the EP10 is set to User Mode and unit Is reset Refer to Activating a Change User Mode on page 172 The Shell Settings option allows the administrator to tailor what operators see and what is available to them when EP10 is powered on Note that these changes are not visible until the unit switches from Admin istrator Mode to User Mode Applications Tab This tab allows you to choose the applications that the EP10 will see on the Today screen Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer
98. E Network Cards as A E Wireless lt Network Adapters gt Wireless My network card Connects ta The Internet y Tap an adapter ta modify settings SMSC9500 USB2 0 FAST Ethernet Drive ASIX AXE87728 USB 2 0 Fast Ethernet ASIXARBB772 USB 2 0 Fast Ethernet D Be Maz hr IS A e Tap on tiwinapil Network Cards E x Ge Name Ser lt IP Address gt Name Ser 8 Use server assigned IP address O Use specific IP address iia fe80 4eed deff fed r Cancel E The IP Address screen offers two options a server assigned IP address or a user assigned IP address If you want an address assigned automatically e Tap on Use server assigned IP address to have an address assigned automatically or If you want to define your own IP address e Tap on Use specific IP address e Type the preferred IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway Name Servers If you tap on the Name Servers tab at the top of the screen you can Statically configure the DNS servers however if you use DHCP for IP address assignment DNS is usually supplied by the same server that sup plied the IP addresses 5 8 9 4 Wi Fi Config Advanced Tab This screen provides a number of options which are described in this section e Tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections folder icon e Tap on the Wi Fi Config icon Tap on the Advanced tab 5 8 9 4 1 Wireless Zero Config If you prefer to use Wireless Zero Config the Windows nat
99. E FN modifier key provide access to additional keys and system functions These functions are colour coded in blue print above the keyboard keys Q Note Almost all keys can be reprogrammed to suit your requirements 3 3 2 Locking the Keyboard You can lock the keyboard to prevent accidental key presses To set up the locking unlocking key sequence Tap on Start gt Settings gt Personal gt Buttons icon Tap and swipe on the scrolling tab bar at the top the screen to display the Lock Sequence tab Refer to Auto Lock Tab on page 141 for details about setting up this function 3 3 3 Modifier Keys The SHIFT CTRL ALT BLUE FN and SYM keys are modifier keys that change the function of the next key pressed The SHIFT CTRL and ALT keys operate much like a desktop keyboard except that they are not chorded two keys held down simultaneously The modifier key must be pressed first followed by the key whose function you want modified SHIFT and BLUE FN The SHIFT and BLUE FN modifier keys provide access to additional keys and system functions The func tions related to these modifier keys are colour coded in white and blue print respectively on the keyboard keys dependant on your keyboard format SYM a Note When using the Mobile Devices SDK Developers Guide PN 8100016 note that the SYM key is interchangeable with the ORANGE key The Symbol SYM modifier key is represented on the keyboard by the c
100. EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix D Specifications Approvals Desktop dock with Type A and Type B USB connectivity and charge functions for an internal battery along with a spare battery e Power supplies AC wall adaptor Vehicle power outlet adaptor Quad charger 4 site Snap Module USB DE9M powered serial plus Charger Snap Module USB Host Client plus Power Charger e Vehicle peripherals Powered and Non powered cradle RAM Mount with screws D 1 10 Approvals e FCC Parts 15B 15C 15E 22H 24E 27 JC RSS 210 RSS 132Z RSS 133 EN 300 328 EN 301 489 EN 55022 EN55024 EN301 511 EN301 908 EN300 440 EN301 893 Safety IEC EN 60950 1 e Laser Safety IEC 60825 1 D 1 11 Environmental Specifications e Operating Temperature 14 F to 122 FC 10 C to 50 C e Storage Temperature 4 F to 140 F 20 C to 65 C e Relative Humidity 5 to 95 RH non condensing e Rain amp Dust Protection IP54 IEC 529 Drop 5 ft 1 5 m 26 drops to polished concrete e Tumble 250 times at 0 5 m ESD 15k Vdc air discharge 8k Vdc contacts D 2 Radio Specifications D 2 1 Murata 802 11 a b g n Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Radio Table D 3 Sub parameters Specifications Form i ES surface mount module 11 4 x 9 4 mm This is a combo module containing both Wi Fi ARS and Bluetooth V2 1 EDR radio a Port 802 11b g n U FL jack Non diversity Multiplexed between 802 11b g n 2 4GHz and Bluet
101. EP10 and recharge your battery using power drawn from your vehicle s power outlet Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories The Unpowered Vehicle Cradle Model No RV1000 Figure 6 7 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor Vehicle power outlet adaptor plug DC power plug Insert the DC power plug into the DC IN port at the base of a snap module Model No RV4001 or RV4002 Insert the vehicle power outlet adaptor plug into the power outlet in your vehicle 6 10 The Unpowered Vehicle Cradle Model No RV1000 The RV1000 Unpowered Vehicle Cradle is a passive device designed to securely grip the EP10 in the vehicle O Note Shock and vibration specifications for the EP10 are verified using Psion approved RAM mounts and mounting hardware Use of non certified Psion mounting hardware is not recom mended and may void warranty coverage Figure 6 8 RVI000 Unpowered Vehicle Cradle 6 10 1 Important Instructions The RV1000 with an EP10 installed has a storage temperature of 40 C to 0 C 40 F to 158 F Operat ing humidity and temperature is 5 95 non condensing and 30 C to 60 C 22 F to 140 F 6 10 2 Vehicle Cradle Operation 6 10 2 1 Operator Controls The Unpowered Vehicle Cradle has no operator controls or power switch 6 10 2 2 Indicators The RV1000 has no front indicators The EP10 LED serves as the power
102. EPIO HAND HELD COMPUTER User Manual Windows Embedded Hand Held 6 5 December 11 2013 Part No 8000227 B ISO 9001 Certified Quality Management System This user manual supports Model Numbers e 7515U with FCC ID GM37515UA and IC 2739D 7515UA e 7515C with FCC ID GM37515CA e 7515 with FCC ID GM37515UB and IC 2739D 7515UB Copyright 2013 by Psion Inc 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga Ontario Canada L5N 7J9 http www psion com This document and the information it contains is the property of Psion Inc This document is not to be used reproduced or copied in whole or in part except for the sole purpose of assisting in proper use of Psion manufactured goods and services by their rightful owners and users Any other use of this docu ment is prohibited Disclaimer Every effort has been made to make this material complete accurate and up to date In addition changes are periodically incorporated into new editions of the publication Psion Inc reserves the right to make improvements and or changes in the product s and or the pro gram s described in this document without notice and shall not be responsible for any damages includ ing but not limited to consequential damages caused by reliance on the material presented Psion the Psion logo EP10 and the names of other products and services provided by Psion are trade marks of Psion Inc Windows and the Windows Logo are trademarks or registered
103. IDE Scanner Imager Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual EN Chapter 2 Getting Started EP10 Accessories Available Figure 21 Back of EP10 Speaker Stylus Battery latch Battery amp SIM microSD card compartments Figure 2 2 Ports Docking Port USB On The Go Hand Strap Anchor 2 2 EP10 Accessories Available To see a current list of EP10 accessories please go to the Psion website at http www psion com us products handheld htm 2 3 Documents Available To view a current list of documents that can be downloaded as required please go to the Knowledge Base on the Psion Ingenuity Working community website http community psion com knowledge w knowledgebase product manuals aspx KN Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 2 Getting Started Preparing the EP10 for Operation 2 4 Preparing the EP10 for Operation 2 4 1 The Batteries 2400 mAh and 3600 mAh Lithium lon Two Lithium lon battery pack variants are available for the EP10 High Capacity 3600 mAh battery pack Model Number RV3010 BPO8 000760 and Standard Capacity 2400 mAh battery pack Model Number RV3005 BP08 000730 Before charging the battery it is critical that you review the battery safety guidelines in the EP10 Hand Held Warranty amp Regulatory Guide PN 8000235 AN Important Always switch the unit off before changing the battery see Switching the EP10 Hand Held Off on page 11 If you do not
104. IFT Key Numeric Keyboards The SHIFT key on the numeric keyboard has a dual function when used in conjunction with the BLUE FN key it allows you to display uppercase alpha characters and when used alone the SHIFT key provides access to Function keys F1 to F10 Creating Uppercase Alpha Characters On numeric keyboards the alpha characters are displayed in blue print to the right on the numeric keys To produce an uppercase character on a numeric keyboard Press the SHIFT key followed by the BLUE FN key e Press the numeric key containing the alpha character you want to produce If you press the SHIFT key twice it is locked on essentially acting as a CAPS key displaying uppercase characters To turn off the CAPS function press the SHIFT key again Accessing Function Keys On a numeric keyboard the Function keys F1 to F10 are represented in white print to the left on numeric keys 1 to 0 To access a Function key Press the SHIFT key followed by a numeric key from 1 to 0 depending on which Function key you want to use Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual EN Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 The Standard Keys 3 3 5 1 3 3 5 2 The Arrow Keys The Arrow keys are located near the top of the keyboard The arrow keys move the cursor around the screen up down left and right The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that indicates where the next character you
105. Manager a server side solution that helps enable IT to have control of their device deploy ment with respect to security management and access to the corporate network To access Managed Programs e Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab gt Managed Programs icon eo Ta f 1 51 No Managed Programs have been installed O Note Your system administrator can provide the details you ll need to use Managed Programs effectively 5 11 15 Memory This applet allows you to view memory use and storage card memory allocation To display the options for this applet e Tap on Start gt Settings Tap on the System tab followed by the Memory icon Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 159 Chapter 5 Settings Memory 5 11 15 1 Main Tab Memory E g Via 1 58 Storage Main gt Storage C Storage Program Total 864 29MB Total 194 41 MB In use 10 02 MB In use 7125 MB Free 854 27 MB Free 123 16 MB Eind large files using storage memory E 7 This tab lists the memory allocated for file and data storage and for program storage 5 11 15 2 Storage Card Memory E A Y ple uu 1 59 Main 4 Storage Card gt Main Total storage card memory 8 14 MB In use 0 01 MB Free 8 13 MB RAM Disk 1 Find large files using storage memory The Storage Card screen indicates the total storage card or RAM disk memory along with the amount in use 160 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer
106. O32 Power LED Does No clic ciccoomenccnsavs menesctewcur OPE ta EEr 205 66 53 EPIC Charge LED Flashes YCWOW vississcree nk ncsendscabadeduniesee ys bees senen aieiededuaeesenys 205 6 6 5 4 EP10 Charge Indicator LED Flashes Red sssssssssssnessrecsseessressecesseessseesee 205 6 6 5 5 Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off usssssnesesssessessecsesssessesroeeesseeeessreeee 205 Or QUad Charger Model No RV 2004 errr nE AAE A AEAEE RE 205 6 7 1 charging Me EPIO Battery srren ea a N Aa EET E 205 Bile E ear A E E EA AT E 205 Bile OPO GOR are EEE AAEE EEE das 206 OLA COTO MOC O eerren ror EEE cds ab 206 Od A ls eS OEA AEE EEE AUE EEE rss saaan see 206 OLG IPOUDICSIOOUNG as cscs scan tiiin dr RESA EE idad 206 6 7 6 1 mproper Battery SLOG vixen ccagcy iene EENET EAEE earn 206 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual vit Table of Contents 6 7 6 2 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed oooococcococcocmocnom lt 206 6 8 Snap Modules Model Nos RV4001 amp RV4DO Z cococosocninioinosranacanniccand ara asa 207 6 9 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor Model No RV3050 ccc cece cece ence cence eee e eee eeeeseeteeeesneenees 207 6 10 The Unpowered Vehicle Cradle Model No RVI000 ocoococcoccccccococnccncoco coc nc cnc 208 GIOI a o MM PK E 208 610 2 Vehicle Cradle OPerati N restos rr AAA AAA 208 luz Operator Controls ancvssoposonens sore nro o etanol stat 208 Er INDICIOS oca p
107. OS erreper EEEE A EE Gas ie EE EEA A iaa 16 Eds serrie reer dee bscuecsnecetnanteaneuedeeetedeueaes cin cseeaanen A EAEE caer beeed de TT TT o AA 19 A UVE NACI pcs cos airis verse ri id dada 80 TA O a ARS e o E 0 o 80 Merhel Sar cescacecwenecacencnecevecsausmsesoncececunescensaceeseees AAAA O seeececosasosusne seeeeeneseeees 80 4181 Creating an Internet CONNECTION 0 ccc cece cee cee cece ence een eee e tees eee e eee e rra 80 Aloe WSO Meer ool IMG icc ccccascaconceadcoceves sas Aa 81 TOS WORM AOGN E E E 0 acide cxe noua e ocn sides 82 DN CIRO E E sean In E weer A 82 imager and Camera Demo ecards ci tints aces lenses oo Sii AMAS caancncecteannudewaseores ean ES A E E EEE eee 84 BZ ECC MCD Gs asessacentnncaencscecicasaraenkewaencsansnecacedues viyuesengnaunenceecuaeersiseGeus peeoececaca 84 A222 OneNote MODO eciiccatuceine scene nddener urrenin E nedegcuachededuesyen ees eh sedcedunskeosesesse sees 85 Aces VON GAVIO DIG ri tits 88 4 22 31 Text Input MOS icincicacsuaesectanectacensiusatauebanswseenends a ada 89 A 2232 Sharing Documents with your PC cic ax ienciacseswienencaecscdeuiaecutateeweuseenesazaeensees 89 4 27 4 POWE POME MO oran tas 89 Ae OWeler OMGIMO OWS nissan artistas E ENSET EANN 89 Modem SI pancacechereeoeustaubaseelcacece 89 PorU sore cren rodados eto tentes 90 E N IIA 90 Remote Desktop Mobile o ooocococcoccccccnoccccnconnn ron corno 90 4761 Connecting toa Terminal Serve arc td ra 91 4 26 2 Disconnecting W
108. PC drives e Back up EPIO files to the PC restore them from the PC to the hand held again etc 44 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 Uploading Data in a Docking Station 3 17 1 Uploading Data in a Docking Station AN Important Review the documentation provided with the user application installed in your EP10 before performing data uploads The desktop docking station and quad docking station are typically used to upload transaction data to a server computer when a radio link is not available O Note Refer to Chargers and Docking Stations on page 198 for more details The desktop docking station can complete batch uploads to a Client USB connected PC or server Unlike the desktop docking station the quad docking station supports only TCP IP connections to a PC or server through a 10 100baseT Ethernet connection When an EP10 is inserted in a docking station a dock icon is displayed in the navigation bar at the top of the screen The EP10 also detects the presence of the Ethernet network 3 17 2 Microsoft ActiveSyncO If your PC is running Windows XP or earlier your EP10 data transfers require ActiveSync software If Active Sync is not installed on your PC locate and download it from the following web site http go microsoft com fwlink Linkld 147001 3 17 3 Windows Mobile Device Center If your PC is running Windows Vista or Windows 7 your EP10 data transfers require W
109. Postal C 4 Preset Custom C 3 Group C 3 Group default identifier C 3 Predefined C 3 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Preset group Default identifier C 3 private network WiFiConnect A R C 92 Profile restoring backup 187 viewing backup 187 profile creating backup 185 Programs 43 49 minimizing 43 Opening 43 protective case 197 198 proxy server setting up 122 Psion Software Advantage 97 PsionVU application 162 quad docking station RV4004 203 R radio 802 11a b g n Direct Sequence SS D 5 802 11ab g n radio specifications D 5 Bluetooth specs D 6 Cinterion PH8 GSM GPRS EDGE radio specifications D 7 radio specifications D 5 reboot reset 12 Regional Settings 173 remapping Scancode 140 Unicode 138 Remote Desktop Mobile 90 Remove Programs 1 4 resetting the EP10 12 Boot to BooSt 13 clean start 12 Hardware Reset 13 warm reset 12 Restore Now 188 return to factory warranty 3 ring tone adjustments phone 55 RV1005 powered vehicle cradle 2 0 RV4000 desktop docking station cleaning 202 RV4004 quad docking station 203 cleaning 204 Ethernet 204 troubleshooting 205 S safety instructions AC adaptor 198 battery charger 198 scanner 214 safety warning scanner 214 Satellite based augmentation system SBAS 155 SBAS Satellite based augmentation system 155 Scancode remapping 140 Scan Indicator 176 Scan Log File 176 scanner Safety warnings 214 two dimensional 2D imager scanner 214 scanner opti
110. Presets Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix C Imagers Applet Imager Bar Code Symbologies PTS Imager Settiny ea e Y A oo Imaging lt Barcoding gt Filter Camera Presets Imager my PTS Imager Settiny ea a Til ane Qu 9 04 z x DIA a a l n Imaging lt Barcoding gt Filter Low light Low power Glossy surface Barcode Presets My Default View Add Remove Activate ee Default Linear Barcode Presets Linear and PDF417 My Default ck Factory Default PTS Imager Setti I 2 Y Bl aa 11 04 Preset Options E JAI 10 With Strong Recovery Enablec Bi Code 39 Pre defined Preset are read only Press space or double click to change a setting in Customer preset Press lt Esc gt to cancel C 5 1 Imager Bar Code Symbologies The bar code symbologies for the Imager are listed in this section Table C EAN 8 UPCE UPC A UPC EAN Sharing Settings Code 93 disabled MSI Plessey disabled Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix C Imagers Applet Color Camera Bar Code Symbologies Table C Imager Bar Code Symbologies Code 11 disabled Interleaved 2 of 5 disabled Matrix 2 of 5 disabled Discrete 2 f 5 disabled Telepen disabled Gs1 DataBar disabled TLC 39 disabled 2D PDF 417 2D micro PDF 417 CodaBlock F disabled CodaBlock A disabled 2D Data Matrix 2D QR Code 2D Maxicode disabled 2D Aztec disabled Postal PlanNET disable
111. Release 4 PS data rate 384 kbps DL 384 kbps UL CS data rate 64 kbps DL 64 kbps UL GSM GPRS EGPRS features Data Transfer GPRS e Multislot Class 12 e Full PBCCH support e Mobile Station Class B e Coding Scheme 1 4 EGPRS e Multislot Class 12 e EDGE E2 power class for 8 PSK e Downlink coding schemes CS 1 4 MCS 1 9 e Uplink coding schemes CS 1 4 MCS 1 9 e SRB loopback and test mode B e 8 bit 11 bit RACH e PBCCH support e 1 phase 2 phase access procedures e Link adaptation and IR e NACC extended UL TBF e Mobile Station Class B CSD e V110 RLP non transparent e 14 4kbps e USSD SMS Point to point MT and MO Cell broadcast GPS features Protocol NMEA Modes Standalone GPS Assisted GPS control plane AGPS E911 user plane AGPS gpsOneXTRA General Power saving modes GPS tracking in parallel to 2G 3G diversity operation AT Commands Hayes 3GPP TS 27 007 and 27 005 and proprietary Cinterion Wireless Modules commands SIM Application Toolkit SAT Release 99 Audio Audio speech codecs GSM AMR EFR FR HR 3GPP AMR Speakerphone operation echo cancellation noise suppression Firmware Update Generic update from host application over ASCO or USB Module Interface 80 pin board to board connector D 8 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix D Specifications Lithium lon 2400 mAh Battery Specifications Table D 6 Antenna 500hms Main GSM UMTS antenna UMTS di
112. Tap Start gt Settings Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon e Under My Work Network tap on Set up my proxy server ISP WWAN GPR AA Gt 3 30 Modem Proxy Settings General x This network connects to the Intemet This network uses a proxy server to connect to the Intemet Advanced e Tap in the checkbox next to This network connects to the Internet and This network uses a proxy server to connect to the Internet e In the Proxy server field type the proxy server name Tap on OK to save your changes 122 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Selecting a Network 5 8 8 Note If you need to change advanced settings such as a port number or proxy server type you ll need to tap on the Advanced button rather than tapping on OK Advanced settings are described in Chang ing Advanced Proxy Server Settings in the next section Changing Advanced Proxy Server Settings e To change advanced settings such as the port number or proxy server type tap on the Advanced button ISP WWAN GPR ac Yi 4 Gi 3 32 Tap a proxy type to change its settings aaa Tal aed ol od wl ol dnd callada id shitty Pt ed Dodd tL A I my OK e Tap on the proxy type you want to change For the appropriate server type type the proxy server name and port e Tap on OK Selecting a Network Note Normally you will not need to change these settings Conta
113. Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup o 102 56 5 Battery ICON ae ew Bea hea a eae ee eS oe eee ee hae oe ea A 103 of SOUnGS SINO UIC ONES oa are Ore BE Ee ee oe ee oe As RA A 104 BAY AR 104 Ste NOTICACONS TAD es es eae ha bebe carrer eee ene eee Ee Pee eee oe Se 104 Das CONMMOECHONS FOO pea sos sra 6 bods Bed oo Oe Ew SR OS oe ee ee oe eS o 105 Bot Pe ersan cee weed ne eve tee ee ee ee eae eee eee EE ee ee ee 105 5 8 2 Bluetooth Setup curs daa Law ee i ee aw ee e 105 5 8 2 1 The Devices Tab Scanning for Bluetooth Devices 106 5 Paid DEVICE 2 onerosa ba we ow OS OY ORE oe BSE a Ree PS a 108 Seo See labs s 8 4 bho we ee ee a ed ee oa ee BOR RE eS A 110 Boece MOG lso bees weed be wa oe oe OS oY GS ARAS 110 Soe ADO TD 445 44468 ote eee ee Ra bbe a Oe eee AA 111 3020 Pared TaD gt orto eee ee eee eee eh eee rr eae ep eee eee es 111 5 8 2 Connecting Using a Bluetooth GPRS PRONG lt lt lt lt oeee pasas a a 4 112 5 8 4 Connections Connecting to the Internet 114 5 8 5 Modem Connection Setup eee 115 5 8 51 Advanced Modem Settings sasaaa 116 So POMNO a 232466 mak secos sosa AAA 117 IO WNeIWOrk Calas ae eeu romo rra add aaa aaa 118 5 8 7 1 Changing Network Card Settings 119 Dole VPN CONRECIION SED 6 454 6 o eee aa ARA AAA 120 5 8 1 3 Manag
114. Ty d Gm 3 30 Add a name Add a company Company Q Add mobile tel File as w Add e mail lt Unnamed gt Add more numbers 0099 When you ve completed the information for the contact entry tap on OK The new contact is displayed in the Contacts list 4 6 3 Info Tab Contacts ea e ul q uu 4 15 Communi lt Info gt Notes Add more addresses Add more info OIC This tab allows you define a ring tone for a particular contact You can also add additional addresses related to your contact work and home and information about your contact such as a job title office location and fax number 66 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Internet Explorer 4 6 3 1 Notes Tab Contacts GT gt Tye Gm 4 17 Info lt Notes gt Communi This screen allows you to enter useful information about your contact 4 7 Internet Explorer You can connect to Internet Explorer in two ways by connecting the EP10 directly to the Internet or by con necting through your PC see ActiveSync on page 80 4 7 1 Browsing Web Sites There is little difference between the standard Internet Explorer found on your PC and that found on your EP10 sometimes referred to as Pocket Internet Explorer You can enter URLs set a home page turn images on and off e mail links to friends and so on To go to a web site e Connect your EP10 to the Internet If you re not certain how to do
115. V3050 or the 10 foot DC Power Extension Cable model no RV 1205 AN Warning Applying a voltage above 36VDC or reversing polarity may result in permanent damage to the vehicle cradle power section and will void the product warranty For safety reasons disconnect the vehicle cradle power cable when the vehicle battery is being charged by an source other than the vehicle alternator EA Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories USB and Serial Connections 6 11 3 1 Wiring Vehicle Power to the Cradle The Powered Vehicle Cradle uses the vehicle power outlet or the vehicle fuse box to power from the vehicle battery system The Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor Model No RV3050 is used for the vehicle power outlet the Power Extension cable model number RV1205 is used for the vehicle fuse box AN Warning A properly trained technician must perform the power connection using Power Extension cable model no RV1205 PN 1101033 and the RV1005 Improper con nection can damage the vehicle or the cradle This cable can be used to provide power to RV1005 from a fused circuit The vehicle cradle should be added to a fused circuit with a new maximum load capac ity of the original load plus the cradle load which is 3 A Power cables are equipped with fuses and instructions are supplied with each cable Use only a 4 A slow blow Safety approved fuse in the fuse assembly These cables should only supply o
116. a outages smoothing out the variances of the receiver s position This feature is useful in cities and other areas with poor coverage Factor Reset resets the module and clears any stored information Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 155 Chapter 5 Settings Imagers Settings 5 11 12 Imagers Settings The Imagers applet is used to create modify delete and activate imager settings The principle uses of the applet are to decode bar codes and to capture images To launch this applet e Tap on Start gt Settings gt System and then tap on the Imagers icon PTS Imager Settiny ea dr Ti 1 22 About lt Imaging gt Barcoding Low light near View Add Remove Activate t R Read W Write A Active gt e amp AN Important Refer to Appendix C Imagers Applet for setup details An Demo Imager amp Camera applet is also provided to illustrate how the imager and camera work To launch the applet Tap on the Start gt Demo Imager And Camera icon Demo Imager Arel mmea O Note You can also launch the Imager Applet from within the demo screen Tap on the Settings drop down menu and choose Advanced 5 11 13 Manage Triggers Manage Triggers allows you to configure how bar code scanners and other devices are triggered You can configure the trigger ID for each trigger button for both single and double click and the double click time Tap on Start gt Settings gt System gt Manage Trigge
117. anager AN Important For details about using the Task Manager refer to Task Manager on page 183 4 20 Search Phone This feature allows you to conduct a search through the data stored on your phone e Tap on Start gt Search Phone icon e Tap in the Search For field and type the information or a fragment of the information for which you are searching e n the Type drop down menu choose the location in which you want to conduct the search ez Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Imager and Camera Demo File Zoom Tools Help Search fl gr Til d Gm 10 57 e Tap on the Search softkey key Feng Fil j qi 10 59 Search for meeting Y Type a Meeting 1 00 p m monday Task The results of your search are displayed in the Search screen 4 21 Imager and Camera Demo An Imager And Camera demo applet is provided to illustrate how the imager and camera work To launch the demo applet e Tap on the Imager and Camera icon Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual EN Chapter 4 Programs Office Mobile Colar Camera uor o Setting N AN Important Refer to Appendix C Imagers Applet for details about this applet 4 22 Office Mobile This icon contains the following abridged Microsoft programs Excel Mobile OneNote Mobile PowerPoint Mobile SharePoint Workspace Mobile and Word Mobile Office Mobile 2010 e Tap on Start gt Office Mobile O Pp E
118. ancel Tap on the sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix C Imagers Applet Creating a Custom Preset A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset either a predefined preset or an existing custom PTS Imager Settiny ea Pb Til 20 om 9 08 fo a3fif2f3f945f5 7 Jefa lol Je Tablqlwfelrdilydulidolodid1 cspfadsfdlidlolhlidedid d The preset list is displayed the new custom preset appears at the end of the list It is marked as read PTS Imager Settiny ea a Til 20 gm 9 10 C 4 10 Creating a Custom Preset preset To create a custom preset e Highlight a preset and tap on the Add button A screen like the sample following is displayed Cloning from existing preset Factory Default Enter name of new preset shift e ededed edalon tte CEA ___ ay e e Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box e Tap on OK to save your changes and write Imaging Barcoding gt Filter Barcode Presets My Default Factory Default All Linear Linear and PDP417 Matrix Postal Custom Symbologies C 4 11 Modifying a Custom Preset The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset To ensure that it will work reliably it should be as close as possible to the original predefined preset To change a parameter value Psion EP10 Hand Held Compu
119. and remove it EP10 Equipped with a CDMA Radio Keep in mind that only a microSD slot is available if a CDMA radio is installed in the unit Slide the card door up to unlock it Flip it open e Slide the microSD card onto the guides on the SD door position the card with the connector pads at the bottom so that when the door is closed they make contact with the connectors on the unit EJ Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 Inserting the Cards Close the card door and slide it down to lock it in place Connector EP10 Equipped with an UMTS Radio Both a SIM card slot and a microSD slot are present if the unit is equipped with a UMTS radio To insert the SIM card Slide the card door up to unlock it Flip it open Slide the SIM card onto the guides on the SIM card door position the card with the connector pad visible so that when the door is closed the connector pad makes contact with the connectors on the unit Connector pad AN Important The SIM card door must remain open to insert the microSD card To insert the microSD card e Flip up the left side of the microSD door Note that this door is hinged on the right O Note A label in the shape of a microSD card is affixed to the card door Don t mistake the label for an actual microSD card Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 Monitoring the Battery and Ma
120. apter 5 Settings Buttons 5 9 2 e Press the key you want to use to launch an application If an unsupported key is pressed a message appears on this screen letting you know The cursor moves to the App field and a new screen is displayed where you can choose the application to which you want to assign the application key If you need to you can Browse through the information in your hand held until you locate the application you want to launch App Launch Keys ea a val m 6 42 Ei bi ay Select E Cancel e Once you ve selected the file you want to map tap on OK The cursor moves to the Data field You can use this field if you need to assign special parameters to your application launch key If you don t want to assign any parameters you can leave the Data field blank If for example you want to assign an application launch key to launch the Word Mobile application you can leave this field blank If you want to assign an application launch key that will open a specific document in the Word Mobile application you need to browse to and choose that document while the cursor is in the Data field Tap on OK App Launch Keys ea e Yil 6 44 Calendar Ink App Windows AppButtons Calendar In Add Edit Remove e If you need to Edit Remove or Add another App Launch Key you can do it from this final screen Other wise tap on OK to save your Application Launch Key e To
121. artnership and tap on Next e To share information between OneNote Mobile and Office OneNote 2010 on your PC tap Synchronize with this desktop computer and then tap on Next e Tap on Finish to begin the partnership between the EP10 and the PC Now you ll be able to pass notes back and forth between your PC and your EP10 Creating A Note e Tap on Start gt OfficeMobile gt OneNote Mobile icon Tap on New in the softkey bar to display a blank note Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual ES Chapter 4 Programs OneNote Mobile e Tap on New to create a note page Begin typing OneNote Mobile ir Til qm 11 26 ION E j E New E epic eS OneNote Mobile ir Fil m mu 11 31 Bs Done E le Menu OK When you complete your note tap on Done Using the OneNote Menu Note Remember that you can tap on the Menu softkey to Undo typing add Formats Bold Italic Underline Strikethrough and include Lists Numbered Bulleted Clear Tapping on Menu displays a list of options to help you work with the OneNote Mobile applet OneNote Mobi ET a F Cut Copy Paste Format a i a A Gi Cm 5 es 99 4 4 Undo Redo Cut Copy and Paste These commands operate in the same way as they do in any Windows Office application Format Tapping on this command lists the formatting options you can apply to your note Bold Italic Underline Strikethrough and Clear All
122. ass or inside the plastic window of an envelope C 2 4 Image Capture Predefined Presets The following presets enable successful image capture in almost all conditions O Note It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible Default This preset works in a wide range of conditions It is optimized for a normal office lighting about 300 Lux Motion This preset uses a shorter exposure time so as to freeze motion Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix C Imagers Applet Using the Imagers Applet Low light near This preset is designed for dark conditions it uses a longer exposure time and includes the flash C 3 Using the Imagers Applet C 3 1 Configuring the Image Capture Presets To configure the image capture presets open the dialog box as follows e Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab Tap on the Imagers icon and if it s not already selected tap on the Imaging tab The following screen is displayed Figure C 2 Imaging Tab lt Imaging gt Barcoding Low light near View Add Remove Activate R Read W Write 4 Active This window lists all the presets both predefined and custom Presets are identified as follows e Predefined presets are marked as read only e Custom presets are marked as read and write e One preset either predefined or custom is marked as active C 3 2 Selecting a Camera Your EP10 has a built in imager and a camera One camera must be s
123. ata sews news ww tw Eo ee eS ee eR wee eee we eae a 68 410 2 Moving Photos to the EPIO ne 70 AIOS Openinga PNOO 2c aos d 4 6k aS owe Os RS OS oe ee eS SY 70 AJOA Deletinid a PROLOGO x 20a 64 4s44 5b be eh Ee eh eS REE KEE DEY Ee WH Ew EEE AMES OES 70 ATO e E ETE A OR 71 AUS Creating a Ide SNOW e sas gt rerssonsrscacrircrs cards rra 71 AIO Using the Video Recorder lt lt ecessecs ro reas a a AA Oe ESS T1 All Windows Medid s a a4 lt stereo OS GERD EE EE OS EE ES CHEE EHS EHR EO 12 412 Messenger Windows Live ee 12 Als WNGOwWsS LIVE s 2264244008250 bo oe aaa rr AA AAA AAA 13 Aig MOS viudos wR KG Rw Oe HERA Owe RSPR EEE eS ES 4141 Creating a Note using the Soft Keyboard e 14 414 2 Creating and Converting Handwritten Notes to Text 0 ee ee en 14 ANA Ronanig a NOG veranos nar oe Oe Oe A AAA 15 414 4 Recording NOTES o oro coronarias A 16 Alo Vast NOUTICAGUON sss descarada SS Ae eee wR De a Se eee Re wR Se ES TT Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 416 417 418 419 4 20 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 4 26 4 21 4 28 A ss 44sec ee ew ee we ee eA ew a ee eee eee ee wa Se eee ees T9 ACUOVSS IMG yates be ee eee Oe ee AAA ee ee E a daa 80 Alt SN NCWONIZANIGN wee bce dae eee aes ae Ae eRe eee eee ee es ee es GE 80 ic e 9 ase oo amp Bowe Ses e es ee Mae Boe oe eee ee eS Be bee Ge eee es 80 418 1 Creating an Internet Connection 0 ee
124. ayed without a letter if packet data service is not available or if it is available but not yet initialized The symbols in the navigation bar identifying the modem connection are as follows G GSM GPRS E GSM EDGE e 3G UMTS 3G e H UMTS HSPA e 1x CDMA 1xRTT Ev CDMA 1x EV DO Rev O Ef CDMA 1x EV DO Rev A A 3 Establishing a Packet Data Connection To display the Data tab through which you can configure a connection e Tap on the a Navigation bar at the top of the screen to display the hotkeys Tap on the Phone Set tings hotkey First tap here to display your options MEET Next tap on the Phone Settings hotkey No New Voicemails 5 04 text Gp c onitacts e In the Phone Settings bubble tap on Settings to display the phone setting tabs Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual A 3 Appendix A Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Establishing a Packet Data Connection Tap here to display the phone setting tabs 1 Y Gm 5 10 ud Wireless Managed ROGERS Figure A1 Data Tab Phone E E n lt nh Sands phone 7 Ti E qu 10 35 Create a data connection for the 5 Network lt Data gt Bands current network Infrared Port C PAF only authentication for C Enable Auto Connect for C Enable Auto Connect for Allow End key to drop data connection i x Scroll to the Data tab By default the connection uses CHAP Challen
125. bes the steps required to get the EP10 ready for operation Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 describes the features and outlines how to charge and maintain the battery This chapter also provides information about indicators microSD and SIM card installation along with general EP10 maintenance Chapter 4 Programs provides a description of the Windows Embedded 6 5 Programs options and how to use them Chapter 5 Settings provides details about Windows Embedded 6 5 Settings options and how to use them Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices Accessories describes the peripherals and accessories available for your EP10 Appendix A Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN provides details about the Wireless WAN radio Appendix B Port Pinouts describes port pinouts Appendix C Imagers Applet describes the Psion Imagers applet and outlines how to use it Appendix D Specifications lists specifications for the hand held the radios and the batteries Text Conventions Note Notes highlight additional helpful information Important These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional information that is critical to the operation of the equipment Warning These statements provide critical information that may prevent physical injury equipment damage or data loss Overview of the EP10 Hand Held Computer Important For all safety regulatory and warranty information refer to the EP10 Hand Held Regulatory
126. ble online http www psion com products TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction 11 ABOUL TOS WAIN re ease eee socio rn a E EE E TEET A 3 Le OR COA ONION nn eyes uoseacuesucueaneeets eees 3 Lo Overview of the EP10 Hand Held Computer cronica da 3 1 3 1 The EP10 HARO ONG ies cut ca da cinidancdecawchemeedy se adiunedsnksaenenpeoreinsendawadnbeweanseceennede ias 5 Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 Features of the EP10 Hand Held 2 2 EP10 Accessories Available 225 DOCUM ts AVD eaaa TEE E E a TEES E E TONERE 10 24 Preparo Me EPIO TOr Opera ctccsecccecducetevcsnrtessctetaceussencscadesstteneriadadcesscnrnanreaneeaeieece 11 2 41 The Batteries 2400 mAh and 3600 mAh Lithium ION ccc cece cece ence eee eeneeees 11 Cee gas alado A o Pm o O EE 11 24 5 REMOVIRO Wie Date Vespa cda ia De 11 244 Switching the EPIO Hand Held ON wis scr Aa 11 245 SWitchng the EPIO Hand Held ON sccsccacedisstccchageesenssacecncadncicdeseseatedeSeasesesedursededuess 11 ao Cer EPI sia NS NS rain va n Da 12 2 5 1 Pero Inda War M RESeE erica a 12 AA a E A 12 tiles BOO O BOO ol ara E E sates euineedonseses cine te canecdeaauarens etica is 2 5 4 Performing a Hardware Reset css scccccecnecdedsesnsdheeeesue decreta a 13 ZO SPA oe EEE AEE EE AEE E S a 13 2 61 Aligning Calibrating the Touchscreen ssssssssesssseesreessreesseesseeeseeesseessrrerereeseees 13 LOA TOC RINGS TOUCH SCIEN sierra nenes pida aaa psS ana 13 al ECON ra a 13 A AAA A o
127. ble tapping on this parameter displays a pop up window in which you can choose an appropriate rate of data transfer Figure 5 1 Port Baud Rates Scanner Settings C g gt Tijl qm 7 55 Data Bits This parameter determines the number of data bits included in each asynchronous data byte Most devices use 8 bit data bytes Double tapping on this option displays a pop up window in which you can choose either 7 or 8 data bits Parity This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the port replicator port Double tapping on this option displays a pop up window in which you can choose the appropriate parity Scanner Settings CI g gt Ty 7 57 180 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Screen 5 11 22 Stop Bits This parameter specifies the number of stop bits 1 1 5 or 2 used for asynchronous communication Trigger On Sequence and Trigger Off Sequence If a SICK scanner connected to an EP10 port requires a serial stream of data bytes to trigger the scanner on and another to trigger the scanner off the Trigger On Sequence and Trigger Off Sequence parameters allow you to define these serial streams Scanner Settings g gt Ti 7 58 Double tapping on Trigger On Sequence or Trigger Off Sequence displays a screen with a hex array of 10 el ements These parameters work in conjunction with Manage Triggers sending on and off data streams to the tri
128. call 5 0 ET e Ya E 8 48 The following profile options are available Upload to A R C Clone to USB Tab to one of the above buttons for more help C s Home Next tap on the option button you want to use Restore Now restores the profile immediately If you are restoring a profile that is a backup or Full Clone the computer will clean reset first if the profile is a Settings Only Clone it will not Set for AutoRestore creates a profile that is automatically restored following a cold reset or a clean start The profile is stored in the Flash Disk TotalRecall folder AN Important After setting an autorestore profile that profile will overwrite any other profile already placed in the Flash Disk TotalRecall folder In an autorestore Total Recall only restores the profile located in the Flash Disk TotalRecall folder If you store your profile anywhere else it will not be restored Total Recall 3 Yi GO 4 37 The following profile options are available Profile successfully copied to Flash Disk TotalRecall Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Total Recall e Upload to A R C uploads the profile to the Active Remote Configuration server After you tap on Send a message will come up either confirming that the upload was complete or that the connection to the server failed Total Recall 5 0 Upload profile to A R C server ARC Server Atie acohesssar
129. calls and you can also determine network selections There are a number of ways you can access phone settings In the Navigation Bar tap on the Phone Settings hotkey Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual EN Chapter 4 Programs Managing Phone Settings First tap here to display your options t Yal 4 GH 5 10 Next tap on the Phone Settings hotkey No New Voicemails 5 04 text ROGERS Activeaynic Settings g Tap on Start gt Settings gt Personal icon gt Phone icon 4 3 3 1 Phone Sounds Tab Phone TELEL Hearing Aid lt Sounds gt Security Number 1 416 624 1554 Ring type Ring tone RingO1 WindowsPhone Keypad Short tones 54 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Managing Phone Settings 4 3 3 2 Ring Type and Ring Tone The SIM card phone number is displayed at the top of this screen The Ring Type drop down menu allows you to tailor the type of ring used for incoming calls The Ring Tone drop down menu allows you to deter mine the ring tone of incoming phone calls To test the ring type and tone you ve chosen you can tap on the Play button just below the Ring tone menu Tap on the Stop button to end the sound test Note For details about setting up Ring type and Ring tone to help you identify other events such as successful scans missed calls voice mails and so on refer to Notifications Tab on page 104 Keypad This optio
130. card or wireless network connection to your ISP add a new connection under My Work Network 5 8 5 Modem Connection Setup Before you begin you ll need the following information from your ISP or network administrator telephone number password domain name and TCP IP settings If your EP10 does not have access to a mobile phone network insert a modem card in the unit 1 Tap Start gt Settings Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon 2 Tocreate a new connection in either ISP WWAN GPRS or My Work Network tap on Add a new modem connection Connections ao gr Yil 46 Gm 10 05 Advanced lt Tasks gt Advanced ISP WWAN GPRS 3 Connections ao yt Yl am 10 09 Make New Connection Select a modem Cellular Line 4 Inthe drop down menu under Select a modem tap on your modem type AN Warning If your modem is not listed in the drop down menu choose Hayes Compatible on COMI Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 15 Chapter 5 Settings Modem Connection Setup 5 Inthe My Connections screen enter the phone number exactly as you want it dialed If for exam ple you need to dial 9 for an outside line enter 9 at the beginning of the phone number Connections Cr gt Ty d om 5 06 My Connection Enter the number exacdy as it should be dialed Include any exta numbers such as an outside line or credit card Bac Mest 6 Tap onthe Next button Connections ao r
131. cation highlight the program in the list and tap on the End Task softkey in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen End All Tasks To shut down all applications tap on the Menu softkey and choose End All Tasks Switch To To make an application listed in this screen active highlight the application and tap on Menu gt Switch To For additional information about the Task Manager refer to Task Manager on page 183 Settings Tap Start gt Settings to display the setting options for your EP10 Figure 3 6 Settings Icons Along with icons that provide information about your unit and allow you to adjust the appearance and be haviour of your EP10 an additional group of icons is stored in three folders Personal System and Connec tions Refer to Chapter 5 Settings for details about the options available to you Data Transfer Between the EP10 and a PC Data transfer options vary slightly depending on the type of operating system installed in your PC For Windows XP SP2 operating systems or earlier Microsoft ActiveSync connectivity software can be used to connect your EP10 to a PC If the Windows Vista Windows 7 or later operating system is installed in your PC ActiveSync is not re quired to transfer data between your EP10 and your PC By connecting the EP10 to a PC with a cable you can View EP10 files from Windows Explorer Drag and drop files between EP10 and the PC in the same way that you would between
132. cations PsionVU fl Png ul s Gm 10 15 Advanced Notifications gt Applicat Select the Start Menu Bar or popup notification to be blocked or disabled Notifications E WiFi Connectivity _ Dock Tether Manager _ Low Battery The Notifications tab allows you to choose which pop up notifications are blocked 5 11 18 5 Control Panel Settings This options allows you to tailor items displayed in both the Settings screen and in the Today screen Hide Tab The Hide tab under the Control Panel allows you to determine which applications will be hidden in the Set tings screen that is displayed when you tap on the Start button fl Er Ti s m 10 23 Accessible lt Hide gt Accessible Unchecked control panels will be hidden from the Settings screen la Control Panel Settings About App Launch Keys Backlight Remember that only unchecked items in this list are hidden Accessible Tab The Accessible tab allows you to choose which items will be accessible in the Today screen Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings PsionVU Psionvu E Y ee qu 10 25 lt Accessible gt Hide Select control panels to be accessible from the Today screen E App Launch Keys El Backlight E Beam E Bluetooth Buttons E Certificates 5 11 18 6 Import and Export Settings This option enables you to Export your settings file
133. ced GSM GPRS Data Configuration s ARS A 3 21 Manually Adding a New Modem Connection A 5 A 3 2 2 The Security Tab Entering a PIN Number A 7 Pros BANGS ys oun eee eke AAA ee a A 7 A 3 2 4 Network Configuration A 8 A 4 Establishing a CDMA Radio Modem Connecti0N ee ee ee A 8 BAA Soni COMNMCCUOM soso aras Baa Boe Bh eee OE AAA A 8 A 411 Repairing a Network Connection A 9 A 41 2 Sound Tab and the Voicemail Field o A 10 AAZ WVerizOWCONNeCtON lt 24 lt 6 6Se arias ees eh eee oe Rew EOS RCS EES A 11 A 4 21 Repairing a Data Connection es A 11 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual ESI Appendix A Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Wireless WAN A Wireless WAN The EP10 is available with one of the following Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN radio options the Cin terion PH8 for GSM UMTS networks worldwide or the Sierra Wireless MC5728V for the Sprint and Verizon CDMA networks in the U S A 2 Navigation Bar Icons Wireless WAN icons are displayed in the navigation bar at the top of the screen that identify the packet data service and the signal strength When a modem detects that a packet data service is available a letter is added to the signal strength icon indicating the type of service Keep in mind that the signal strength icon is displ
134. ces changes it e Replace at index replaces changes unspecified data in a given range Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix C Imagers Applet Advanced Tab A C 4 15 C 4 15 1 e Add barcode prefix suffix adds a global prefix or suffix e Verify barcode size verifies the bar code size This rule should generally be assigned first before cre ating subsequent rules e Search and replace replaces all instances of the match string Note that this rule cannot fail Important Keep in mind that the effects of previously applied rules must be taken into account when creating subsequent rules For example if the bar code size is important it should be checked before any rules that might change the size are applied Advanced Tab File Locations for Captured Images To configure the location for saved images open the dialog box as follows e Tap on Start gt Settings gt System e Tapon the Imagers icon and then tap on the Advanced tab To define the location where imager files will be stored e Tap on the File Location button PTS Imager Settim FP 2 Yj s m 9 24 e Type the file Name choose the Folder and file Type e Choose the Location in which your files will be saved e When you have completed all the changes tap on the Save button C 4 15 2 Configuring Triggers Viewing The Trigger Configuration The trigger on the EP10 hand held is configured using the Manage Triggers appl
135. ck Net Connect QNC support Short Message Service Send and receive SMS Notification of new messages D 2 4 Cinterion PH8 GSM GPRS EDGE Radio Table D 6 Frequency Bands GSM GPRS EDGE Quad band 850 900 1800 1900MHz UMTS HSPA Five band 800 850 AWS 1900 2100MHz GSM Class Small MS Output Power according to Class 4 33dBm 2dB for EGSM850 Release 99 Class 4 33dBm 2dB for EGSM900 Class 1 30dBm 2dB for GSM1800 Class 1 30dBm 2dB for GSM1900 Class E2 27dBm 3dB for GSM 850 8 PSK Class E2 27dBm 3dB for GSM 900 8 PSK Class E2 26dBm 3 4dB for GSM 1800 8 PSK Class E2 26dBm 3 4dB for GSM 1900 8 PSK Class 3 24dBm 1 3dB for UMTS 2100 WCDMA FDD Bd Class 3 24dBm 1 3dB for UMTS 1900 WCDMA FDD Bd II Class 3 24dBm 1 3dB for UMTS AWS WCDMA FDD Bd IV Class 3 24dBm 1 3dB for UMTS 850 WCDMA FDD Bd V Class 3 24dBm 1 3dB for UMTS 800 WCDMA FDD Bd VI Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix D Specifications Cinterion PH8 GSM GPRS EDGE Radio Table D 6 Operating Temperature board Normal operation 30 C to 85 C temperature Restricted operation 40 C to 95 C Physical Dimensions 33 9mm x 50mm x 3 1mm Weight approx 9 5g All hardware components fully compliant with EU RoHS Directive HSPA features 3GPP Release 6 7 DL 14 4Mbps UL 5 7Mbps UE CAT 1 6 11 12 supported Compressed mode CM supported according to 3GPP TS25 212 UMTS features 3GPP
136. ckground and tap on the Browse button to locate your picture 5 5 2 Beaming a Theme to Another Device You can also beam your selection to another device To scan for visible devices and beam a theme Choose a theme or background and tap on the Beam button File Zoom Tools Help Beam ac gv Vy ie Gm 1 32 2 DWF green tsk To beam select a device On the destination devica turn on visibility te receive Bluetooth beams searching The EP10 scans for visible devices within range of the EP10 and lists them in the Beam screen Tap on the device to which you want to send the theme A File Receive Confirmation dialog box appears on the device to which you are beaming the theme If the re cipient taps on OK the file is downloaded onto their device Note that the recipient can also tap on Browse to store the theme file in a different location Once the recipient clicks on OK to accept the file the device you chose is marked as Done Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual EN Chapter 5 Settings Items Tab Customizing the Today Screen Beam ac gr Ty 4 Gm 1 44 13 DWF green tsk To beam select a device On the destination devica turn on visibility te receive Bluetooth beams TORPSG 032 Tap to send hi PORPSG 011 Done 5 5 3 in Er Ti 42 qu 12 59 Items gt Appearance Move Down Ophohs The items you see in the Today screen are Windows Default items The Items tab allows you to
137. cle Cradle Mounting Recommendations For mounting information refer to Section 6 11 1 on page 211 Cleaning the RV1000 Vehicle Cradle AN Important Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the RV1000 Avoid abrasive cleaners solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning The plastic case is susceptible to harsh chemicals The plastic is partially soluble in oils mineral spirits and gasoline The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions e To clean ink marks from the label use isopropyl alcohol Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual B Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories The Powered Vehicle Cradle Model No RV1005 6 11 The Powered Vehicle Cradle Model No RV1005 The RV1005 Powered Vehicle Cradle 12 24 VDC is designed to securely grip the EP10 when locked in and provides an easy single handed release mechanism when the EP10 needs to be quickly removed from the cradle The cradle design permits access for the DC input cable to connect to the EP10 The cradle is also equipped with an RS 232 port no power on pin 9 a micro USB AB port and a DC jack connector The cradle comes with four mounting screws with illustrated electrical and mounting instructions Before Psion releases a product our engineering team exposes that product to a series of severe testing to ensure that it will survive in the rugged en
138. code in order to decode it It is normal for the LEDs to flash two or three times Hold the unit steady between flashes to improve decode performance e Switch the EP10 on Wait until the unit has booted up completely e Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger Hold the trigger until a successful or failed scan result is obtained e When the scan button or trigger is pressed a red oval shaped light the framing marker is displayed Centre the framing marker in the field either in the centre of the bar code you want to scan or in the centre of the area in which multiple bar codes are to be scanned The illumination LEDs will flash typically several times and a picture of the bar code s is taken Bluetooth Peripherals The EP10 is equipped with a Bluetooth radio making it possible to communicate with a variety of Bluetooth peripherals including GSM GPRS handsets scanners printers and so on Psion provides built in support for the Bluetooth peripherals listed below e GSM GPRS universal handset e Bluetooth printer e Bluetooth headset Keep in mind that Bluetooth and IEEE 802 11a b g n radios both operate in the 2 4GHz band Although the EP10 includes features to minimize interference performance of the system will not be optimal if you use both radios simultaneously Typically when both radios operate in the EP10 at the same time they cannot transmit simultaneously this has a negative impact on overall syste
139. con allows you to determine how your screen will be oriented portrait or landscape right or left handed e Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab e Tap on the Screen icon e In the General tab tap on the orientation that best suits the way in which you use your EP10 Note For information about screen rotation refer to Screen Rotation on page 182 E Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 Locking the Touchscreen 3 4 4 Locking the Touchscreen If you need to lock your touchscreen to protect against accidental actions From the Today screen tap on the Start icon Tap on the Lock icon in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen A sliding lock is displayed on the screen ao e Yj Me Ga 2 52 y Sliding lock tap or slide Lock icon DESDE Tap and hold the stylus on the sliding lock flick it to the right and release to unlock the touchscreen and display the screen options You can also tap on the sliding lock 3 5 EP10 Indicators The EP10 uses LEDs Light Emitting Diodes onscreen messages and audio tones to indicate the various conditions of the EP10 the batteries the scans and so on 3 5 1 LEDs Three LEDs are located on the upper right side of the EP10 just above the display When you press the Power button the LED flashes yellow to indicate that the EP10 has been powered up The LED table fol lowing outlines the behaviour of the LED while the EP10
140. csnseweudesesseceecsseednesesecouees 61 4 5 3 Synchronizing E mail with Outlook PC with Windows Vista or Windows 7 oooooocmoomo 62 A o IM NN epee tess esas e UU Gaseous be EEA EET E AE EEE A TAANE 63 ONIN CS PPP CUE nn A PO O 63 Ai WORKING WIRING Contacts LIST cccarrnnca ana eras sara aaron 64 AGZ Communicate Tab Ada CoOntaciS eses cds 65 A A PUN 66 4 6 3 1 KHO T A O PES UI 67 rnet EXMO AS 67 4 7 1 Browsing WEDOISS aires asi TOS eae A at 67 CAN psi a ed ice des 68 AA AEE E eave neue earn aya ted a te ane cg a se a ss ee E A E EET 68 PCOS EOS sorda roll cert 68 ATOT AGING Wie Camela aerasi oda arcas totes 68 A102 Movino Potros tone Error rara AOA 70 AOS A en 70 IO e RI oo A 70 AUS EIA PNOO errata one ii ete di aa ode 71 AOG Creanga Sde NO AN aa 71 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual HN Table of Contents 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 415 416 417 418 419 4 20 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 4 26 4 21 4 28 410 7 Using the Video Recorder ooocoococcoccocnncccncnccor corno nono 71 VVTINCIOWS Med esaracarccia a costas ses dr iaa ato do edites 12 Messenger CAICOS IO rata isa rates noria In eE iaoi T2 AOW A EE E AA 13 NOS ari aan 13 4 141 Creating a Note using the Soft Keyboard oocooccoccoccoccocnoccocnnccn ccoo nor rnrrrr 14 414 2 Creating and Converting Handwritten Notes to TeXt cc ccc ccc cee eee e cence eee eeeeeeeeeneeeees 14 ANAS Renaming a NOG socorro A ss T9 alaa RECANO N
141. ct your ISP or network administrator before making any changes Private networks are used for work related activities Internet networks are used for home connection to your ISP The My Work Network settings are used for private network connections corporate networks while My ISP settings are used for Internet network connections When you use programs such as Internet Explorer your EP10 automatically connects using private network settings under My Work Network or Internet settings under My ISP depending on specifications You can determine how your EP10 connects e Tap Start gt Settings gt Connections folder icon e Tap on the Connections icon and then tap on the Advanced tab Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 123 Chapter 5 Settings Wi Fi Config Setting Up the 802 11a b g n Radio Connections ao a Yl sE Gm 10 24 Tasks lt Advanced gt Tasks Select which networks are automatical iy usec Select Networks Dialing Rulez j Create exceptions for intranet ackelresses ExcepHonhz e Tap on Select Networks e Inthe appropriate list choose My ISP or My Work Network 5 8 9 Wi Fi Config Setting Up the 802 11a b g n Radio alll Wi FP Contig The Wi Fi Config application is used to configure the radio for one or more wireless network profiles This section describes the steps required to set up the Murata 802 11a b g n radio To see specifications for this radio refer
142. ctrician if you are uncertain of your receptacle grounding All charge indicators flash momentarily at power up to indicate that the charger is ready for operation Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual BH Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Operator Controls A 6 7 3 6 7 4 6 7 5 6 7 6 6 7 6 1 6 7 6 2 Important If you choose to wall mount the charger detailed installation instructions are included in the EP10 RV3004 Charger Spare Battery 4 Slot Quick Start Guide PN 8000233 included with the quad charger Be sure to locate the charger in an area where there is no risk of injury to persons walking in the vicinity Operator Controls The gang charger does not have operator controls or a power switch There is no dedicated indicator light to show that the charger is powered but the charge slot LEDs will light Charge Indicators Each battery charge slot is equipped with four LEDs to indicate the charge status of the battery When the EP10 batteries are inserted in the charger the colour and behaviour of the LEDs associated with the charge wells in use indicate the status of the charge Charge Status Indicator LEDs Table 6 2 Solid Green Battery charging complete Flashing Green Charge in progress Flashing Yellow Battery is not charging due to out of temperature conditions Solid Red Unable to read battery or non Psion battery Charging Batteries e Slide an EP10 battery as sh
143. d Postal PostNET disabled Postal China disabled Postal Japanese disabled Postal Kix disabled Postal Royal disabled Gs C 5 2 Color Camera Bar Code Symbologies The bar code symbologies for the Color Camera are listed in this section Table C 2 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix C Imagers Applet Color Camera Bar Code Symbologies Table C 2 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual APPENDIX SPECIFICATIONS D1 EP10 Specifications Model No EP10 7515 ee ee ee ee ee D 3 DIF AON sanidad ee ee ee ee he ee ee Se 03 Die OOW rn sus renai eee te Ge ee hehe ee eens Cee ee eee ee eee a D3 DLS Wireless COMmmMURICGUON sese aata ukran ikeir ERER OARS DE bd D 4 D 1 4 Power Management s 2464 ices0d 6b b4 CHERRY ERS SERS HH EEO EERE HES D 4 DES EXP NORN al iso urea oe hades Behe en ea She ce eee See ee a D 4 D16 Bar Code Application so css 286 beta be we Oa aia ee eo Baw eee be ee rs D 4 Dir Digtal Camela 24444524464 620s be wae eee whe AE eek Bee eee ee eS Ge D 4 DiS Voice Over IP VOIP lt s sa ei oh at Ga wh ER ee o wwe Ee eee ee aK ee a D 4 DILO ACCOSSONOS sas co cee ade Oe e SA He AAA D 4 DHO APO IE D 5 D 1 11 Environmental Specifications aooaa de ee eRe eS RHE RRO OR RRR EDS D 5 De Rado sDCCINGCAHONS lt span rr krea reren HS OSE SHES URE ee Se eee D 5 D 21 Murata 802 11 a b g n Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Radio D 5 D 2 2 Murata
144. d Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Recording Notes Notes Col gt Ti ff Gm 1 35 Li All Folders w 1 34 p Press and hold the stylus on the file name in the Notes screen that you want to rename In the pop up menu choose Rename Move File Zoom Tools Help Notes Co yt Til d Gm 1 40 Rename Move Location gize Modi ed 1 34 p Format presi pwi In the Name field type the new name O Note Remember that if you want to use the soft keyboard to type a new name you ll need to tap and hold the stylus on the Transcriber icon and choose Keyboard from the popup menu You can also move the note to a new Folder and or a new Location When you ve made the changes you need tap on OK 4 14 4 Recording Notes It is sometimes easier to record a note than to write it down just to make certain that you ve captured an idea before it drifts away To make an audio recording Tap on the New Note softkey to open a fresh note Tap on Menu gt View Recording Toolbar Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Task Notification ea a Til of mi 8 57 Volume Skip to end Draw Skip to start View Recording Toolbar Undo 4 Record Redo Cut es By O E P a Tap on the Record button a beep alerts you that your device is now ready to record Begin speaking into the microphone on the EP10 Make certain that you move the EP10 to within a few feet of the source of the sound you
145. depending on whether the radio is turned off or on Wi Fi Config Configure Tab Note Ifthe Configure tab is not visible open the Advanced tab uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless settings and reset the EPIO To configure the radio for a wireless network tap on the Configure tab Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 125 Chapter 5 Settings Wi Fi Config Setting Up the 802 11a b g n Radio Wi Fi Config qe Ye ME Gr 2 45 Status Configure Advanced Connect Used to connect to an already existing wireless network configuration Add New Used to create a new wireless network configuration Edit Used to change values in an existing wireless network configuration Remove Used to delete a wireless network configuration Scan Used to detect and list available wireless networks You can highlight a network in the list and tap on Add New to activate the network There are two methods available when configuring a radio network you can either scan for an existing network or manually create a network If you tap on the Sean button a list of networks detected by the radio is displayed Highlighting one of the listed networks and tapping on the Add New button creates a new profile that is completed based on the security capabilities detected by the radio You may need to add ad ditional information depending on your network requirements If you tap on the Add New button rather than the Scan button you can cr
146. dio link that operates in the ISM band at 2 4 GHz Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 105 Chapter 5 Settings Bluetooth Setup When two Bluetooth equipped devices come within a 10 meter range of each other they can establish a connection Because Bluetooth utilizes a radio based link it does not require a line of sight connection in order to communicate Tap on Start gt Settings Tap on the Connections Folder icon followed by the Bluetooth icon Bluetooth ao qe Ty 4 Gm 7 50 About Paired gt Device Select device to view options Turning the Bluetooth Radio On Before pairing a headset or any other Bluetooth device with your EP10 make certain that the Bluetooth device power is enabled and that the radio is switched on it is enabled by default If for some reason it has been disabled Scroll to the on Mode tab Tap in the checkbox next to Turn on Bluetooth Turn your Bluetooth device on and place it within a few feet of your EP10 e f needed set your Bluetooth device to visible discoverable so that the hand held can detect it and establish a connection 5 8 2 1 The Devices Tab Scanning for Bluetooth Devices Scroll to the Device tab Bluetooth ac gi Ti Gm 8 10 Paired lt Device gt Servers Select device to start pairing PUE PA y y Sen ES OK To discover and list all Bluetooth devices in range of the EP10 tap on the Scan button in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen
147. down menu attached to Show Popup Ul on Device Resume allows you to determine when the battery status pop up user interface UI will appear based on the battery health Edit Changing Ratings Text You can customize the ratings text with the Edit button By enclosing your text within the html tag used for Bold lt b gt or removing the tag to unbold the text you can change the text that will appear in the pop up battery status screen For example the default text Excellent might be changed to Battery is excellent and will last one day shift 5 7 Sounds amp Notifications The Sounds amp Notifications icon allows you to specify when your EP10 will emit sounds 5 7 1 Sounds Tab Tap on Start gt Settings and then tap on the Sounds amp Notifications icon to display this dialog box Sounds amp Mobficatians Sounds amp Notificat o g gt Tije Gu 5 23 Notificatio lt Sounds gt Notficatio Enable sounds for x Events warnings system events x Notifications alarms reminders FP Screen taps e Tap on the checkboxes and radio buttons to enable the event s that will cause your unit to emit a sound 5 7 2 Notifications Tab Sounds amp Notificat ao 2 Yj ue 5 33 Sounds lt Notifications gt Sounds Event Ring type Ring Ring tone Tap here to play Tap here to end your ring choices the ring test This tab allows you to choose an event and for each event choose the audi
148. dows Mobile manages access to your GPS device and allows multiple programe to obtain GPS data simultaneously If you clear this check box some programs may mot be able to obtain GPS data x Manage GPS automatically frecormmended You can go to www microsoft com pocketstreets if a map viewing program is not included with your EP10 and copy the file to your EP10 e Tap on the Hardware tab and set the GPS hardware port to COM2 Set the Baud rate to 4800 LA Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings GPS Global Positioning System Settings GPS Settings Fg pedi Gat 6 46 Programs lt Hardware gt Access Specify the hardware port to which your GPS device is connected For more informaban see the GPS device manufacturer s documentaban GPS hardware port 5 11 11 GPS Global Positioning System Settings This applet allows you to define how the GPS module operates You can determine when the GPS module can draw power and under what conditions and choose from a set of GPS profiles built into the modem You can also set up AGPS Assisted Global Positioning System and SBAS Satellite based augmentation system Tap on Start gt Settings gt System gt GPS Settings icon GPS Settings Cl yt Ti s 6 4 Advanced Power gt AGPS x Enable Smart Power Mode Power Tab This tab allows you to dictate how the GPS module behaves The GPS Power drop down menu is used to control when the GPS
149. drop down menu and choose Bluetooth Tap on Next O Note If you are using another device to connect to the Internet you can choose a different modem from the drop down menu Connections Cr yt Til d om 9 34 Make New Connection Enter a name for the connection Selecta modem bluetooth Y y Cancel E a Next l pr Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual n3 Chapter 5 Settings Connections Connecting to the Internet 5 Make certain that the phone is discoverable Some phones also need to be pairable in order to accept a bonding request Refer to your phone documentation for additional information 6 Ifthe phone appears in the My Connections list skip to step 13 If not go to step 7 7 Inthe list tap the phone you want to connect to and then tap on the Next button Note that if your phone is not listed tap on Add new device and choose the phone from the list 8 Inthe PIN screen type a personal identification number PIN you can enter up to 16 characters 9 Enter the same PIN on the phone 10 If you wish you can edit the name of the phone in the Name field 11 Tap on the Finish button 12 In the My Connections list tap on the phone and then on Next 13 Enter the dial up phone number for this connection and tap on Next 14 In the User name Password and Domain fields enter the logon information for this connection and tap on Finish You can begin using the Bluetooth phone connect
150. e Hands Free Profile Service Commands The HSP Headset Profile allows users to connect their device to Bluetooth enabled headsets and other audio devices HSP HFP services provide the following unique menu options e Connect Audio establishes an audio connection to the Bluetooth headset e Disconnect Audio disconnects the audio connection from the Bluetooth headset e Volume Control displays a dialog box where the headset and microphone volume can be adjusted 5 8 3 Connecting Using a Bluetooth GPRS Phone Once you ve completed the Bluetooth settings you can go ahead and set up communication through your Bluetooth equipped phone Before you begin make certain that the Bluetooth phone is turned on that the Bluetooth radios in your EP10 and phone are enabled turned on and that the hand held and phone are within 10 metres of each other Both should be discoverable 1 Tap on Start gt Settings and then tap on the Connections tab 2 Tap onthe Connections icon Under ISP WWAN GPRS tap on Add a new modem connection ma Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Connecting Using a Bluetooth GPRS Phone Connections A 46 Gm 10 05 Advanced lt Tasks gt Advanced ISP WWAN GPRS 3 Type a name for the connection Connections ER d om 9 31 Make New Connection Enter a name for the connection Select a modem Cellular Line Ey E Next 1 T y Ea ht 4 Tap onthe Select a modem
151. e a parameter value e Highlight the custom preset and tap on the Edit button PTS Imager Settiny Fi e a Preset Options FE image Corrections E Windowing Pre defined Preset are read only Press space or double click to change a setting in Customer preset Press lt Esc gt to cancel Tap on the symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change e For a parameter that can take a range of values Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click the parameter An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting is displayed Type a value in the field provided For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click on the parameter Either method toggles between the two available values e When you ve completed your edits tap on OK The parameter list is displayed the new value for the changed parameter is shown e Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes C 4 6 Removing a Custom Preset Highlight the custom preset you want to delete and tap on the Remove button A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix C Imagers Applet Configuring t
152. e quad docking station is equipped with Power Indicator LED 6 6 3 Quad Dock Operation 6 6 3 1 Charging the EP10 Battery Insert the DC power plug into the RV4004 rear DC input receptacle The RV4004 supplies DC power to enable the EP10 internal fast charger Normally a full charge of the battery will take from 3 to 4 hours Insert up to four EP10s into the docking station charge wells pressing down gently but firmly to seat them securely During the charge the EP10 LED slow flashes green When the battery capacity reaches 95 the LED turns solid green O Note Battery charging continues whether the EPIO is switched on or off 6 6 3 2 Installation The charger can be wall mounted using the wall mount bracket model number RV4007 or it can be oper ated on a flat surface Install the charger in an area that is free from excessive dirt dust and contaminants The ambient temperature must be in the range O C and 40 C 32 F to 104 F The docking station will not charge batteries outside of this temperature range For maximum performance it is recommended that the charger be operated at room temperature a temperature range between 18 C to 25 C 64 F to 77 F Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual BH Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Cleaning the RV4004 AN Important Use IEC 320 C13 power cords approved by Psion with the ground pin connected to a proper earth grounded receptacle Check with a qua
153. eate a network manually AN Important The steps below describe how to manually create a network Keep in mind that this is intended only as an example and may vary from your own network requirements If for example you are using a different type of security for your network the fields you complete may not match those described here 5 8 9 2 1 Manually Creating a Network In the Configure tab tap on the Add New button Enter the SSID Service Set Identifier for your network Wi Fi Config la i ME m 5 39 Auth Mode een il 5 8 9 2 2 Authentication Mode 126 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings 5 8 9 2 3 Wi Fi Config Setting Up the 802 11a b g n Radio EP10 supports several classes of authentication Open WEP WPA WPA2 Personal PSK Enterprise CCKM WPA CCKM WPA2 and 802 1x with EAP Tapping on the Auth Mode menu displays your authentication options Wi Fi Config Lar i ME m 5 51 SSID Auth Mode WPAZ2 Erterprise EAP COAMANPA Note Each Auth Mode has a unique Configure Profile screen attached to it with fields appropriate to the authorization mode you ve chosen Open Authentication Open authentication does not provide security When this option is chosen EP10 will connect to wireless networks which do not use authentication or encryption WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP provides static security to prevent others from accidentally accessing your network If you choose t
154. elected for configuration To select a camera e Tap on the Camera Presets drop down menu to view the camera options e Choose a camera either Imager the imager located at the top of the unit or Colour Camera the camera located at back of the EP10 C 3 3 Setting the Active Preset An active preset has an A to the right To set an active preset e Highlight the preset and tap on the Activate button C 3 4 Viewing a Preset To view the parameter settings in a preset Highlight a preset and tap on the View button The associated preset window is displayed Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix C Imagers Applet Creating a Custom Preset PTS Imager Settiny ea a Til 20 gm 8 21 Preset Low light near E Options E Image Corrections E Exposure Windowing Pre defined Preset are read only Press space or double click to change a setting in Customer preset Press lt Esc gt to cancel e Tap on the sign to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings C 3 5 Creating a Custom Preset A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset either a predefined preset or an existing custom preset To create a custom preset e Highlight a preset and tap on the Add button In this example the Low light near preset was chosen A screen like the sample below is displayed PTS Imager Settiny ea Pty Til 20 gm 8 32 Cloning from existing preset Low light near Enter name of new p
155. eliza was oF ie AFIRI PAT RM S AT PTR A it iil li yy H gt r lt AE AAA eqn a i TE a ETA ATTE 5 July _ September _ h ALA H agit aise iste AAi tint a eee E e as hum S a ret oe a ETS 74 3 en fs Aaa 1 1 No appointment selected MERO 3 10 4 1 Creating and Editing Appointments e Inthe Calendar screen tap on the Menu softkey in the softkey bar and then tap on New Appointment Figure 3 4 Appointment Detail Screen Calendar ac er Ti q m 1 55 Notes Appointment gt Notes Subject Location starts 4 1 11 12 00 PM Ends 4 1 11 1 00PM All Day No Doors Once Reminder Remind me Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 Calendar of Upcoming Appointments In the Subject field name the appointment e Complete the remaining fields to reflect your appointment details Adding Reminders If you want to be reminded in advance of an appointment Tap on the Reminder field and choose Remind me from the drop down menu Tap the field below the Reminder field and tap on the number in the field to display a drop down menu where you can define a numeric value of 1 5 10 15 30 Tap on minute s to display a drop down menu from which you can choose the time unit for your reminder minute s hour s day s or week s Tap OK to finish You are returned to the view you were in before adding the reminder Ta
156. emicals It is partially soluble in oils mineral spirits and gasoline and slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions e To clean ink marks from the label use isopropyl alcohol Troubleshooting Docking Station does not Power On e When first connected to the DC power supply the spare charger LED should turn ON and remain on for 3 seconds If this does not occur the charger is defective and requires service EP10 Charge LED Stays Off When an EP10 is docked into a powered RV4000 and the EP10 charge indicator LED stays off there may be a problem with the unit or with the docking station Use an EP10 with a properly functioning charge indica tor to isolate the problem EP10 Charge LED Flashes Yellow A flashing yellow EP10 charge LED the left most LED on the hand held indicates that the battery is not within the charging temperature range O C and 40 C 32 F to 104 F Allow the battery to come to an acceptable range before reinserting the EP10 in the docking station Dock Battery LED Fast Flashes Red with Spare Battery Inserted e Your Psion battery and desktop docking station are carefully designed for safety and capacity perform ance in accordance with IEEE 1725 If the battery or charger are not Psion approved products or the safety mechanism is faulty the spare charge slot LED or EP10 LED will display solid red e Try inserting a battery that has been tested in another charger and is known to work e Ifthe s
157. equiring additional information a dialog box is automatically displayed where further details can be completed The sample dialog box below is an example of a service requiring additional information in this case the Serial Port Service Bluetooth ac e Ty Gm 9 24 Select profile options and press Next Mode ESA Encryption Disable Pot como This dialog box offers a number of additional options such as enabling Encryption and selecting three dif ferent modes Serial ActiveSync and Scanner e Serial is used for simple serial port communication e ActiveSync is for ActiveSync over Bluetooth e Scanner is used to create a Seamless connection between the incoming Bluetooth bar code and the EP10 e Printer Port is for connection to a printer over Bluetooth Once you ve completed the information e Tap on Next and then in the Services screen tap on OK Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 109 Chapter 5 Settings Bluetooth Setup 5 8 2 3 Servers Tab Bluetooth en Ti 3 53 Device lt Servers gt Mode Select a service to be enabled on this device Serial hoe E C scanner OBEX OPP When a remote Bluetooth device initiates a Bluetooth connection to the EP10 the remote device is consid ered the Bluetooth master and the hand held the Bluetooth slave In order for the remote device to connect to the EP10 the EP10 must offer a service in the form of a server The S
158. erizon Connection To create your Verizon data connection e Tapon the a Navigation bar at the top of the screen to display the hotkeys Tap on the Phone Set tings hotkey e In the Phone Settings bubble tap on Settings Activation Wizard g gt Tom Ge 4 26 This process will activate your phone for service To begin the Auto Activation process click on Auto anel the wizard will connect te the Wireless Network to activate the device Please make sure you are in a strong signal area before beginning this process For Manual Activation you will need to provide an Activation Code MDN MSID MSIN information This screen is displayed only when your service has not yet been activated e Tap on Auto to set up the data connection AN Important Since the network settings are updated wirelessly make certain that you have good network coverage before tapping on Auto A 4 2 1 Repairing a Data Connection If your data connection is accidentally deleted you can use this screen to set up your connection Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual A Appendix A Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Verizon Connection Phone E gt Yul di Ge 4 24 Location lt Data Settings gt System 3 By clicking the Repair Connectoid button your device will repair the connection settings for Nationaldccess Repair Connectoid By tapping on Repair Connectoid your data connection is restored Note
159. ervers tab allows these services to be enabled and configured There are three server services available Serial Scanner and OBEX OPP Serial server enables the Serial Port Profile server a Serial Port can be selected from the drop down menu Keep in mind that when a port is chosen an application must be open connected to the chosen port for a remote device to be able to connect Scanner server enables a Serial Port Profile server and then relays it to the Scanner Service SCS This is used for Bluetooth bar code scanners that operate in client mode SCS opens the server port and handles the scanner input OBEX OPP server enables the Object Push Profile server A warm reset must be performed on the EP10 after a change is made to this option The OPP Server allows other Bluetooth devices to send files to this device Tap on the checkbox to activate the server the associated port name is displayed beside the server name 5 8 2 4 Mode Tab Bluetooth Cg Y aff Gm 4 58 Servers lt Mode gt Abaut x Turn on Bluetooth x Discoverable C Printer Port Hotkey x Allow Bluetooth to wake system When Turn on Bluetooth is checked Bluetooth features are available If this option is disabled you cannot send or receive information using Bluetooth mo Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Bluetooth Setup When Discoverable is enabled other Bluetooth devices within range approximately 10 me
160. es By default the trigger mapping list only shows active mappings Mappings for drivers or applications that are not currently active are not normally displayed By checking this checkbox all mappings both active and inactive are displayed Add Tapping this button brings up the Add mapping dialog see below so that you can add new trigger map pings Edit Tapping this button brings up the Edit mapping dialog so that you can edit existing trigger mappings Remove Tapping this button removes an existing mapping OK The OK button in the Manage Triggers screen saves all changes made If the ESC key is pressed all changes are discarded Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual MY Chapter 5 Settings Manage Triggers 5 11 13 1 1 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping e Tap on Add to add a new trigger map or tap on Edit to edit an existing trigger map Manage Triggers ea en Ti 1 46 Up Down Double click Module to trigger Color Camera Decode 0 Show all modules i i if A w Bz Add Key E Trigger Key This drop down list allows you to specify the source of the trigger events such as the Grip Trigger Left Scan etc for the trigger module selected Note It is possible to map the same source to different modules trigger consumers for example to both the Imager and Non Decoded Scanner If so both devices operations will occur simultane ously This is not recommended in most cases especially
161. es establish your identity in termediate certificates as the name suggests identifies intermediate certification authorities and root cer tificates establish the identity of the servers with which you can connect 5 11 3 1 Choosing a Certificate Normally certificates already configured for your network are chosen automatically by the EP10 If a certif icate cannot be chosen automatically you must choose it from the Certificates list e To choose a certificate tap the desired certificate Your EP10 will connect automatically Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 145 Chapter 5 Settings Certificates Personal Tab Certificates Co yt Ty d Gm 8 50 Root lt Personal gt Intermedi Use personal certificates to positively identify yourself to others lt ae he The Personal tab lists the name of the certificate issuer and the expiration date e To view additional information about a personal certificate tap on a certificate in the list e To delete a certificate tap and hold the stylus on the item you want to delete until a pop up menu is displayed Tap on the Delete command Intermediate Certificates The items in this list help identify intermediate certification authorities Certificates ea a Fi s m 8 52 Personal lt Intermediate gt Root Use intermediate certificates to positively identify intermediate certification authorities Issued By Expires Root Certificates
162. es tab and Scan for devices in your area e When the scan is complete tap on the device to which you want to pair e In the pop up menu choose Pair An authentication dialog box is displayed Bluetooth ao qe Va qua 9 18 Enter a passcode to establizh a secure connection To proceed without authentication press Next Cancel ES Net 3 e If the remote device has authentication enabled type the PIN in this dialog box e To proceed without authentication tap on Next O Note Ifa remote device has authentication enabled and you ve skipped the authentication process a pop up screen will ask if you want to allow the remote device to connect to the EP10 Tap on Yes and type the PIN When authentication is complete tap on Done After entering the device PIN the Services dialog appears with a list of services available for that device 108 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Bluetooth Setup Bluetooth ao gv Ty E 9 22 Name TORPSG 011 Select service for pairing C Wireless Ster C Serial Port C OBEX OPP ap Note Keep in mind that this screen is dynamically populated to reflect the services offered by the remote discovered device The sample screen above may differ from your own depending on the services you have available on your remote device Click in the checkbox to the left of the service to activate it Click on Done O Note If you choose a service r
163. es to Text To create a handwritten note using the transcriber e Tap and hold the stylus on the soft keyboard icon to display the pop up menu Cg Y ps Ga 8 18 e Choose Transcriber from the menu When you choose Transcriber you can write notes in your own handwriting The EP10 will converts the notes into typed text for you A Transcriber Intro screen is displayed to provide information to help you work with the Transcriber Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Renaming a Note Transcriber Intro ry A 2 Gm 8 29 A a TE S Transcriber Entro pk Transcriber reliably recognizes handwsriting in wedded print ated mixed styles as well as numbers and cymbals 32 6 74 Wite anywhere on the screen White kegilty Quick Gestures Cail Cnerert Don t show this ___ When you choose Transcriber the soft keyboard icon changes to an icon of a hand poised to write a note e At the top of the Transcriber Intro screen tap on OK e Inthe blank Note screen use your stylus to write a note as clearly as possible The text in the note is converted from handwritten to printed text Cg Ta E au 7 46 ve COgnite recognize e Tap on OK to save your note e Inthe blank Note screen use your stylus to write a note as clearly as possible 4 14 3 Renaming a Note When you click on OK to save a note a list of your notes are displayed in the next screen Psion EP10 Hand Hel
164. ess Point Name and tap on Next A 6 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix A Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Advanced GSM GPRS Data Configuration A Connections ee Tp KE Ge 9 06 My Connection Wiser name Domain Tf provided by ISP or network administrator Advanced a a a Ay Bark Finish If required type a User name and Password If you need to specify TCP IP and Server information i e you are using a static IP address tap on the Advanced button to complete the necessary details Tap on Finish to create a new connection A 3 2 2 The Security Tab Entering a PIN Number This option allows you to assign a PIN Personal Identification Number so that your SIM card is protected from unauthorized use O Note For details about assigning a PIN number refer to Phone Security Tab on page 55 A 3 2 3 Bands Phone A m 8 05 Data lt Bands gt Diagnostics x 6sM_850mHz x GSM 900MHz x GSM 1800MHz x GSM 1900MHz x UMTS 850MHz x UMTS 1900MHz By default all frequency bands are enabled Bands should not be disabled without knowledge about which bands are used by your network an incorrect setting will prevent the WWAN modem from finding the network Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix A Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Establishing a CDMA Radio Modem Connection A 3 2 4 Network Configuration Phone a a
165. essages on page 76 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual EJ Chapter 4 Programs E mail 4 5 4 5 1 4 5 2 A E mail Messaging e en Yl m que 42 57 Select an Account q Text Messages iz lt z Setup E mail Tap to setup a new account A s PaA ro A pa Select E Menu Y Note If your e mail is already synchronized go to Sending an E mail on page 63 The E mail program is used to send and receive e mail on your EP10 It also provides access to text messages To send and receive e mail you ll need to synchronize your PC or connect to a Post Office Protocol 3 POP3 or Internet Message Access Protocol 4 IMAP4 mail server For each of these methods you need to set up an e mail account with one exception Outlook e mail ac counts are set up by default Folders If you use an Outlook e mail account messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook are automatically synchro nized with your EP10 You can use ActiveSync on your PC to synchronize additional folders The folders and messages you move are mirrored on the server For POP3 accounts if you move e mail messages to a folder you create the link between the messages on the EP10 and the copies on the mail server are broken When you next connect the mail server will recog nize that the messages are missing from the EP10 Inbox folder and delete them from the server preventing duplication of messages Keep in mind howe
166. essive dirt dust and contaminants e Chargers will not charge batteries outside an ambient temperature range of O C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F It is recommended that the charger or docking station be operated at room temperature between 18 C and 25 C 64 F to 77 F for maximum performance After unpacking your unit e Visually inspect the charger for possible damage e Install the IEC power cord and apply power 6 3 3 Power Consumption Considerations Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying chargers and or docking stations is adequate for the load es pecially if several chargers and docking stations are being powered from the same circuit e Quad docking station can consume up to 1 9A 120 VAC or 1 5 A O 100 240 VAC 6 4 AC Wall Adaptor Model No PS1050 G1 The AC wall adaptor available for your EP10 allows you to operate your hand held using AC power while charging the battery inserted in the unit Adaptor plugs suitable for use in the following countries are shipped with the AC wall adaptor United King dom Switzerland Japan Israel Australia Europe and North America Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 199 Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Desktop Docking Station Model No RV4000 Figure 6 3 AC Wall Adaptor Plugs Universal AC Power Supply Adaptor Plugs DC Power Plugs e Choose the adaptor plug that is suitable for use in your country Slide the adaptor plug
167. et The Imagers applet pro vides a shortcut to the Manage Triggers applet e In the Advanced tab tap on the Trigger Control button e To view all the triggers and the hardware devices that are configured to use them tap in the checkbox next to Show all modules Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix C Imagers Applet Bar Code Symbologies L Side Sc Up Down Decoded Scar Up Down Imager And C Up Down Decoded Scar Up Down Imager And X Show all modules Double click 90 1000 msec aa OK r e Adding Editing and Removing Triggers For instruction about adding editing and removing triggers refer to Manage Triggers on page 156 C 5 Bar Code Symbologies There are two sets of bar code symbologies one for Imager and one for Colour Camera To display the bar codes available e Inthe PTS Imager Settings screen scroll to the Barcoding tab e In the Camera Presets drop down menu at the top of the PTS Imager Settings screen choose Imager or Color Camera depending on which set of bar codes you want to work with PTS Imager Settiny ea Pig Til 20 qu 8 42 Imaging Barcoding gt Filter Camera Presets Imager PTS Imager Setti EN g T 28 uu 10 50 z Imaging Barcodin Alter Default lt a gt Low light Low power Glossy surface RETA TOA RA Fa E an View Add Femove Activate Barcode Presets My Default Factory Default Scroll down to the Barcode
168. ete oradores 45 Be GANG A e O EEEE E E A NEEE SETENE NES 46 Chapter 4 Programs 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 1 4 8 4 9 410 A o ER o E i OO TI o E 49 POMS NO II fauna ah esa pan A E A IO 49 TROP NONO oraaa E E E E AE T E E N 49 4 31 TOON OV aC eiseressen lesa caia de ENNA EA AEAEE E 50 4 31 1 Sending amp Ending Phone Calls using the Phone Keypad c ccc cec ce cceeeeeeeeees 50 4 3 1 2 Making a Conference Call omosassrosnses societaria 50 4 3 1 3 Receiving an MCOMINO Gall scevacetecunesieeascaeusdsenseaeawacnecisGecsceveteeeescceticnt clas 51 Asie Programming Speed DIM sicccuos siones leed 51 432 Sending amp Ending Calls using the EP10 RevDOSM Usina di 53 ASS Mandadind Phone Seti Ss rr id dia o 53 4 3 3 PISE SOUNDS TD sacras OE AAA AN EE EEEE ese 54 4332 LO Security TaD cceceisansgetuvievieues rea TEE EEEE AANA Eer aa aS 55 Aes MONS E EE a EE N EE en EURO II 56 ASSA PION EWO ib asigusevenisccmirninriiengseresyaneiecteralritaces ATETEA EEEN EA 57 Aaa PRONS Data Als ns st dida ca EES sT Ai MONS Pa r EAA EET dana ERE TESES 58 433 Phone Diagnostics laD sssreccrerrerrr artt nE isi SEENEN EEESC EEEE 58 433G Phone AearnndAld laD wueraatebeur ars Ig A 58 Te SS ges ig U0 PP PE o IA A iT 39 A 60 4 51 POIS reede A e EA a das vaina idos 60 4 5 2 Synchronizing E mail with Outlook PC with Windows XP OS cece cece cence eee e eee eee cence 60 Adel Chance Synchronization Seu INOS ccccccteccscesecuecca
169. f results in a full shutdown of the EP10 including the radio O Note Keep in mind that the Power Options dialog box is displayed only by pressing and holding down the Power button If you press and immediately release the Power button the EP10 automati cally enters suspend mode 2 5 Resetting the EP10 2 5 1 Performing a Warm Reset During a warm reset running programs are halted The contents of the flash memory and the registry are preserved Keep in mind however that RAM content is not preserved e Press and hold down the BLUE FN key and the Power button simultaneously for a minimum of six Seconds O Note You do not need to reset your EP10 after configuring the radio 2 5 2 Performing a Clean Start A clean start returns the EP10 to factory settings flushes the registry keys and deletes volatile storage Please note that the Psion Software Advantage add on cab file is saved and stored in volatile memory e Press and hold down the BLUE FN key the Power button and the left SCAN key simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds The EP10 displays the Boot to BooSt menu e Onan alpha keyboard type clean e Ona numeric keyboard type 25326 ere Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 2 Getting Started The Touchscreen 2 5 3 Boot to BooSt If you choose Boot to BooSt the BooSt menu is loaded e Press and hold down the BLUE FN key the Power button and the left SCAN key
170. for a minimum of six seconds i Press 1 to launch the OS 2 5 4 Performing a Hardware Reset A hardware reset reinitializes all hardware All RAM including the RAM disk is erased Non volatile storage such as the Flash disk is preserved e Press and hold down the BLUE FN key the SYM key and the Power button for a minimum of six seconds 2 6 The Touchscreen 2 6 1 Aligning Calibrating the Touchscreen Refer to Aligning Calibrating the Touchscreen on page 24 for details 2 6 2 Locking the Touchscreen Refer to Locking the Touchscreen on page 25 for details 2 1 Connectivity The EP10 contains an integrated 802 11a b g n radio module The Wi Fi Config application is used to config ure the radio for one or more wireless network profiles To configure the radio follow the steps outlined under the following heading Wi Fi Config Setting Up the 802 11a b g n Radio on page 124 The EP10 is available with one of the following Wireless WAN WWAN radio options the Cinterion PH8 for GSM UMTS networks worldwide or the Sierra Wireless MC5728V for the Sprint and Verizon CDMA net works in the U S For details about configuring these radios refer to Appendix A Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN With either of these radios and a SIM card you can wirelessly transfer data see Appendix A Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN for details and you can use the EP10 voice option to place phone calls refer to The P
171. g an Application on Startup If you enable Launch an application on Startup a screen is displayed where you can choose the application that will be launched automatically when the EP10 is powered up CN E pd uu 7 07 la Windows Solitaire Ink Window Imager And Camera Window ActiveSyne ink Window Alarms Ink Window Bing Ink Window e Tapon the application you want the EP10 to launch on startup Your choice is displayed in the Advanced tab Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 7 Chapter 5 Settings PsionVU Psion U fF PES Ti di 11 15 Applicabons lt Advanced gt Phone x Administrator access in Start Menu Administrator Key Sequence Shift Blue 0 Startup progra Phone Tab PsionVU ea a Til om 9 40 I Advanced lt Phone gt Applications l E gt Ti i Gm 9 44 Configure the Phone Dialer buttons 4 din Phone Applications low the Talk and End buttons Y Allow the Tale end ere ent and End buttons Disable the Talk button only Disable the Talk and End buttons The Phone tab allows you to define access to the phone buttons on the EP10 keyboard by choosing an item from the Configure the Phone Dialer buttons drop down menu 5 11 18 4 Restrictions The Restrictions screen allows the administrator to restrict access to applications O Note Remember that changes do not take effect until the EPIO is set to User Mode and the unit is reset Refer to Activating a
172. ge 102 for additional details about this setting If you provide AC power to the EP10 and either the battery capacity is too low or is overheated a yellow LED will flash and the unit will not switch on To switch on the hand held replace the overheated battery or in the case of a depleted battery wait for the capacity to reach an acceptable level However if you provide AC power to an EP10 with a battery that falls below the configured suspend threshold the hand held will switch on provided the battery capacity is above O mAh 2 4 5 Switching the EP10 Hand Held Off The EP10 can be placed in suspend mode or powered off Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual EN Chapter 2 Getting Started Resetting the EP10 e To display the Power Options dialog box press and hold down the Power button A Power Options dialog box like the sample below is displayed Each option switches off different elements of the EP10 Power Options li Ti Me GE 10 16 l Regional Settings 5canrers 7 m T ri al A a E Y E E 10 18 Power Options mul SIC Dp h a le Power Options Choosing Suspend places the hand held into a power saving suspend state In this state all radios remain on but the display and keyboard backlight are switched off The processor operates in a low power state When the EP10 is turned on from this state operation resumes within a few seconds in the screen in which you were working prior to suspend Choosing Power of
173. ge 200 e Quad Docking Station Model No RV4004 can charge the battery of up to four EP10s inserted in the docking station see Quad Docking Station Model No RV4004 on page 203 e Quad Battery Charger Model No RV3004 can charge up to four batteries inserted in the charger see Quad Charger Model No RV3004 on page 205 e USB amp Charger Snap Module Model No RV4001 allows you to connect a micro USB cable and a power cable to the EP10 see Snap Modules Model Nos RV4001 amp RV4002 on page 207 e DEI RS232 amp charger Snap Module Model No RV4002 provides an RS 232 connection and charge power to the EP10 see Snap Modules Model Nos RV4001 4 RV4002 on page 207 Note Refer to Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time on page 28 for additional infor mation about the battery AN Important To avoid damaging the battery chargers will not begin the charge process until the battery temperature is between O C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F 3 3 The Keyboard 3 3 1 EP10 Alpha and Numeric Keyboards Both types of keyboards are equipped with Talk and End phone keys EA Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 Locking the Keyboard Figure 31 Alpha and Numeric Keyboards Most of the keys on these keyboards operate much like a desktop computer Where a key or key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard the differences are noted The BLU
174. ge Handshake Authentication Protocol however if your ISP does not support CHAP tapping in the box to the left of PAP only authentication for directs the connection to use PAP Password Authentication Protocol instead e Tap on the Create button A 4 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix A Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Disconnecting from a Network A 3 1 A 3 2 A 3 2 1 Disconnecting from a Network To disconnect from the network Tap on the navigation bar at the top of the screen and then tap on the Phone Settings hotkey In the pop up Phone bubble tap on Wireless Manager Tap on the Menu button in the taskbar at the bottom of the Wireless Manager screen and choose Dis connect Cellular Data A home data connection is automatically set up FY oe 1 E Ga 10 37 Data gt Bands Ca a mr 10 3 Create a data connection for the Phone i e il q Gam 10 38 Network lt Data gt Bands i Ma Hats connection Create a data connection for the current network To connect to the Internet tap on the Start gt Internet Explorer icon Note Any application that needs Internet access will establish a packet data connection for example e mail Advanced GSM GPRS Data Configuration In most cases when a GSM GPRS radio and SIM are installed in your hand held setup is automatic Follow the steps outlined under the heading Establishing a Packet Data Connection on page A 3 to ma
175. gger module you assigned For example suppose you launch Manage Triggers and choose Decoded Scanner as the module to trigger Next you assign a trigger key for this example period To define the serial stream of data bytes to control the on and off function of the trigger key enter a hex value in the Trigger On Sequence and the Trigger Off Sequence fields When you press the trigger key the Trigger On Sequence is sent and when you release the trigger key the Trigger Off Sequence is sent turning the trigger key on and off Screen e Tap Start gt Settings Tap on the System icon and then tap on the Screen icon id Text Size lt General gt ClearType Orientation Portrait Landscape right handed Landscape lsf handed Align Screen Align the screen if it is not responding accurately to stylus taps This icon allows you to align calibrate your touchscreen turn ClearType on and off and adjust the size of the text displayed on the EP10 screen Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual EGI Chapter 5 Settings Screen Rotation AN Important Refer to Aligning Calibrating the Touchscreen on page 24 5 11 23 Screen Rotation Tap Start gt Settings Tap on the System icon and then tap on the Screen Rotation icon Soreen Rotation Screen Rotation l g7 Yi Gm 12 31 Screen Rotation x Enable auto screen rotation C All orientations O Portrait La
176. ghtness and to the right to increase brightness 5 11 2 2 Advanced Tab O Note The EPIO uses the settings in this tab to determine how the backlight will behave when Adjust backlight automatically is enabled in the Backlight tab The options in the Advanced tab are not available when Adjust backlight automatically is disabled The drop down menu at the top of the Advanced tab allows you to set up backlight behaviour for different lighting conditions so that when you choose one of the lighting categories your EP10 will adjust to the se lected ambient light conditions automatically Backlight El gt all mm 9 35 Backlight Advanced gt Battery Py Indoors low light Dark Adjust power settings to conserve Default power i y Adjust power settings ma conserve E x 5 11 2 3 Battery Power Tab Backlight ea a Yap 9 16 Advanced lt Battery Power gt External Warning Using backlight while on battery power will substantially reduce battery life O Tum off backlight if device is not used for 30 sec x Tum on backlight when a button is pressed or the screen is tapped Adjust power settings to conserve Ar e Gx he This tab allows you to tailor the EP10 backlight behaviour to best preserve battery life 144 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Certificates To define how long the backlight should stay on when the EP10
177. gt System tab along with the Imagers applet Presets There are two methods that can be used to configure an imager using the Imagers applet Use a predefined preset e Create a custom preset based on a predefined preset Important It is strongly recommended that a predefined preset is used whenever possible Each predefined preset contains a coherent group of settings that are known to work together in the intended environment In almost all situations at least one of the predefined presets results in a satisfactory outcome A preset is a group of exposure and image correction settings Each preset configures the imager for a spe cific purpose such as bar code decoding or image capture Presets also allow easier and faster configuration of the imager after power on or resume from suspend The predefined presets are generic and satisfy most user requirements A custom preset can be created for a specific user application such as include only specified bar codes read only a specified number of bar codes or for reading unusual media Every preset belongs to a preset type The following preset types are available e Imaging for photo capture e Imaging for bar code decoding Symbology selection At any time only one preset of each type can be designated as the user selected active preset Predefined Presets Predefined presets are built into the imaging software and cannot be changed The predefined presets allow you to
178. h as possible e The battery is a smart battery with built in intelligence Tapping on the Start gt Settings gt Power icon displays a dialog box that provides detailed information about the battery status of the battery installed in your EP10 ES Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 Storing Batteries e When the EPIO is switched off it goes into a low power suspend state but continues to draw a small amount of power from the battery This should not be an issue unless the EP10 is left in suspend state for more than a week for long term storage the battery should be removed 3 8 1 Storing Batteries Long term battery storage is not recommended If storage is necessary e Always try to use a first in first out approach to minimize storage time e Lithium lon batteries age much faster at elevated temperatures Store batteries at temperatures between O C and 20 C e Always charge batteries to at least 40 to 60 before storing them Batteries can be damaged by an over discharge phenomenon that occurs when an empty battery is stored for a long period of time such that the cell voltage drops below a lower limit e To minimize storage degradation recharge stored batteries to 40 to 60 every 4 or 6 months to prevent over discharge damage e A never used Lithium lon battery that has been stored for 3 years may have limited or no useful life remaining once put into service
179. haracters SYM and provides access to commonly used symbolic characters Press the SYM key to display the Symbol soft input panel SIP onscreen keyboard Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual EN Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 Modifier Keys Buttons O 2 Ti a 11 04 Macros lt Unicode Mapping gt Scanc a9 T a y e ti qa gt AS e TS O a Mia Y NU y er os SE Sd Rem R This onscreen keyboard displays the symbols mapped to each key Tap on the left and right arrows in the SIP onscreen keyboard to display all the symbols available to you O Note Modifier keys are remapped in the Control Panel and the Symbol SIP will automatically show and use the new mappings after the next reboot The onscreen keyboard corresponds to the specific keyboard on your EP10 either numeric or alpha 3 3 3 1 Activating Modifier Keys When a modifier key is pressed it is represented in the shift state indicator icon in the navigation bar at the top of the screen making it easier to determine whether or not a modifier key is active Figure 3 2 Shift State Indicator Icon G er Ta BE om 11 08 Text Shift state indicator icon Phone F Intemet Explorer Contacts R 3 3 3 2 Locking Modifier Keys O Note The locking behaviour of the modifier keys can be changed so that for example pressing a modifier key once will lock the key on Refer to OneShots on page 137 for details When a modif
180. he Bar Code Decoding Symbologies e Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation C 4 7 Configuring the Bar Code Decoding Symbologies To configure the bar code decoding camera presets e Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab e Tap on the Barcoding tab e Scroll down to view your bar code options PTS Imager Settiny Cr Er TiN oo Imaging lt Barcoding gt Default Low light Low power Glossy surface aa 7 74 Be Camera Presets Imager Y nd Barcode Presets PTS Imager Settiny ea ry Til Mi gm 9 04 Imaging lt Barcoding gt Filter My Default View Add Remove Activate Pectory Default Barcode Presets My Default Factory Default k C 4 8 Setting the Active Preset Edit Add Remove Activate R Read W Wirite 4 Active An active preset has an A to the right in Figure C 3 on page 8 the active preset is My Defaults To set an active preset Highlight the preset and tap on the Activate button C 4 9 Viewing a Preset To view the parameter settings in a preset e Highlight a preset and tap on the View button The associated preset window is displayed PTS Imager Settiny ea ee E Preset Factory Default E Options JAI 1D With Strong Recovery Enablec Code 128 E Ean 13 Pre defined Preset are read only Press space ar double click to change a setting in Customer preset Press lt Esc gt to c
181. heaeed decree eed cee ee eee AAA 184 51 261 Creating Bach secs d seo ra 185 31 26 22 Cetina Clone en disrare ri ee bee eo OS as da 186 211 20 Managing Profiles e adri es aa ARA ew oe ee ES 187 511204 Deleting a Profile cuicos a e la a ew ew Sw Ss 190 RA TW EEE 190 511 271 Advanced Tab Advanced CE Services Settings o cee ee ee ee 190 5 11 27 2 Advanced Interface and Network SettinQ9S 191 511 273 Advanced Services Settings ee ee 192 Sle Regio hy GOnel 4 44 2 5 46 60 0 one bee eee he ee ee ee ea ee aa ae ee A 193 Dac Wireless WAN eris cue ee 54 Ges Hee eS oe eee ee ERS Ewe Se ee ees 193 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual ES Chapter 5 Settings Overview of Software 5 1 Overview of Software 5 1 1 Psion Software Advantage Psion Software Advantage is a collection of applications and features designed to support system adminis trators and end users These tools enable enterprises to customize the product to meet their needs and to maximize productivity AGPS Psion Camera App Launch Keys PsionVu Battery Health Tweakit Bluetooth Manager Scanner Dr Debug Total Recall PartnerUp Manage Triggers WiFiConnect A R C Wi Fi Config Compass 5 1 2 Microsoft Software Windows Embedded Hand Held WEH 6 5 is a 32 bit real time Operating System The OS is compatible with line of business applications written for Windows Mobile 6 x that protects previous investmen
182. his option you can specify the type of WEP authentication Open or Shared the WEP security key length 64 bit or 128 bit and the key type ASCII or Hex WEP Key fields are also provided where you can specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an equivalent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP key on the access point 802 1X WPA amp WPA2 Enterprise CCKM WPA CCKM WPA2 These authentication modes use 802 1X with EAP authentication When 802 1X is selected EP10 uses WEP encryption with automatic as opposed to static keying For the others the user may choose TKIP AES or TKIP AES encryption WPA amp WPA2 Personal PSK Pre Shared Key When PSK is selected either WPA Personal PSK or WPA2 Personal PSK a shared key must be configured on both the access point and the hand held computer One of the following can be chosen from the Encryp tion drop down menu TKIP AES or TKIP AES Encryption The Encryption menu allows you to choose the type of encryption that will be used to protect transmitted data Choose an Encryption method valid for your network from the drop down menu Only the Encryption options that are compatible with the type of Auth Mode you ve chosen will be listed In fact in some cases this menu will not be available at all Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 127 Chapter 5 Settings Wi Fi Config Setting Up the 802 11a b g n Radio Wi Fi Config ao qe Y pd qu 5
183. hone on page 49 and Managing Phone Settings on page 53 To configure your Bluetooth settings go to Bluetooth Setup on page 105 If you have a GPS Global Positioning System module you can choose from a set of GPS profiles built into the modem and set up AGPS Assisted Global Positioning System See GPS Global Positioning System Settings on page 153 for details 2 8 Data Transfer By connecting the EP10 to a PC with a cable you can e View EP10 files from Windows Explorer e Drag and drop files between EP10 and the PC in the same way that you would between PC drives e Back up EPIO files to the PC restore them from the PC to the hand held again etc Data transfer options vary slightly depending on the type of operating system installed in your PC Various options exist depending on whether you are using Windows XP or earlier Windows Vista or Windows 7 For connection details refer to Data Transfer Between the EP10 and a PC on page 44 For details about con necting your EP10 to a PC using a docking station refer to Linking an EP10 to a PC on page 202 29 Phone Communication For a unit with a Cinterion PH8 for GSM UMTS networks worldwide or a Sierra Wireless MC5728V for the Sprint and Verizon CDMA networks in the U S radio modem installed and enabled phone capabilities are available For details about using the phone options refer to The Phone on page 49 and Managing Phone Settings on
184. ier key is locked on it will remain active until it is pressed again to unlock or turn it off To help you identify when a modifier key is locked on the key is represented in the shift state indicator icon with a black frame around it EN Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 The Power button Figure 3 3 Shift State Indicator Icon Locked Unlocked Modifier Key Shift state indicator icon m Unlocked modifier key indicator m Locked modifier key indicator Once a modifier key is unlocked or turned off it is no longer displayed in the shift state indicator icon 3 3 4 The Power button The Power button in the upper right corner of the keyboard switches the unit on and off 3 3 5 The Standard Keys The SHIFT Key The SHIFT key is used to display uppercase alpha characters O Note On numeric keyboards the SHIFT key is also used to access the Function keys printed in white typeface on numeric keys 1 through O SHIFT Key Alpha Keyboards The SHIFT key on the alpha keyboard represented by an up arrow is used to display uppercase alpha characters To produce an uppercase character Press the SHIFT key followed by the letter you want to appear in uppercase If you press the SHIFT key twice it is locked on essentially acting as a CAPS key displaying uppercase characters until SHIFT is pressed again to turn the CAPS function off SH
185. iguring the Bar Code Decoding SyMbOIOGIES cece cece cece cence een cence eeeneeneeeeeaes CA CAS Setting the Active Preset senor dd ide C1 CAS RSW APTOS sit C 11 C 410 Creating a CUSTOM Preset ccc cece cece ete eee e cence eee cence eee rr rr C 12 CAM Modiiyving a custom AAA CZ cAi Removing a Custom Preseb asas dea C 13 CAR Filter tab Manipulating Bar Code Dala rci sicarinaocini iaa C 13 CAII Modifyinga Bar Code SON C 14 CAl4 Transtation lab Configuring RUNES esvscosisarsss dire tri ta aia C 14 eai In cares ape E igh oor ates eoeamenies ES G l POVGRCCC TiD serrie italian ridad ai niwuenes C 16 C 4151 File Locations Tor Captured IMages ozinidatln td C 16 C4152 CONTOGUEING MOQ ES oi esmares cronica C 16 Co BO AA 0 ease aunties seareG A A C 17 C 5 1 imager Bar Code SViMDGlOOIES icsriccrassesirrere reia rr ri ri rias C 18 Coxe Color Camera Bal Code SymMboOl00 S sic cacvcswacuncwcedecesaaanccadudenwmonesdstobidewdesecandeseswnseds EAS Appendix D Specifications D1 EPIO Specifications Model No EP10 7515 cc2ss s2u0scscsasuoteecavaver seb erpii Ardre erini aa D 3 D 1 1 FING i ntiraseaaaicu rte cobro rev cursa D 3 Dil OM WAN coso sidecar id podes D 3 DIS Wireless COMMUNICATION n ccusc arciececacnssckuscseaisetensdecddigces rear D 4 DLA POWO NENA E eI evaruanrcatcosasnawcear awn PE por OPE ere D 4 DIS EXPANSION SI carro aorta ta D 4 DILO Bareode DICO trsiiaas oia in dot D 4 DA1 7 o A eines oeecsendossaeaeumen
186. inal capacity based on 0 5 C charge 0 5 C discharge rates to 3 0 V O 23 C D 10 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual NUMBERS 2D imager scanner 214 802 11a b g n radio specifications D 5 802 11ab g n radio D 5 A A R C WiFiConnect private network 92 About Bluetooth 111 About icon software version 143 AC adaptor safety instructions 198 accessories carrying case 197 carrying case plastic 198 desktop docking station 200 Ethernet cable 204 hand strap 197 quad docking station 203 RV1005 powered vehicle cradle 210 unpowered vehicle cradle 208 vehicle cradle unpowered 208 ActiveSync 45 80 setting up 80 AC wall adaptor PS1050 G1 199 Advanced tab auto backlight adjustment 144 AGPS Assisted Global Positioning System 154 aligning touchscreen 24 All Predefined preset C 4 alpha keys accessing 23 appending to bar codes characters 176 App Launch Keys 134 audio indicators beep conditions 26 volume adjustment 26 Auto Lock 141 AutoRestore 188 backlight Battery Power tab 143 intensity 24 Backlight auto setup 144 Backlight tab 143 backlight timeout values 101 backup profile creating Total Recall 185 backup Profile Total Recall AutoRestore 188 Clone to USB 189 Restore 188 restoring 187 Upload to A R C 189 viewing 187 backups managing profiles 187 Bad Scan Beep 176 Bar code Decoding symbology predefined presets C 3 bar code appending to 176 displaying type of bar code 176 good and bad
187. indows Mobile Device Center software If it is not already installed on your PC locate and download it from the following web site http go microsoft com fwlink Linkld 147001 3 18 PsionVu PsionVU allows the administrator to tailor how the EP10 operates and the options the user can access Note that the look of the Today screen will change from icons that are finger accessible to a list of items that is best accessed using a stylus AN Important For details about this application refer to PsionVu on page 90 3 19 The Camera A built in digital camera is available for the EP10 This option allows you snap still photographs or create short video clips The Pictures amp Videos applet is used to access and configure the camera For more details about the camera refer to Using the Camera on page 68 3 20 General Maintenance 3 20 1 Caring for the Touchscreen The top of the touchscreen is a thin flexible polyester plastic sheet with a conductive coating on the inside The polyester can be permanently damaged by harsh chemicals and is susceptible to abrasions and scratches Using sharp objects on the touchscreen can scratch or cut the plastic or crack the internal con ductive coating The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen e mustard ketchup e sodium hydroxide e concentrated caustic solutions Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 Clean
188. ing 31 touch pen using 31 transcriber handwritten note 74 Translations parameters bar codes 177 trigger mappings 157 Trigger On Sequence port replicator 181 Trigger Press Type Manage Triggers menu 158 troubleshooting RV40004 205 RV4000 LED 202 TweakIT 190 LI Unicode Mapping 138 Up_Down tab scrolling adjustments 136 Upload to A R C 189 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Index V vehicle cradle powered installing cables 212 RV1005 powered 210 unpowered 208 Verizon connection CDMA A 11 Version tab 143 vibrate setting for incoming calls 26 vibrate setting up for incoming calls 104 Vibrates Good and Bad Scan 176 video recorder using 71 Videos and Pictures 68 Vista Windows 45 Voice phone communication 13 voice mail setting up 57 volume speaker adjusting 26 VPN connection setting up 120 W wall adaptor AC PS1050 G1 199 warm reset 12 warnings 176 warranty 3 Wedge data Data Transmission 177 WiFiConnect A R C 92 Windows 7 44 Windows Mobile 6 5 navigating in 31 Windows Vista 44 wireless communication specifications D 4 Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN 193 A 3 Word Mobile data entry modes 89 Word See Pocket Word 88 WWAN Wireless Wide Area Network 193 A 3 CDMA radio modem connection A 8 A 11 GSM UMTS radio modem connection A 3 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual
189. ing an Existing Connection ns 121 5 8 7 4 Proxy Server Tab ee 122 5 8 8 Selecting a Network ee 123 5 8 9 Wi Fi Config Setting Up the 802 11a b g n Radio o o 124 5831 WIFI Config Status TaD oa lt 4 airoso didas ir ara 125 38 92 Wi HConia Contigure TaD gt s eses rincon 125 5893 COMODO CPAP epa aa a ra a teed A el 130 5 8 9 4 Wi Fi Config Advanced Todas coses arras AAA 131 5 8 10 Wireless Manage 133 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 59 Personal Folder sees rare RA ee ew RS 133 391 App LAUNCH Keys lt gt rta OE EMERY ee eee iw eee Bee ee EE Ee ee 134 Oe DOURO eera ee Fh bee pee eee a ee ee eee AAA ee we oe 135 S921 Program BURONS TaD s e esas ias oo tae ewe a Oe Ou bee ce Hee ows 136 5922 Up Down Control TaD s a n022 e ehade dS eemt twee debe aheeeedecexes 136 Ore ONE MON s rogando ra KH Oe AAA 137 Sc Macro NEYS sitos oro cadera aaa oca 137 5929 Unicode Mapping lt 1 lt lt 6tsecee cheba cece rasa n raketas psies terp 138 5920 SCancode REMADO lt s 4 264 64 oe de pete Sie AAA 140 IAAT AWOLORK TAD cn hacen aca e ad eed weeds wenwee banca A 141 OA PRONG cos Ge ewe heehee a Se hee ee ee ee eh ee ba eee bee eo wes 142 Sil OVSIOMIFOIUEl cenar k ke owe ee eee ee ra A 142 Sud ADO a os rasos Gao oe Se eee Se ORE Et eS ee EE EE Ss we 142 511 2 Backlight Screen and Keypad 2 eee 143 Bille Backliopt laD sesos eed ek beans ew eee eh
190. ing contacts calendar appointments and so on with a password protected online portal Refer to the Microsoft web site for details 4 14 Notes The Notes application is an electronic notepad you can use to jot down your ideas quickly You can enter text using the soft keyboard the EP10 keyboard or you can create a handwritten note on the screen by using the transcriber You can also record a message Notes can also be shared through e mail and synchronization with your PC Tap on Start gt Notes to launch this application GT gt Tiwi Gm 7 52 Ll All Folders w Name w A New Note Tap on the New Note softkey to display a blank note Notes ET gt Tili Gm 7 46 Soft Keyboard Transcriber icon Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Creating a Note using the Soft Keyboard 4 14 1 Creating a Note using the Soft Keyboard The soft keyboard icon is available by default It is a replica of a standard keyboard Use your stylus to type letters numbers symbols and so on en se Cu 8 05 ne p23 1 J2d3iatslel7jelejal l Tabfalwhetrtt ytulitotet iil cspfadsfdlidolhfidedid d Shift fo fede d nd md i VOR When you ve completed your note tap on OK Your note is automatically saved The file name is the first line of the note if you used the keyboard other wise it s named Notel Note2 and so on 4 14 2 Creating and Converting Handwritten Not
191. ing tab highlight the scancode you want to delete and tap on the Menu button and choose Remove e Tap on OK 5 9 2 7 Auto Lock Tab The Auto Lock tab allows you to choose the auto lock behaviour of the EP10 based on the options selected in this screen Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 141 Chapter 5 Settings Phone ERE A om 4 21 a an Auto Lock gt Progr lx Turn off screen while in a phone call x Turn off device when facedown x Lock when screen is coveren C Lock when device is turned on Unlack key Sequelnce SYM FN Bksp u e Tap in the checkbox next to the behaviours during which you want the Auto Lock applet to take effect If you enable Lock when device is turned on turn your unit off and then back on again the keyboard and screen will be locked A lock icon is displayed in the navigation bar at the top of the screen when the unit is locked e To unlock the unit you will need to type the Unlock key sequence you ve selected from the Unlock key sequence drop down menu for example press SYM then FN and finally Bksp 5 10 Phone e Tap on Start gt Settings gt Personal gt Phone to display options to help you tailor the EP10 phone features AN Important The phone features are described under The Phone on page 49 5 11 System Folder e Tap on Start gt Settings gt System icon to display a group of system apps System O m 5 58 System oa P gt Tal A eax 6 00 Enry pho
192. ing the EP10 e benzyl alcohol e concentrated acids If the touchscreen is used in harsh environments consider applying a disposable screen protector model number RV6105 These covers reduce the clarity of the display slightly but will dramatically extend the useful life of the touchscreen When they become scratched and abraded they are easily removed and replaced Do not to expose the touchscreen to direct sunlight for prolonged periods of time If this is unavoidable use a UV screen protector to extend the life of the screen 3 20 2 Cleaning the EP10 AN Important Do not immerse the EP10 in water Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean e Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the EP10 unit e Avoid abrasive cleaners solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning The plastic case is susceptible to harsh chemicals The plastic is partially soluble in oils mineral spirits and gasoline The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions e To clean ink marks from the keypad or touchscreen use isopropyl alcohol e Exposure to aircraft de icing fluids can degrade the plastics on the EP10 If the EP10 is used near air craft de icing environments regular rinsing with water is recommended 46 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual PROGRAMS Al Me PHONE Keypad 26 eee ee BSA Re EER Eee EE be EA AA 50 4 31 1 Sending amp Ending Phone Calls using the Phone Keypad
193. into the Univer sal AC power supply snapping it into place These two pieces coupled together are referred to as an AC wall adaptor e Insert the DC power plug into the DC IN port at the base of the EP10 located between the tether and LIF ports e Plug the pronged end into an AC outlet 6 5 Desktop Docking Station Model No RV4000 AN Important The RV4000 desktop docking station is shipped with its own user manual It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates O Note To preserve battery integrity the desktop docking station will proceed with a charge only when the battery temperature falls between O C and 40 C 32 F to 104 F The RV4000 desktop docking station is a desktop model designed to e Fast charge the internal battery e Fast charge the spare battery pack see Figure 6 4 on page 201 e Supply micro USB connection The RV4000 storage temperature is 30 C to 60 C 22 F to 140 F Operating temperature and humid ity are 5 95 non condensing and O C to 40 C 329 F to 104 F The desktop docking station provides sufficient power to concurrently support all the above functions The RV4000 uses careful charge algorithms designed to maximize battery life while ensuring the shortest pos sible charge time The charger supports proprietary Psion Smart Batteries and handles a range of voltages and charge algorithms See The Battery on page 17 for battery ca
194. ion for example to send and receive e mail browse the Internet with Internet Explorer and so on 5 8 4 Connections Connecting to the Internet To activate a connection make certain that any necessary equipment such as a radio is installed in your EP10 You ll need the following information from your ISP to make an Internet connection ISP server phone number user name and password You ll need to tap on Start gt Settings and then tap on the Connections icon to display the connections applets y Connectors Bearn Bluetooth Doraln Enroll tp Wineess Manager GEOR 1 Inthe Connections screen tap on the Connections icon O Note In the Connections window the Tasks tab is used to create new connections and manage existing ones The Advanced tab allows you to choose a network If you need to change these settings con tact your ISP or network administrator before making changes 2 Under ISP WWAN GPRS tap on Add a new modem connection na Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Modem Connection Setup 3 Inthe Select a modem drop down menu choose a modem connection If you haven t already created a modem connection refer to Modem Connection Setup on page 115 4 To connect to the Internet launch the program you want to use For example launch Internet Explorer on your EP10 to browse the Internet Your EP10 automatically connects ap Note To set up a network
195. ion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 The Today Screen Default Options Clock amp Alarms o gt Y Gt 12 52 Alarm Settings 5 00 AM lt Description gt s Mr wrrFs Sound Alarm 01 P Repeat and Vibrate ESL E e To set the time highlight the hours and then the minutes in the clock and use the arrow keys to increase or decrease the numbers or type the hours and minutes directly from the keyboard or soft keyboard Type a description in the Description field Tap on the day on which you want the alarm to go off Sunday through Saturday Next choose the Sound you can tap on the Play button to experiment with the sounds You can also choose No Sound In the drop down menu below the Play button you can choose how the alarm will behave whether or not it will repeat and so on Tap on OK to save your changes Setting the Time and Date To set the time on the EP10 Tap on the Time tab at the top of the screen Clock amp Alarms ac gv Ty i Gm 1 07 Time Zone 6 MT 8 Pacific US Y Date 5 19 2010 Y 07 29 AM a Y Sync to current time zone Choose the appropriate Time Zone set the Date and the current Time 3 10 2 6 Text Messages Highlighting Text in the Today screen lets you know if you have any new text messages Tapping the stylus on this option displays the Text Messages screen 34 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter
196. is docked in a charger Keep in mind that the application running on the EP10 can dictate how the application LED operates Review the documentation provided with your application to determine LED behaviour Table 3 1 Function of EP10 LEDs Green Charge LED Charge indicator See the table below for descriptions of Charge LED left most LED behaviour Yellow Application LED centre Application LED The behaviour of this LED is application dependent LED Blue Radio Power LED Radio power indicator right most LED If the EP10 is attached to an external power supply the charge LED the left most LED reflects the battery charge status Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual ES Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 Audio Indicators Table 32 EP10 Charge LED Behaviour Charging Status LED Colour LED Flash Rate Duty Cycle No external power detected Not applicable Not applicable Battery charge complete GREEN Solid ON Battery charging normally GREEN Regular Battery not charging because battery YELLOW Normal Regular temperature is outside the allowable range O C to 409 C 32 to 104 F Battery charge failure Unable to read RED Solid ON Continuous battery or non Psion battery O Note When the Power button is pressed the yellow LED will flash to let you know that the hand held is powered up At this point you can go ahead and release the Power button 3 6 Audio Indicators The audio speaker p
197. is powered on and off e Off the GPS module is left off always On the GPS module is powered on at all times regardless of the power state of the EP10 Suspend If Enable Smart Power Mode is enabled the GPS module is powered on but if the EP10 enters suspend mode the GPS module switches to low power mode Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 153 Chapter 5 Settings GPS Global Positioning System Settings AGPS Assisted Global Positioning System Tab GPS Settings Cl ge Fy E Gm 11 16 AET gt Info Expiry Date i ES PS g Gz Cee O Ges Oi To determine your location a GPS module receives data from three or more GPS satellites in fixed orbit around the Earth The GPS module triangulates your location based on the time it takes for signals to get to and from the satellites This works well in fairly clear areas outdoors for example However if you re at tempting to triangulate your location in city centres where signals bounce off tall concrete buildings or from within a building the GPS module will have greater difficulty calculating a fix AGPS reduces Time To First Fix TTFF and increases the likelihood of finding and keeping a fix in poor cov erage areas such as indoor sites AGPS downloads satellite ephemeris orbital data to the EP10 periodically through WiFi or WWAN The downloaded data is used by the GPS module to speed the process of getting a fix Update Click on the Update button
198. is tapped Setting the Backlight Intensity amp Duration To set the backlight intensity and the duration of time that the backlight will remain on you ll need to choose the Backlight icon e Tap on Start gt Settings and then tap on System gt Backlight icon Refer to Backlight Screen and Keypad on page 143 for details Aligning Calibrating the Touchscreen If your touchscreen has never been aligned calibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item follow the steps below e Tap on Start gt Settings gt System Tap on the Screen icon The General tab is displayed in which you can correct alignment and choose screen orientation see Screen Orientation on page 24 for details caidas ao g Ty e Gu 7 08 Text Size lt General gt ClearType ff Orientation C Portrait O Landscape right handed Landscape left handed Align Screen Align the screen if it is not responding accurately to stylus tape e Tap on the Align Screen button and follow the directions on the screen to align calibrate the screen Note This window provides two additional tabs ClearType and Text Size Tapping on the ClearType tab allows you to enable the ClearType option to smooth screen font appearance The Text Size tab allows you to increase or decrease the size of the font displayed on the screen Screen Orientation In addition to screen calibration the Screen i
199. it the following Microsoft internet site http go microsoft com fwlink Linkld 147001 4 18 Internet Sharing This option allows you to use your EP10 to connect your PC to the Internet Before you can use Internet Sharing you must make certain that you have established a data connection on your EP10 4 18 1 Creating an Internet Connection Follow the steps in this section only if you have not already setup an Internet connection You ll need the following information before you begin From your cellular service provider data connectivity information access point name and PAP CHAP secu rity settings EN Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Using Internet Sharing From your Internet service provider ISP or wireless service provider access point name and password and any additional security information For a GPRS 1xRTT or dialup connection e Tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections Tap on the Connections icon e Under My Work Network tap Add a new modem connection e Type a name for the connection and choose Cellular Line GPRS or for 1XRTT connections choose Cellular Line Tap on Next e Type the phone number or access point name provided by your service provider and tap Next e Type the credentials supplied by your service provider and tap Finish 4 18 2 Using Internet Sharing O Note Make certain that your data connection is running and that you can access the Internet from the EP1
200. ithout Ending a Session ooocoococcoccocnocnoccncnocnnrnnr non rro 91 ALG ENGUMO Toe O herrer O o A EENE 91 SINTOMAS Ad 91 WECOME AR esursrosarsco perrera site 92 Chapter 5 Settings al 52 e 5 4 5 5 5 6 OVOP VIEW Or SO UIWO Bronson dan ra 97 5 11 Psion Software Advantage sesssessssssecsrscceseseccssssecsssccesoccereesscersccerseeeeseesse 9T 5 1 2 MICPOSOA ORE Wall Os AEE EEEE A EEEE Ea 97 SOUS sas ice cd duattenbaeuenaeeneaas uaa E OEE EEE EE E e PR EEE DE EEEE E T a EAEG 97 TN A saan EE E E A E EA iat E saul eden anaes coauaemiian jeunes 98 E week onda uate cede da e o O O Re Oo O scr bute tue E ce E EE E E 98 FAO MSs oo ines dete narod ae arenas aio eee data pia pales anta 98 39 Appearances Tab Changing the Theme Background ssssssressseesseessecsssressreeseeessees 99 55 2 Beaming a Theme to Another Device 2 i cccccnccdsasctecesnassecececucussvanscdweednswesdcwsesceuessavus 99 S025 ems Tab CUsStomizina the Today SOEN erceseririrers donari EErEE EE EE iina nine rer Reki 100 POWT a rra ove eb bed AE E EER A E E ENA 100 5 61 o E E eh a EAI EEA EA T aes en 101 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Table of Contents 362 Advanced Dread toda tae torne 101 30 3 B ttery Deris ASS ET ARE EEE E E 102 5 6 4 Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup ssscssscsesereceresessseseerereesessssereee 102 aa AAA EA E O EA 103 Sl SOUnd A NO ICA LO S sessions rs a ess 104 5 71 e O CEE a o P
201. ive supplicant to configure the radio e Tap on the Advanced tab and tap on the checkbox to the left of Use Windows to configure my wireless settings to add a check mark and activate this option Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 131 Chapter 5 Settings Wi Fi Config Setting Up the 802 11a b g n Radio Wi Fi Config ein Ti s mm 8 21 Use Windows ta configure my wireless settings Network Type lin Mode Tap here to add a check mark t RICE to activate Windows radio Power Save Mode Roaming AF Density configuration Medium A device reset may be required to apply changes made Saws Advanced 5 8 9 4 2 Network Type This option allows you to select the full set or a sub set of the IEEE 802 11 wireless network protocols You can choose from the following b only forces the radio to operate in the 2 4GHz band only The hand held will only associate with an Access Point AP that supports the DSSS data rates 1 2 5 5 amp 11 Mbps This mode has the lowest data rate but yields the longest range b g only forces the radio to operate in the 2 4 GHz band only The EP10 will only associate with an AP that supports the DSSS data rates 1 2 5 5 amp 11 Mbps and OFDM data rates 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 54Mbps This mode offers the same range as b only mode but with higher data rate of 54 Mbps when possible a only forces the radio to operate in the 5 GHz band only The hand held will only associate wi
202. ke a con nection The information in this section is for advanced setup purposes Manual configuration should only be necessary if One or more parameters in the database are incorrect or a new operator is not yet in the database The database should be corrected for subsequent software releases An operator has assigned individual GPRS user names and passwords A very large site has its own Access Point Name APN Such connections must be configured manually A customer has subscribed for a static IP address By definition this must be configured manually Manually Adding a New Modem Connection Tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections folder icon Tap on the Connections icon Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual A 5 Appendix A Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Advanced GSM GPRS Data Configuration Connections IT E Advanced lt Tasks gt Advanced Choose Add a new modem connection In most cases you should choose Add a new modem connection from ISP WWAN GPRS However if you need to use a Proxy server choose this option from My Work Network Connections IT E Make New Connection Enter a name for the connection Select a modem Cellular Line he ay Next e Enter a connection name optional e Choose Cellular Line GPRS from the Modem drop down menu e Tap on Next Connections My Connection Access point name NEO k Newt e Type the Acc
203. klight oaaae 23 aF TOP e ramas aros nea eee eee hee eee awe aa a 24 3 4 1 Setting the Backlight Intensity amp Duration 24 3 4 2 Aligning Calibrating the Touchscreen 0 a 24 34 3 Screen Orientation cagaron ee eee Oe oe ESSERE SE AAA 24 34A LOCKING The TOUCASCISe 2 440 de6 8 4630862 bo daa 25 Soe EPICA lt bes co cee eae ee Pe eee eee eee eh ee eR ee eee eee eee es 25 Oo LEDS EE E E ee ee A AA pte eee 25 AA lo 5 1 e o IE 26 361 Vibration SEINNGS s lt 4 2 lt 6202 raras a a 26 3 6 2 Adjusting Speaker Volume ee 26 37 inserting the microsD and SIM Card 6 4464 64084 64 Be ADE OSHS DEDEDE A OS 26 Si INsertng Me Cards doce 2h a 8 cae eee aaa AAA 26 3 8 Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run TiMe eee 28 S041 SOMI DGMeWles ot ea oie Be ee oe ee eee ee ee ee ie oe Oe ee he AA 29 3 9 Navigating in Windows Embedded 6 5 and Applications aooaa eee 31 3 91 Navigating using the Touchscreen and Stylus 1 31 310 The Today Screen 4 6 245 eas bd ww hee ee bebe eee ESO a we eee ea a 3 3101 Customizing the Today Screen ee 3i 310 2 The Today Screen Default Options 2 ee ee 32 OE PIU nn a cr a a er re ee a ae ee ee er rr 32 EN EA MUN errre ase oe ek ee eo ee ee eee lee oe ee eee ete ee Sree ee 32 SIOZ PHONG eo tue hee ara nese seen eae eee hen eee ae we oe eae oes 32 310 2 4 Voicemail asias da cir Bee as ew
204. l 3 10 4 2 Deleting Appointments e Tap and hold the stylus on the appointment you want to delete Tap on Delete Appointment in the pop up menu 3 10 5 Favorites Tapping on the Favorites option in the Today screen connects you to internet favourites If you tap and drag your stylus on this option you can choose Add Remove to edit your list of favourites 3 11 Using the Navigation Bar and Hotkeys The navigation bar along the top of the Today screen provides access to icons or hotkeys that when tapped provide shortcuts to associated apps an Pu Yl 5 m 4 04 Navigation bar m Tap anywhere in the navigation bar to display the hotkeys Hotkeys Tap and drag the stylus to the left to display additional hotkeys l a ail Um Sg e Te Ei lt Tap on a hotkey to display Y the associated app 5 44 Clock amp Alarms ao 2 Yj o Gat 6 16 text ee Ge Time Zone A GMT 8 Pacific US u Date 4 2011 y Time 6 16 24 AM a Y x Sync to current time zone x Notify me when time is updated E Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 The Softkey Bar 3 12 The Softkey Bar The EP10 is equipped with a softkey bar at the bottom of the screen It displays softkeys that allow you to access menus and commands Note that the softkeys change to reflect the program with which you are working It also displays the soft keyboard icon File Zoom Toos Helps
205. l 06 2011 e Tap on the drop down menu to choose your language and region Once you ve selected a language and region you may need to adjust the way numbers currency the time and the date appear in your EP10 e Tap on the tab associated with each of the items and choose how each item should be displayed on your EP10 5 11 20 Remove Programs e Tap on Start gt Settings Tap on the System icon followed by the Remove Program icon x Remove Programs Remove Program O Y yl 4 lt qu 11 23 Remove Programs in storage memory Remove Tota storage memory available B73976K Tapping on the Remove Programs icon displays a screen listing the programs that can be removed from your unit e Jo remove a program highlight it and then tap on the Remove button 5 11 21 Scanner Settings The Scanners icon in the Settings menu provides access to dialog boxes in which you can tailor imager options Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Scanner Settings Note For details about setting up your imager refer to Appendix C Imagers Applet Tap on Start gt Settings and then tap on the System followed by the Scanners icon Scanner Sethngs ea a Til on mu 7 30 Ports Options gt Transla bans Internal scanner Mon configurable Double Click Display E Data handling To change a setting press space or double click 5 11 21 1 Options Tab The Options tab allows you to
206. l be allowed Good and Bad Scan Vibrates These parameters determine whether or not the EP10 will vibrate rather than beep when a good success ful scan or a bad unsuccessful scan is performed Set these parameters to either on to enable the beeper or off to disable it You can further refine how you want the vibrations to behave specifying the following Number of Vibrates Duration of Vibrate in milliseconds and Pause between Vibrates in milliseconds Soft Scan Timeout This parameter is used by the SDK Scan function soft scan starting a scan session via the SDK function instead of a physical user trigger press The value assigned to this parameter determines the soft scan timeout from 1 to 10 sec default is 3 sec Scan Log File If this parameter is enabled the input bar code and the modified translated output bar code are logged in the file Flash Disk ScanLog txt Keep in mind that if the Scan Log File is enabled there is a slight per formance effect when performing multiple scans since the log file is written to persistent storage 5 11 21 1 3 Data Handling This option provides two data handling options Codepage and Data Transmission Codepage Tapping on this option displays a window in which you can define the code page your EP10 will use to display data Default Local ASCII or SO 8859 1 Latin 1 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Scanner Settings 5 11 21 2
207. l prefix or suffix Verify barcode size verifies the bar code size This rule should generally be assigned first before cre ating subsequent rules Search and replace replaces all instances of the match string Note that this rule cannot fail AN Important Keep in mind that the effects of previously applied rules must be taken into account when creating subseguent rules For example if the bar code size is important it should be checked before any rules that might change the size are applied The information about the status of each case rule is displayed in the scan log file See Scan Log File on page 176 when enabled This is useful if a case fails and you are trying to determine why a rule is failing 5 11 21 3 Ports Tab Port Replicator Port A COM5 Port B COM6 Port C COM7 Scanner Settings gt Ti aff m 5 57 Transla bans Ports Opbone Port Replicator Port A COMB Port Replicator Port B COM6 Port Replicator Port COM7 To change a setting press space or double click Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 179 Chapter 5 Settings Scanner Settings Enabled This parameter must be set to on in order for EP10 to recognize the device connected to the Port Replicator 9 pin COM5 Power COM6 only Pin 9 on EP10 COM6G is reserved for 5V power out and is defaulted to OFF This parameter must be set to on to enable power to a Snap Module or Vehicle cradle Baud Dou
208. launch the application you chose press the application key you assigned Buttons A number of apps are included under this icon e Tap on the Start gt Settings gt Personal gt Buttons icon to display the apps Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 135 Chapter 5 Settings Buttons Buttons Cr gt Ti d Gm 4 49 Auta L lt Program Buttons gt Lp Do 2 Assign a program 5 9 2 1 Program Buttons Tab In the Program Buttons tab you can customize the program hardware buttons to open your most used programs Under Select a button tap on the button to which you want to assign a program Choose a program from the Assign drop down menu 5 9 2 2 Up Down Control Tab Cg Yal Gam 7 16 Progr Up Down Control gt Seaue Customize the way your Up Down control repeats Delay before first repeat Repeat rate Tap on Start gt Settings gt Personal gt Buttons icon to display this screen Scroll to the Up Down Control tab Sliding the Delay before first repeat bar to the left decreases the delay between key repeats while sliding the bar to the right increases the repeat delay time Sliding the Repeat rate bar to the left slows the rate at which an Up Down button repeats when pressed Sliding the bar to the right increases the key repeat rate 136 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Buttons 5 9 2 3 OneShots One Shot Lock OneShot Lock j neShot Lock i
209. le document This loss also occurs when you open a doc file and change it on the EP10 AN Important To avoid problems you can work on copies of doc files In addition keep in mind that you can use the Terminal Services Client program to log onto a desktop PC that is also running Terminal Services and then you can use any program on your PC including Microsoft Word rather than Word Mobile Refer to Remote Desktop Mobile on page 90 4 22 4 PowerPoint Mobile PowerPoint Mobile works just like the desktop version that may be installed on your PC To launch this program on your EP10 e Tap on Start gt Office Mobile gt PowerPoint Mobile 4 22 5 SharePoint Mobile SharePoint Mobile allows you to open edit and save documents that are on a SharePoint site a web site that lets you and others share and collaborate on documents projects schedules and so on e Tap on Start gt Office Mobile gt SharePoint Mobile e Tap on the Address softkey to highlight the web address field Type the SharePoint address you want to access e Tap on Go to access documents in the SharePoint site you specified Note To access a SharePoint site using SharePoint Workspace Mobile from inside your organiza tion you need to set up a Wi Fi connection that lets you access a SharePoint site on your company s network 4 23 Modem Link Modem link allows you to use the GPRS connectivity on your phone to connect your laptop or PC to the Internet Psion EP
210. lete a connection press and hold the stylus on the connection you want to delete Choose Delete from the pop up menu Note You can also create a new connection by tapping on the New button To make changes to the set tings for this connection tap on Edit Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual ar Chapter 5 Settings Network Cards Changing a Connection Setting Name Your EP10 has two sets of connection settings My ISP and My Work Network If you want to change one or both of these options to something more familiar to you follow these steps Tap on Start gt Settings Tap on the Connections folder icon followed by the Connections icon Under My Work Network or My ISP tap on Manage existing connections e Tap on the General tab ISP WWAN GPR ao e Yil 3 23 Proxy Set lt General gt Modem Enter a name for these settings Type the name you prefer in the field below Enter a name for these settings Tap on OK 5 8 7 4 Proxy Server Tab O Note If you are connected to your ISP or private network during synchronization the EP10 will download the appropriate settings during synchronization from your PC If these settings are not on your PC or if they need to be changed you ll need to set up the proxy server connection manually To set up the proxy server connection manually you ll need the following information proxy server name server type port type of Socks protocol used and the user name and password
211. li Gm 6 40 Mation M Settings gt Status Error Level Choose an Error Level from the drop down menu To change the location where debug information will be stored tap on the button to the right of the Log Folder option 5 11 8 Encryption This option allows you to encrypt the data on your storage card Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab gt Encryption icon 150 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Error Reporting 5 11 9 5 11 10 Encryption Encryption Cr gt pp dz aa 10 56 Encryption a Enceryor files when placed on a storage card Encrypted files can be read only by this device WARNING Encrypted files cannot be recovered after hard reset or clearing storage To help prevent data loss back up data from storage cards to another location Error Reporting Error Reporting allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts e Tap on Start gt Settings Tap on the System tab followed by the Error Reporting icon Eror Reporting Error Reporting f am 11 00 Error Reporting To help Microsoft improve the products you use your phone can automatically collect information on software operation for reporting im the event of a serious error Reports may contain a snapshot of your phone memory which may include your name contents of text messages or e mail you were viewing or data that you recently submitted to a website Thi
212. lified electrician if you are uncertain of your receptacle grounding AN Important If you choose to wall mount the charger detailed installation instructions are included in the EP10 RV4004 Charger Quad Dock Quick Start Guide PN 8000232 included with the quad docking station Be sure to locate the charger in an area where there is no risk of injury to persons walking in the vicinity 6 6 3 3 Connecting to the Ethernet Network Figure 6 6 RV4004 Quad Docking Station Rear View DC socket Ethernet socket Network Access The EP10 automatically detects insertion into the docking station and loads the appropriate drivers to com municate with the network Network Addressing The host application uses standard TCP IP protocol to name locate and communicate with a specific EP10 on the network If a link is established between an EP10 and a host the application on the host and on the EP10 must have a recovery mechanism in the event that the EP10 is removed from the dock interrupting the link 6 6 4 Cleaning the RV4004 MN Important Do not immerse the unit in water Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean e Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the RV4004 Avoid abrasive cleaners solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning The plastic case is susceptible to harsh chemicals The plastic is partially soluble in oils mineral spirits and gasoline The plastic slowly decomp
213. look e mail messages are synchronized as part of the general synchronization process The next time you synchronize with ActiveSync the e mail in Outlook on your PC will be transferred to the Messaging program on your EP10 4 5 2 1 Changing Synchronization Settings e In ActiveSync on your PC double tap the E mail item in the Sync Options tab E mail Synchronization Settings 2 E mail Synchronization Synchronize the e mail messages on your Pocket PC with Microsoft Exchange Download the past Message format Download size limit Include file attachments Only if smaller than Select Folders _Cace_ Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual IN Chapter 4 Programs Synchronizing E mail with Outlook PC with Windows Vista or Windows 7 e Tap on the Select Folder button E mail Synchronization Settings Select E mail Folders Check the boxes for the e mail folders you would like to be included when synchronizing Folders to synchronize aa O Jan_05 Sent i O46 Junk E mail 2 Sent Items H OA Syne Issues a Cese e Adda check mark next to the folders in this screen that you want to synchronize with your EP10 and tap on OK The E mail Synchronization screen is displayed again e If you want to accept file attachments add a check mark next to Include file attachments To limit the size tap on Only if smaller than and specify a size in the KB box e Tap on OK 4 5 3 Synchronizing
214. m throughput To minimize the impact on the backbone 802 1lg network Psion recommends using Bluetooth peripherals that have low transac tion rates Such as printers and scanners Refer to Bluetooth Setup on page 105 for information about setting up your Bluetooth devices for com munication In addition review the manual shipped with your Bluetooth device to determine the method used to pair with the EP10 host Digital Camera Important The EP10 is equipped with a digital camera that can take still pictures or short video clips Refer to Section 4 10 on page 68 for details about using the camera The Pictures amp Videos applet allows the operator to activate the camera for still shots or video clips It also provides a number of tools to crop photos adjust picture contrast and brightness zoom in and out of photos and save your adjustments Important The Pictures amp Videos program can only display bmp or jpg formats Photos in other formats will need to be converted on your PC before they can be transferred to the EP10 hand held Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 215 APPENDIX WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK WWAN A1 Wireless WAN erario aida aaa a aS ARA A 3 A2 Navidation Bar leon sa sas e464 mu bod bo eA CR RHEE we ERS Eee DER KEE SS A 3 A 3 Establishing a Packet Data Connection ie ns ricerca dada A 3 A31 DIsconmecting from a NCWWOIK lt 26 4 4 lt 4 88648464066 64 sario EE AS A 5 A 3 2 Advan
215. mera Presets Imager Glossy surface View Add Barcode Presets My Default Factory Default Gr This window lists all the presets both predefined and the custom Presets are identified as follows e Predefined presets are marked as read only For a description review Predefined Presets on page C 3 e Custom presets are marked as read and write e One preset either predefined or custom is marked as active O Note The top portion of the window displays the bar code decoding camera presets The top part of the window displays the bar code decoding camera presets C 4 1 Selecting a Camera One camera must be selected for configuration To select a camera e Tap on the Camera Presets drop down menu to view the camera options e Choose a camera either Imager the imager located at the top of the unit or Color Camera the camera located at back of the EP10 AN Important Currently only the Imager can be used to read bar codes The Colour Camera is limited to taking photos C 4 2 Setting the Active Preset An active preset has anA to the right in Figure C 3 on page page 8 the active preset is Defaults To set an active preset e Highlight the preset and tap on the Activate button C 4 3 Viewing a Preset To view the parameter settings in a preset e Highlight a preset and tap on the View button Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix C Imagers Applet Creating a Cu
216. mf uu 11 46 Services lt Network gt Data Current network ROGERS Find Hotwork Automatic 1 Salect t Network selection Preferred networks Seat Networks By default the radio modem automatically chooses from the available and allowed networks allowed net works are the home network and all other networks with which the home network has a roaming agree ment You may find there are some situations in which you want to override this default behaviour For example you might want to disable roaming if you find yourself in a border area where the home network is not available but a foreign roaming partner is available Abroad you may find that an available network does not have GPRS roaming agreements In this case you ll need to manually select the network which you know supports GPRS roaming Automatic network selection is enabled by default You can also choose a network manually from the drop down menu O Note Your home network operator will need to let you know which other networks have roaming agreements Even when a network is listed with an Available status it does not necessarily follow that it can be used or that the roaming agreement covers GPRS A 4 Establishing a CDMA Radio Modem Connection A 4 1 Sprint Connection e Tap on the a Navigation bar at the top of the screen to display the hotkeys Tap on the Phone Set tings hotkey Phone Settings hotkey In the Phone Settings bubble tap on Set
217. mission 177 PC connecting EP10 to 202 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual am Index PDF and linear Predefined preset C 4 Personal apps 133 App Launch Keys 134 PH8 GSM GPRS EDGE radio specifications D 7 phone Datatab 57 keypad 50 keypad tab 55 Network phone setting up 57 phone keys on the EP10 keyboard 53 PIN changing 55 ring tone adjustments 55 security tab 55 Services setting up 56 settings managing 53 soundtab 54 using Windows Mobile 6 5 Professional 49 Voice Mail setting up 57 Phone PsionVU limiting access 168 Phone communication 13 phone network setting up 57 Pictures deleting 70 editing 70 Opening 70 slide show creating 71 Pictures and Videos 68 pinouts B 1 C 1 Pocket Word 88 port pinouts B 1 C 1 portrait orientation 24 Port Replicator Port A COM5 179 Port Replicator Port B COM6 179 Port Replicator Port C COM7 179 Port Replicator settings COM5 and COM6 Baud 180 Data Bits 180 Parity 180 Port B COM6 Power 180 Stop Bits 187 Trigger On Sequence 187 ports docking port B 3 Ports tab 179 Postal Predefined preset C 4 Power Advanced tab backlight timeout 101 Battery capacity tab 107 Battery Details tab 102 Battery Health tab 103 Suspend Threshold tab 102 to Port B COM6 180 power management specifications D 4 Predefined preset C 3 All C 4 Default C 3 C 4 Glossy surface C 4 Linear C 4 Linear and PDF C 4 Low light C 4 Low light near C 5 Low power C 4 Matrix C 4
218. mounting location refer to the assembly instructions that are packaged with the pedestal AN Important Before Psion releases a product our engineering team exposes that product to vibration tests to ensure the EP10 will remain secure during normal use But as a low cost mount the cradle will not defend against shock if the vehicle undergoes a front or rear impact Take care to mount the cradle in an upright position in case of accidents If you choose to use a third party company produced cradle Psion cannot take responsibility for the effects of that third party product when it causes failure to our device 6 11 2 Cable Arrangement Before installing cables between the cradle and other devices review the following Ensure that drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring Protect cable runs from pinching overheating and physical damage Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal Use plastic straps and tie downs to secure cables and connectors in their desired location away from areas where they may get snagged or pulled Keep cables away from heat sources grease battery acid and other potential hazards Keep cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may damage the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle 6 11 3 Electrical Reguirements There are two options to power your EP10 once it is inserted in the Powered Vehicle Cradle the Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor model no R
219. n L 19 Certificates 4 a System Co gt Ty d om 6 01 SA A Imagers Fe a Enduight e ir Y E E amp Da 2 5 Regional Settings Scammers Compass a a Feedback aa x Y a a a Manage Triggers ig Hernory Remove Programs aTa P E Cr Debug queen Bro Reporting i 7 g A Aie 7 Hierophone E Felony Seen Rotation p a En pon IL i 7 Y eS pe FA PortinerUp iin Task Manager TreakIT Settings E ES Total Recall 5 11 1 About Tapping on Start gt Settings gt System tab and then the About icon displays a grouping of tabs that provide device information KA Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Backlight Screen and Keypad E gt Ti Y qm 6 07 Copyrights Version gt Device ID About Windows Embedded Handheld 6 5 Professional CE Os 5 2 22058 Build 22058 5 3 12 5 2009 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved This computer program is protected by U5 and intemabanal capynght laws Processor Cortex A amp AM3703 Memory 193 75 MB Expansion slet Mot in use Version Tab This tab outlines the Windows Embedded 6 5 Professional version processor information memory size and a description of the expansion card if one is in use Device ID Tab This tab provides fields in which you can assign a Device name and Description optional for the EP10 This name is used by the EP10 to identify itself to other devices Keep in mind that this must be a u
220. n allows you to determine the type of sound that keypad keys emit as you press them You can also turn off keypad sounds Phone Security Tab Phone en Ti m 5 28 Sounds lt Security gt Services Tap in the checkbox add a check mark to enable PIN Security Change PIN Change PIH 2 This option allows you to enable or change a PIN Personal Identification Number so that your phone func tion is protected from unauthorized use Your SIM card manufacturer provides the default P N which you can change in this field Changing a PIN e Tap on the Change PIN button and use the phone keypad to enter your existing SIM card PIN Tap on the Enter button in the phone keypad Er Ti Gm 5 31 Enter old PIN Clear 7 i Cancal Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual ES Chapter 4 Programs Managing Phone Settings A Important If you enter an incorrect PIN a message is displayed letting you know that you ll need to reenter the correct value You have a limited number of chances to enter the correct PIN The number varies for different services If you exceed this number the SIM will be disabled automati cally You will be asked to enter a PUK Personal Unlocking Key In some cases the PUK is printed somewhere on your SIM package If this is not the case you will need to call customer support Once you ve entered the correct PIN anew screen appears asking that you enter your new PIN E
221. n the EPIOandaPC ee eee 44 3171 Uploading Data in a Docking Station ee ee 45 31 2 Microsoft ActiveSync s ccc cde careers sanador ara 45 3 17 3 Windows Mobile Device CenterQ ee 45 alo PIU eere kat arado rra aa eeraa Oe ew oo eee ee 45 alo Tie Canela s uvas Ba ee eo ee oe ee a a A AR eo 45 3 20 General Maintenance 2 ee ee 45 3 20 1 Caring for the Touchscreen e cos ese bu 6 Sed SDE ARANA A5 3 20 2 CIeamina me EPTO y gt ei wt e a da aa A 46 16 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 Operating System 3 1 Operating System Microsoft Windows Embedded Hand Held 6 5 3 2 The Battery Two Lithium lon battery pack variants are available for the EP10 High Capacity 3600 mAh battery pack Model Number RV3010 BP08 000760 and Standard Capacity 2400 mAh battery pack Model Number RV3005 BP08 000730 Preparing the EP10 for operation requires that a battery pack be charged and installed in the EP10 3 2 1 Battery Safety AN Important Before attempting to install use or charge the battery pack it is critical that you review and follow the important safety guidelines in the quick reference guide entitled EP10 Hand Held Computer amp Accessories Regulatory Warranty Guide PN 8000235 3 2 2 Removing the Battery Pack AN Important Always shut down the EP10 before removing the battery To safely remove the bat tery press the
222. n to a particular type of device If for example you choose Computer from this menu only computers within range of the EP10 are listed in the Device tab Choosing All lists all detected devices Bluetooth ao qe Ty 4 Gm 8 20 Paired lt Device gt Servers Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 107 Chapter 5 Settings Bluetooth Setup 5 8 2 2 Pairing a Device Before pairing a headset or any other Bluetooth device with your EP10 make certain that the Bluetooth device power is enabled it is enabled by default If for some reason it has been disabled e Tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections icon and then tap on the Wireless Manager icon e If the Bluetooth option is listed as Off tap on Bluetooth to turn the radio on O Note There is another route to enabling your Bluetooth radio tap on Start gt Settings gt Con nections gt Bluetooth icon In the scrolling tab bar at the top of the screen display the Mode tab and select Turn on Bluetooth Tap OK Note that if you want your EPIO to be visible to other Bluetooth devices tap on Discoverable To pair a device a headset for example power the device on and bring it within 10 meters of the EP10 before proceeding with the discovery process described below Set the device to visible so that the EP10 can detect it and establish a connection To pair devices e Follow the manufacturer s instructions to place the remote device in pairing mode e Choose the Devic
223. nc or On your EP10 tap on Start gt ActiveSync and then tap on Sync During synchronization the notes you created on your EP10 are copied to a new Office OneNote 2010 note book called OneNote Mobile on your PC When synchronization is done you can drag the transferred notes into any other sections and other notebooks on your PC 4 22 3 Word Mobile If you ve used Microsoft Word on your PC Word Mobile will be familiar to you Keep in mind however that Word Mobile is designed for a small screen and limited memory O Note Keep in mind also that a Word document created on your PC can lose key formatting features such as styles and tables if you make changes to it on your EPIO e Tap on Start gt Office Mobile gt Word Mobile Word Mobile fl gt Ti 4 11 56 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs PowerPoint Mobile O Note If you ve already created a Word document it will be listed in a Word Mobile window To launch a new Word document you ll need to tap on the New softkey 4 22 3 1 Text Input Modes In addition to the soft keyboard you can enter text using the EP10 keyboard soft keyboard or the transcriber AN Important Refer to Notes on page 73 for details about the transcriber and soft keyboard text input methods 4 22 3 2 Sharing Documents with your PC Documents created on a PC are recognized by your EP10 However some formatting is lost when a Word document is converted to a Word Mobi
224. ndscape This screen allows you to determine how your EP10 screen will behave depending on how the unit is ro tated All orientations screen rotates to portrait or landscape to match the orientation of the actual EP10 Portrait screen does not rotate regardless of the orientation of the EP10 The screen will always be dis played as portrait Landscape screen does not rotate regardless of the orientation of the EP10 The screen will always be dis played as landscape Enable auto screen rotation is enabled by default If you prefer to set screen rotation manually you can disable this option A Configure button is displayed on the screen Screen Rotation I g7 7 am 12 44 Screen Rotation _ Enable auto screen rotation C All orientations Portrait Landscape the screen orientation manually Configure Tapping on the Configure button displays the Screen dialog box 182 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings System Properties Text Size lt General gt ClearType Orientation a Fortrait E Landscape right handed La Landscape left handed Align Screen Align the screen if it is not responding accurately to stylus tape AN Important For information about this screen refer to Screen Orientation on page 24 5 11 24 5 11 25 System Properties This program identifies the computer software and hardware components indicating which components are installed
225. nect the mains power cable and check that the slot indicator flashes at power up EN Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Snap Modules Model Nos RV4001 amp RV4002 6 8 Snap Modules Model Nos RV4001 amp RV4002 Snap Modules are mobile power adaptors that snap on the base of the EP10 Two types of Snap Module var iants are available e USB and Charge Snap Module Model No RV4001 This accessory powers and charges the EP10 and it provides a USB connection e DE9RS232 and Charge Snap Module Model No RV4002 This accessory powers and charges the EP10 and provides a RS 232 connection The Snap Modules are compatible with AC power adaptor Model PS1050 G1 A country specific cable to be plugged into the wall mains must be ordered separately To attach an adaptor to the EP10 e Make sure that the adaptor connector and EP10 docking connector are free of dust or any other debris before connecting them e Aslot in the side rail on each side of the hand held accommodates the locking clips of the adaptor To attach the adaptor align it with the base of the hand held and gently slide up until the locking clips Snap into place e To remove the adaptor press down on the base of the clip arms to release them from the EP10 side rails and slide the adaptor off 6 9 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor Model No RV3050 The Vehicle Power Outlet adaptor allows you to power your
226. nique name across a network If you are unable to connect to a network because another device with the same name is already connected you ll need to assign a new name here Copyrights The Copyrights tab lists the copyright information for the software loaded on your EP10 5 11 2 Backlight Screen and Keypad Tapping on Start gt Settings gt System tab followed by the Backlight icon allows you to determine the backlight and power properties of the EP10 5 11 2 1 Backlight Tab 5 Backlight Backlight en Tit 7 28 External lt Backlight gt Advanced x Adjust backlight automatically Screen backlight Keypad backlight Use the Advanced tab to configure all lighting conditions Adjust power settings ta conserve power S a a Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 143 Chapter 5 Settings Backlight Screen and Keypad This tab allows you to tailor the EP10 backlight behaviour of the screen and keypad to best preserve battery life By default the EP10 is set to adjust the backlight automatically An x should be present in the checkbox to the left of Adjust backlight automatically Note that automatic adjustment is based on the settings in the Advanced tab Manually Adjusting Screen and Keypad Brightness The top sliding button adjusts the screen brightness while the bottom sliding button adjusts the keypad brightness To adjust the backlight manually Slide the buttons to the left to decrease bri
227. nt to copy A ring of dots is displayed followed by a pop up menu e Tap on Copy in the pop up menu e Navigate to the location where you want to copy the file e Press and hold the stylus in a blank area of the screen away from other icons until a pop up menu is displayed e Tap Paste to copy the file to the new location 3 13 4 Deleting a File e Press and hold the stylus on the file or folder you want to delete until a pop up menu is displayed e Tap Delete to remove the file 3 14 Using Menus In Windows Embedded 6 5 the menu Is located in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen File Zoom Tools Help Word Mobile ao qe Yu d uu 4 05 Activating Modifier Keys BI U s s DN fe Fan en Softkey Bar Menu softkey To execute a command e Tap on Menu to display the commands associated with it and then tap on the command you want to execute 3 14 1 Pop Up Menus Pop up menus are available in many screens and programs They offer quick access to a group of useful commands in addition to those available in the menu bar To display a pop up menu e Gently press and hold the stylus on the screen A ring of dots is displayed on the screen followed by a pop up menu Word Mobile ao gr Yi Gm 4 04 Make Selection Select All Font Paragraph e Tap on the command you want to execute az Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 Program
228. o RV3004 a 205 671 Charging The EPIO Battery lt a ss osos oe cea ue a eae ada aaa a a a 205 Ole REE 205 Ga Operator CONOIS gt x os ebb ryser eae eee ereere 206 OLA CIOE INOKALOS ano eee ewes Se Rake ee ead eR ER ES ee ees 206 Go AAA 206 6 10 Troubleshooting lt lt lt 264485604645 ee8 46488 6 Se bo dana 206 6 7 6 1 Improper Battery Storage ns 206 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 195 6 7 6 2 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed 206 6 8 Snap Modules Model Nos RV4001 amp RV4002 2 ee ne 207 6 9 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor Model No RV3050 207 6 10 The Unpowered Vehicle Cradle Model No RVI000 208 610 Important InstruUCtONS ss s sa mese raras aa 208 6 10 2 Vehicle Cradle Operation ee 208 61021 Operator CONOIS s aa soree ddei ima ar oa a s 208 OFA e EPEE as eee ee eee E E 208 6 10 2 3 Inserting the EP10 in the Vehicle Cradle 2 e 209 610 3 Charging Cable RVBODS poe a0 Re db ews oo we EHO aS ew ewe hee Eee we ee ewe 209 6 10 4 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations 209 6 10 5 Cleaning the RV1000 Vehicle Cradle e 209 6 11 The Powered Vehicle Cradle Model NO0 RVID05 210 6 111 RV1005 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations 211
229. o be accessible from the Today screen Data Gateway ActiveSync Alarms Calculator pal poutlook Inle Window Calendar ue f 2 Excel Mobile 2010 Ink Window B3 icon Ink Window Windows Windows My Device RAM Disk Flash Disk B3 icon Ink Window F OneNote Mobile 201 Windows E Tapping on a storage area Windows for example displays the applications you can add to the Today screen from that storage area Advanced Tab This tab provides a number of options to restrict what is available to the operator on start up na Er A m qu 11 33 Applicabans lt Advanced gt Phone x Administrater access in Start Menu Administrator Key Sequence Shift Blue 0 Launch an application on Startup Vino ws Start MenPrograms lana Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 165 Chapter 5 Settings PsionVU Start Button and Notification Restrictions The drop down menu at the top of the Advanced tab allows you to limit access to the navigation bar at the top of the screen and the Start button at the bottom of the screen PsionvVu Co gt Ty d om 3 01 Applicabons lt Advanced gt Phone Allow access to Start and Notifications Disable access to Start Disable access to Notifications Disable access to Start and Notifications C Launch an application on Startup When you choose an option for example Disable access to Start and Notifications the sample bar
230. o change the auto assignment Using the Contact List to Program a Speed Dial In the Today screen list tap on phone Tap on the Contact softkey in the taskbar at the bottom of the Today screen Er Tal Ag om 4 30 y Contacts dr Ti E 4 34 a Enter a name MUSIC ES oe No New Missed Calls a 411 Assistanca LE voicemail gy ap 4105551212 227 AM 1255501212 Ap Era e Tap on the Contact to which you want to assign a speed dial number EA Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Sending amp Ending Calls using the EP10 Keyboard Edit View All Calls Save to Contacts Send Text Message Send Contact Delete SIM Contact Add to Speed Dial In the Summary screen tap on Menu gt Add to Speed Dial 4 3 2 Sending amp Ending Calls using the EP10 Keyboard An EP10 that supports the phone feature is equipped with a Talk and an End call key on the keyboard Using these phone keys you can display the phone keypad and answer send and terminate phone calls 4 3 3 Managing Phone Settings ap Note If your unit is equipped with a Sierra Wireless MC5728V radio for the Sprint and Verizon CDMA net works in the U S the phone screens will differ from the samples presented here These radios are outlined in Appendix A Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN You can adjust phone settings such as the ring type and tone choose phone services such as barring
231. o notification or sound that the EP10 will emit for that event For example suppose you choose Phone Incoming call from the Event 104 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Connections Folder drop down menu You can choose a specific Ring type for this event from the drop down menu perhaps Vibrate and ring In the Ring tone drop down menu you can choose the tone or sound of the ring If your EP10 vibrates and emits the ring you selected you will immediately know your hand held is receiving an in coming phone call Choose an event from the Events drop down menu Choose the Ring type and Ring tone for the event you ve chosen To test your choice tap on the arrow below Ring tone The small square button stops the ring test 5 8 Connections Folder This folder icon contains the applets you ll need to set up connections using Bluetooth and an 802 11 radio Tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections folder icon Connections ac go Y fe Gm 6 27 DY 2 XA Connections Eear Domain Enroll A O sn q Wireless Manager 5 8 1 Beam Enabling the Beam applet makes your EP10 visible and available to others wanting to beam information to your unit ao q Tull A Gar 6 05 Beam Mode C Receive all incoming beams 5 8 2 Bluetooth Setup Bluetooth is a global standard for wireless connectivity for digital devices and is intended for Personal Area Networks The technology is based on a short range ra
232. o o A R 104 A e A Io senereuccas vais es odeew saa seeaeonsat 104 36 COMMECHONG FOIE air pneu Gonweieuerindaemeapuuntesuyeteniecnnabnennetat 105 5 8 1 A II nn E A E E A E A N E E T E ET 105 A PUCO SOU ereere aa n R EIIE E II A 105 5 8 21 The Devices Tab Scanning for Bluetooth Devices ssssssssssseessressseessereseees 106 Dee A E e ETETE 108 Oe E A aE e E S E E E EE 110 eee AS 110 o II 111 a A OO E O A aqaiese 111 5 8 3 Connecting Using a Bluetooth GPRS Phone occoccoccocccccoccncnocnnc corno non 112 5 8 4 Connections CONNECTING to the INM tens cena gacnenedenns0454 seas PARO as viens sade 114 38 59 Mode Connection SETUD sicario ira 115 Sei Advanced Modem SeUINOS aeidascodora raider code LAN 116 Ose LOMA EO rica Er En EEEE EEE A EAE EEEE EE RSA 117 Dod ICTR IS ceesre rere eSEE EE EEA E EEE 118 5 8 7 1 Changing Network Card SOMOS coronar ia 119 5 8 7 2 VPN Connection Setup sssssssssssssssessseeesessecessssecsesseeeseereceeseereeesereee 120 9 8 3 Managing an Existing COnNeCctON ci osirraisesancona nacen praia 121 SOLA PONV ENON TOD er AE N E EA ETAN EEE ee oe 122 A o EENEN EEan 123 589 WiFConig Setting Up the 802 1la b d Rad eco ais 124 5 8 91 WV OMG Status TiD cercados to EESE 125 See AA 1 OR A 125 5 8 9 3 Configuring TCP IP nuria ii a ii ia da 130 3094A WERCORTIG Advanced TaD tcc ccc ca AA a 131 38 10 Wireless aI Oe is 4ca cece owe ce en einen cone oradn ia tedean ena es cone den N e a a 133 gt Peel POMO dan
233. ommunication D 4 Sprint connection CDMA A 8 Start Menu 41 Start screen Contacts icon 63 Home icon 49 Stop Bits port replicator 187 Storage Card tab 160 stylus touch pen using 31 Surface Glossy C 4 Suspend suspend turn off screen 101 swap time for battery 17 synchronizing e mail Windows Vista and 7 62 synchronizing e mail Windows XP 60 System apps About 142 Admin Password changing PsionVU 163 AGPS Assisted Global Positioning System 154 Backlight 143 Backlight Advanced tab 144 Battery Power settings 144 Certificates 145 Contrast 148 Encryption 150 Error Reporting 151 External Power settings 145 GPS external 151 GPS Settings built in profiles 153 Imagers Settings 156 Managed Programs 159 Memory 159 Phone PsionVU limiting access 168 PsionVU 162 Shell Settings PsionVU 163 trigger mappings 157 task completed marking as 79 creating 77 78 deleting 79 editing 79 notification 77 sorting 79 Task Manager 43 183 TCP_IP Settings modem setup 116 Terminal Services Client 91 session disconnecting without ending 91 session ending 91 Total Recall 184 AutoRestore Profile 188 backup profile creating 185 backup Profile restoring 187 clone creating 186 Clone to USB 189 managing profiles 187 Restore Profile 188 Upload to A R C 189 view Profile 187 touch pen using 31 touchscreen aligning calibrating 24 calibrating 24 locking 25 orientation 24 stylus us
234. one console Refer to The Phone on page 37 for details about using the phone 32 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 The Today Screen Default Options 3 10 2 4 Voicemail Highlighting Voicemail lets you know if you have any new voice messages Tapping the stylus on this option displays the phone console so that you can dial the phone number to access your voice messages If your service supports voicemail but it has not been set up Tap on Voicemail in the Today screen P lt Val Ae 223 pictures music phone Fhone line Please enter your voicemail number and dial again zm w r n aN K R ae kS sy e i dai F Type your voicemail number 3 10 2 5 Time Date and Alarms Highlighting the Time option displays the current time and date Tapping on this option displays the Clock amp Alarms dialog box Tap on the Alarm hotkey or in the Today screen tap on today s time The Clock amp Alarms screen is displayed Clock amp Alarms o e Tie au 12 47 Time lt Alarms Time Description gt 6 00 AM SUT Wwres lt Description gt 6 00 AM sfpwres Description gt x 6 00 AM Ss ppwTres Sound alarms even when the device is set to silent or vibrate Setting the Alarm You can set a maximum of three alarms Tap on the Time or Day in the Clock amp Alarms screen Tap on the Alarms tab to display the Alarm Set tings screen Ps
235. ons 214 scanning appending characters 176 Bad Scan Beep 176 bar code settings 174 Click Time 175 Data Handling code page 176 double click 175 Index Good and Bad Scan Vibrates 176 Good Scan Beep 176 Options tab 175 safety instructions 2 4 Scan Indicator 176 Scan Log File 176 Scan Result 176 Scan Result Time 176 Translations tab 177 Scan Result 176 Scan Result Time 76 screen navigating 31 stylus 31 touch pen 31 scrolling adjusting speed Up_Down tab 136 security setting up phone 55 Server Settings modem setup 117 Server tab Bluetooth 110 Set for AutoRestore 188 Settings 44 Personal Tab OneShot tab 137 Up_Down tab 136 Task Manager working with 43 Shell Settings PsionVU 163 shift state indicator accessing 40 shift state indicator softkey bar 40 shift state indicator icon 20 Shutdown SIM card inserting 26 softkey softkey bar 40 softkey bar shift state indicator 40 softkey 40 soft keyboard icon 40 softkeys 40 soft keyboard using 4 soft keyboard icon softkey bar 40 softkeys softkey bar 40 Soft Scan Timeout 176 software specifications D 3 sound adjusting 54 Sound setting events 104 Sound and Notifications defining 104 Sound settings 104 speaker beep conditions 26 volume adjustment 26 specifications D 1 802 11a b g n D 5 bar code application D 4 digital camera D 4 for EP10 hand held D 3 physical dimensions D 3 power management D 4 software platform D 3 user interface D 3 wireless c
236. ooth radio 802 11a n U FL jack Non diversity Antenna Type 802 11b g n PIFA antenna Covers 2400 2484 MHz lt 2 0 1 VSWR 802 11a n PIFA antenna Covers 5150 5860 MHz lt 2 0 1 VSWR Antenna Gain 802 11b g n 3 73 dBi 802 11a n 4 85 dBi Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual D 5 Appendix D Specifications Murata Bluetooth Radio Table D 3 802 1la n 5150 5350 MHz 5480 5720 MHz and 5725 5845 MHz Data Rates 802 11b 1 2 5 5 11 Mbps 802 11a g 802 11n EVM 802 11b 802 119 802 1la 802 11n 2 4 GHz 802 11n 5 GHz Bluetooth Coexistence 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 54 Mbps 65 13 19 5 26 39 52 58 5 65 Mbps 32 max 26 dB max 26 dB max 29 dB max 29 dB max TI Wilink6 proprietary WiFi BT co existent scheme D 2 2 Murata Bluetooth Radio Table D 4 Parameter Specifications Form Factor Embedded surface mount module 11 4 x 9 4 mm This is a combo module containing both Wi Fi 802 11a b g n and Bluetooth V2 1 EDR radio Antenna Port U FL jack shared with Wi Fi 802 11b g n radio Antenna Type PIFA antenna Covers 2400 2484 MHz lt 2 0 1 VSWR Antenna Gain 3 73 dBi Transmit Power 6 5 dBm typical Frequency Range 2 400 2 4835 GHz Channel RX Sensitivity 90 dBm typical 70 dBm max Data Rates 90 dBm typical 70 dBm max 802 11 Coexistence TI Wilink6 proprietary WiFi BT co existent scheme D 6 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix D Specifications Sierra Wireless MC5
237. op docking station quad docking station and quad charger Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor Model RV3050 Desktop Docking Station Model RV4000 Quad Docking Station Model RV4004 Quad Charger Model RV3004 6 3 1 Important Safety Instructions Before using the AC adaptor Desktop Docking Station Quad Charger or Quad Docking Station read all instructions and markings on the housing 198 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Installation Chargers and Docking Stations e Use the AC adaptor batteries and other attachments recommended or sold by Psion e The mains power cord sold separately shall comply with the national safety regulations of the country where the equipment is to be used e These docking stations cannot be used with non EP10 PDAs Although they may share the same battery terminating connector they are designed with different applications in mind e Do not operate the AC adaptor with a damaged cord or plug Replace immediately e Do not disassemble the AC adaptor it should be repaired by qualified service personnel Incorrect reassembly may result in electric shock or fire e To reduce the risk of damage to the electric plug and cord when unplugging a docking station pull the plug rather than the cord e Make sure the cord is positioned so that it is not stepped on tripped over or otherwise subjected to damage or stress e Do not operate the
238. or your phone service Choose the amount of time that the unit can remain idle before you are prompted to enter your password In the Password type drop down menu choose the type of password you prefer to assign Simple PIN allows you to enter a minimum of four numeric characters Strong alphanumeric requires a minimum of 7 characters and must contain at least three of the following uppercase and lowercase alpha char acters numbers and punctuation Type your password in the Password field and retype your password in the Confirm field Tap on OK A dialog box asks whether or not you want to save your password settings Tap on YES to Save your password assignment Home The Home applet is used to customize your Today screen Tap on Start gt Home icon to display this applet ES Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Appearances Tab Changing the Theme Background Home zn pr Yal 7 Qu 12 58 Items lt Appearance gt Items DVF green Handheld Blue Isaac Mizrahi purple C Use this picture as the background Browse 5 5 1 Appearances Tab Changing the Theme Background The Appearance tab allows you to change the background appearance of the Today screen Tap on the theme or background you want to use Tap on OK to assign the background you ve chosen to your EP10 Note You can also use a personal picture as your background Tap on the checkbox to the left of Use this picture as the ba
239. os a A My Pictures w y Camera K Menu S In the bottom right corner of the camera screen tap on Menu gt Video Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Windows Media Pictures amp Videos Cr gt Til 5 17 C Mode b Resolution Flash b Full Screen Options Press ENTER to begin recording Video Recorder Icon Indicates that video is active A AAA i 35 Po om oo Bs Thumbnails E Menu OK e To end the video press ENTER again or tap on the Stop softkey O Note When the Video recorder is activated a Menu is available to tailor the operation of the recorder the quality of the recording and so on 4 11 Windows Media Windows Media allows you to play music and videos on your EP10 You can use Windows Media to play digital audio and video files that are stored on your EP10 or on the web To work with this applet tap on Start gt Windows Media For details about using this applet refer to http www microsoft com windowsphone en us howto wp6 music windows media player mobile aspx 4 12 Messenger Windows Live Windows Live Messenger is an instant messaging service Refer to the Microsoft web site for details Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Windows Live 4 13 Windows Live Windows Live is a free online service that provides operators with a free mobile phone back up solution by wirelessly synchroniz
240. ose a connection option screen double click on Connect to a Bluetooth personal area network PAN A Devices and Printers screen is displayed O Note Make certain that Bluetooth is enabled on your EP10 and that it is discoverable on your EP10 tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections Tap on the Bluetooth icon Scroll to the Mode tab If they are not already enabled tap in the checkbox add an x next to Turn on Blue tooth and Discoverable e In the top left corner of the Devices and Printers screen tap on the Add a device button Your EP10 is displayed in the Add a device screen e Double tap on your EP10 icon You are asked to choose a pairing option Create a pairing code for me or Enter the device s pairing code Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual ON Chapter 4 Programs Task Manager e Ifa pairing code has been assigned to your EP10 choose Enter the device s pairing code and type the EP10 passcode on your PC and on your EP10 e Ifa pairing code has not been assigned to your EP10 choose Create a pairing code for me and type the EP10 passcode on your PC and on your EP10 A message will appear on your EP10 indicating that you have successfully paired your EP10 with your PC Your EP10 will appear in Control Panel Devices and Printers 4 19 Task Manager The Task Manager screen lists all running tasks applications or processes This applet provides a number i of options to manage these Task M
241. oses in strong alkaline solutions e To clean ink marks from the label use isopropyl alcohol EZI Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Troubleshooting 6 6 5 Troubleshooting 6 6 5 1 EP10 Charge Indicator LED Stays Off When an EP10 is docked into a powered RV4004 and the hand held charge indicator LED stays off there may be a problem with the EP10 or with the docking station Use an EP10 with a properly functioning charge indicator to isolate the problem 6 6 5 2 Power LED Does Not Light Up e Remove all the EP10s and unplug the docking station e Connect another device to the mains outlet to ensure there is power e Remove the IEC mains power cable from the charger and check it for damage e Reconnect the mains cable in the charger and mains outlet 6 6 5 3 EP10 Charge LED Flashes Yellow A flashing yellow EP10 charge LED the left most LED on the hand held indicates that the battery is not within the allowable charging temperature range O C and 40 C 32 F to 104 F Allow the battery to come to an acceptable range before reinserting the EP10 in the docking station 6 6 5 4 EP10 Charge Indicator LED Flashes Red If the EP10 charge indicator flashes red when the EP10 is in any of the four sites the quad dock cannot read the battery or it is a non Psion battery e Remove the EP10s and disconnect the adaptor DC power cable e Wait at least 20 seconds and then plug
242. ou to tweak or adjust system settings such as the interface network and servers 5 11 27 1 Advanced Tab Advanced CE Services Settings X TweakIT Settings TweakIT Settings a Yi si qu 3 46 Registry E lt Advanced gt User Big Advanced CE Services Setting 22 Advanced Interface and Ne H 2 Advanced Services Settings 190 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings TweakIT FTP Server TweakIT Settings go Yale un 4 06 Registy E Advanced User iy Advanced CE Services Setting ES FTP Server F a Advanced Interface and Net H ak Advanced Services Settings This option is enabled by default to allow file transfers Keep in mind that data transfer in either direction is restricted to the Temp folder that is files are always loaded from the FTP Server to the Temp folder and from the Temp folder to the FTP Server If this option is disabled a warm reset must be performed to accept the change 5 11 27 2 Advanced Interface and Network Settings TweakIT Settings Cr gt 7 yj 4 11 Registry E Advanced gt User H a Advanced CE Services Setting Ma Advanced Interface and Meta Es Enable IPv 2 Modem Logging F ak Advanced Services Settings Enable IPv6 TweakIT Settings gt Yap d Ga 4 12 Enable 1Pv _ Enable 1Pv6 ASIS Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 191 Chapter 5 Settings TweakIT This option allows you
243. oup preset C 3 GSM GPRS EDGE radio specifications D 7 GSM UMTS radio modem connection A 3 Index H hand strap 197 hand strap RV6021 attaching 197 Hardware Reset 13 headset adjusting volume 161 headsets pairing Bluetooth 108 Home appearance changing 98 Home icon Start screen 49 Home Screen desktop screen 31 customizing 31 Identifier Default preset group C 3 imager 2D scanner scanning 2D 214 imager options 214 Imager Settings 156 indicators LED functions 25 scanner message 215 softkey bar 40 input modes handwriting 89 typing 89 integrated scanner option 214 interface user D 3 Internet connection 114 Internet Explorer 67 browsing web sites 67 Internet Sharing 80 ISM band Bluetooth radio 105 1SO 8859 1 Latin 1 code page 176 K keyboard one shot mode 137 Scancode remapping 140 Unicode Mapping 138 keyboard keys 18 21 23 DEL key accessing BKSP 22 Macro keys 22 137 modifier keys locking amp unlocking 20 modifiers 19 one shot mode 137 punctuation accessing 21 Scancode Remapping 140 shift state indicator icon 20 40 Unicode Mapping 138 keypad adjusting 54 keypad phone 50 L landscape orientation 24 LED desktop docking station RV4000 201 functions 25 RV4000 desktop dock 201 troubleshooting desktop dock RV4000 202 troubleshooting quad dock RV4004 205 Linear Predefined preset C 4 Linear and PDF Predefined preset C 4 linking EPIOto PC 44 Low light Predefined preset C 4
244. own into each charge compartment until the battery touches the base of the charge compartment Ensure that the contacts on the battery meet the contacts in the battery charge bay The 4 LED bar for the battery bay shows 25 charger per LED A flashing green LED shows charging is under way The LED directly below the slot in which a battery is inserted lights up immediately If the battery temperature is outside O C and 40 C 32 F to 104 F the LED flashes yellow until the tempera ture is acceptable A fully discharged battery will normally take from 3 to 4 hours to charge At full capacity it turns solid green When the battery is fully charged the charger stops applying power the battery cannot be overcharged if left in the charger slot Troubleshooting Improper Battery Storage Storing batteries in the gang charger for extended periods more than a week or two is not recommended Lithium ion batteries lose capacity if they are maintained at full charge for long periods of time See the battery handling recommendations in The Battery on page 17 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed e Remove the battery and clean the contacts on the battery and the charge slot e Reinstall the battery and check that it is fully seated in the slot e Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage are they bent flattened twisted or broken e Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charger slot e Recon
245. p the appointment in the Calendar screen to display it in a summary screen The reminder is indi cated by the small bell icon e If you ve no further additions for the appointment tap on OK Otherwise move to the Categories section following Calendar o d uu 2 18 Conference 8 00a 9 00a Fri 4 1 2011 Status Free Using Categories Categories help you organize and track the different types of data you keep on your EP10 To assign an appointment to a category e Tap on the Menu softkey and choose Edit The Appointment tab is displayed Scroll down to the Categories field and tap on it to display your options Calendar ac ge E Gm 2 38 New category softkey e Tap in the checkbox next to the category to which you want to assign the appointment e Tap OK Your appointment is assigned to the category or categories you chose Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 Favorites Note You can create a new category by tapping on the New softkey at the bottom of the screen Attendees This option allows you to define required and optional attendees for your meeting When you tap on this option your contacts are displayed where you can choose attendees Status Tapping on Status lists your availability Free Tentative Busy or Out of Office Sensitivity This option allows you to indicate the nature of the appointment Normal Personal Private or Confidentia
246. pacity charge times and battery life for the EP10 battery See Charging a Spare Battery on page 201 for spare battery charge information 200 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Indicators Figure 6 4 RV4000 Desktop Docking Station Front View Rear Mounted Spare Battery Charge Well Spare Battery Charge LED AN Important This docking station can only be used to charge Psion approved Lithium lon batteries 6 5 1 Indicators The RV4000 desktop docking station is equipped with a single LED on the front panel that indicates the charge status of the spare battery 6 5 2 Operation 6 5 2 1 Charging the EP10 Battery The RV4000 supplies DC power to enable the EP10 internal fast charger Normally it takes between 3 to 4 hours to charge the battery installed in the EP10 When the EP10 hand held is installed in the dock the battery charge LED on the EP10 the left most LED lights up to indicate the unit has external power and may charge the internal battery The EP10 charge LED follows the same convention as the RV4000 docking station LED Refer to Charging a Spare Battery in the next section for details about LED behaviour O Note Battery charging continues whether the EPIO is switched on or off 6 5 2 2 Charging a Spare Battery O Note Do not store a spare battery in a charger for more than 72 hours Doing so may damage the battery or reduce its charge capacity
247. page 187 5 11 26 2 Creating a Clone Cloning allows you to copy settings or configurations from one computer to another There are two types of clones to choose from a Full Clone and a Settings Only Clone A Full Clone contains all files most of the registry and the settings files AN Important The target device for a Full Clone MUST have the same model type and OS build as the source otherwise problems can occur For example if the target device has a newer build of the OS the new build may have a different set of registry keys that may conflict with the source A Settings Only Clone can be copied to a wider array of devices but it should not be used as an autorestore profile Tap on the Create Clone button to begin the process Your EP10 model type and OS will be identified in the cloning statement to ensure that you target devices of the same type e Give the clone profile a name and location Total Recall 5 0 GP ge Yili uu 8 17 Click Next to create a clone profile of this device for another Psion 7515 running Windows Mobile 6 5 Professional Profile Name Profile Locatio iF Flash Dick e Tap on Next e Inthe next screen choose All for a Full Clone or Selected Options for a Settings Only Clone If you choose Selected Options a menu will open to enable you to decide which options you want cloned 186 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Total Recall Total Recall 5
248. page 53 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual GETTING TO KNOW THE E P10 Sh Operan Syste Mi sari areae AS ee ee aa a ee a a AAA 17 Se The Battely se ae a eh ee ee oe a RRR oe ee a 17 3 21 Battery Sd rre torres oa tee eee eee eee ee eee ees 17 322 Removing Me Battery Pack sa 4264 4 arar sra ADA 17 32 3 Battery Swap TIME 4 45664 2445 lt 40 6 44 asertis ERE AAA 17 oc Charing ie Ballely lt aeie dace bewen etn ote ec bE GAS a Pe Rb dee Cees tee 17 3 2 41 Chargers and Docking Stations 18 cd AI 18 3 31 EP10 Alpha and Numeric KeyboardS ee 18 332 LOCKING e KeyDOSTd ne nissan ass a RE A 19 333 MOI KEYS 22 eae od bee 8 Bare AAA AAA A 19 3 3 31 Activating Modifier Keys ee 20 3 3 3 2 LOCKING Modifier KEYS s sirena parar ar 20 gt The Power DUTTON lt gt dew ce aros cine certeras ia 21 3 0 0 Th eStandard KEYS ss ss died 66 Ob e dda we ee Awe BEES hd Pe eee RY SK EY ew 21 3 3 51 The Function Keys F1 to F10 1 42444 ews ee een aes hee we Pee ewe A 22 3 35 2 The MacroKeysS s ssreceresina erea mides BORE Be Oe aami ierd 22 3 3 6 The Numeric Keyboard Accessing Alpha KeyS 2 ee a 23 3 3 61 Choosing a Single Alpha Character ee 23 3 3 6 2 Creating Uppercase Letters eee 23 3 3 6 3 Choosing Multiple Alpha Characters 23 3 3 7 The Keypad Bac
249. pare charge slot LED continues to flash red with the known working battery the charger is defective and requires service Dock Battery LED does not Turn On when Battery is Inserted e Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage Are they bent flattened twisted or broken e Reinstall the battery and check that it is fully seated in the slot e Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charger slot e Disconnect and reconnect the DC adaptor and check that the spare battery LED indicator flashes at power up e If the charge slot fails to charge the known working battery the docking station is defective and requires service 202 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Quad Docking Station Model No RV4004 6 6 Quad Docking Station Model No RV4004 AN Important The RV4004 quad docking station is shipped with its own quick start guide It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates Figure 6 5 Quad Docking Station Model No RV4004 The RV4004 Quad Docking Station is designed to accept up to four EP10 hand held computers The docking station powers the EP10s and their internal battery charger The docking station also connects from one to four EP10s to a 10 100 Base T Ethernet network and allows for Ethernet data transfer 6 6 1 Operator Controls The RV4004 has no operator controls or power switch 6 6 2 Indicators Th
250. perating power from the vehicle to the Powered Vehicle Cradle from 12VDC or 24VDC systems e The Powered Vehicle Cradle draws no more than 1 9 A 12 VDC or 0 95 A 24 VDC Any additional wiring connectors or disconnects used should be rated for at least 3A The Powered Vehicle Cradle and peripherals can be used with both negative ground systems when using the Power Extension cable Peripheral wiring should be closely examined to avoid ground loops in positive ground systems e There is the option of connecting power to the cradle before or after the key switch It is preferable to wire after the key switch In this configuration when the key is turned ON the vehicle will power the cradle and docked EP10 charging the internal battery when needed When the vehicle ignition is OFF the EP10 docked in the cradle will run on its internal battery However if the operator switches the key off repeatedly for long periods during a shift it may make more sense to wire the vehicle cradle before the switch In this case the EP10 will always operate from vehicle power and that power will charge the battery when needed Keep in mind that the EP10 will continue to operate with or without vehicle power as long as the internal battery has sufficient charge 6 11 4 USB and Serial Connections AN Important Depending on the configuration the RV1005 Powered Vehicle Cradle has a maximum of two connectors and one power connector The Powered Vehicle
251. provided with the RAM mount to secure the cradle to the RAM mount Bolts must not extend more than 7 mm into the vehicle cradle If you wish to custom mount the vehicle cradle to a surface other than the recommended RAM please care fully follow the precautions listed under Mounting Template on page 211 Mounting Template The vehicle cradle is shipped with mounting instructions including a drilling template Refer to the EP10 Hand Held Vehicle Cradle Quick Start Guide PN 8000234 In every case please take the following precautions 1 2 3 4 5 When installing the cradle ensure the driver s view is not obstructed Install cradles so as not to obstruct vehicle safety features i e air bags seat belts etc Ensure cradle is secured to the vehicle in a safe location Injury may result otherwise Ensure the mounting has the capacity to hold the cradle and the EP10 Cradle plus EP10 weight is approximately 1 kg 2 2 Ib Psion has recommended and approved a mount Consult Psion Customer Service for direction Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual EN Chapter 6 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Cable Arrangement Figure 6 11 RAM Mount Model Number RAM B 166 202U To accommodate the service loop of the power cable leave a 10 2 cm 4 in clearance at the bottom of the vehicle cradle Leave a 17 8 cm 7 in clearance at the top of the vehicle cradle to allow easy removal of the EP10 When selecting a
252. r Uy iE Gm 5 31 ROGERS Enter a new PIN PIN must be between 4 and 8 digits in length Clear i Cancal q Wyz er p Type your new PIN a number consisting of between 4 and 8 digits in length Tap on Enter A new message lets you know that you need to confirm your new PIN e Retype your new PIN Tap on Enter when you re finished Enabling PIN Security To activate PIN security e Tap in the checkbox to the left of Require PIN when phone is used When security is enabled you will be prompted to enter a PIN before you are allowed to use the phone O Note Whenever this option is enabled or disabled you will be asked to enter your PIN 4 3 3 3 Phone Services Tab ES Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Phone ao e f Gm 4 32 Secunty Services gt Network To access settings for a service select it from the following list and tap Get Settings Call Barring Caller ID Call Forwarding Call Waiting Voice Mail and Text Messages Chapter 4 Programs Managing Phone Settings The Services tab allows you to customize the behaviour of your phone You can for example block all in coming calls tailor to whom your caller ID will be transmitted set up call forwarding and so on O Note Keep in mind that some services may not be supported by your network or they may not have been subscribed to e Tap on the service you want to set up Tap on Get Settings The service dialog boxes allow
253. ram up to 15 macro keys e Inthe Macro list on the left side of the screen highlight a macro key number for example 7 Tap on the Record button in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen A Record Macro screen is displayed Buttons fF g Y lt lt Gm 10 45 Enter the key strokes to record Stop Recording e Key in the macro sequence you want to assign to the Macro You can type text and numbers and you can program the function of special keys into a macro e When you ve finished recording your macro sequence tap on the Stop Recording button A new screen displays the macro sequence you created e Tap on the Save button to save your macro Your macro key sequence is listed in the Macro screen e Tap on OK to save your macro key assignment Executing a Macro To execute a Macro you must use Scancode Remapping to map the macro to a specific key O Note Refer to Scancode Remapping on page 140 Deleting a Macro e In the Macros tab highlight the macro number you want to delete e Tap on the Delete button at the bottom of the screen 5 9 2 5 Unicode Mapping e Tap on the Unicode Mapping tab to display this screen Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Buttons Buttons gt Y al sf qu 7 46 Macros lt Unicode Mapping gt Se i j Ps DEN O E 6 i oul The Unicode Mapping tab is used to map combinations of virtual key values and CTRL and SHIFT s
254. remapping e Tap the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box The Remap Scancode dialog box is displayed 140 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Buttons Scancode Label Ei Ea gt Virtual Key Force Shifted Eunction _ Force Unshifted Virtual Key Force Shifted O Eunction gt Force Unshifted Macro No Force Type the scancode in hexadecimal in the field labelled Scancode O Note The Label field displays the default function of the scancode you are remapping Virtual Key Function and Macro The radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog box allow you to define to what the scancode will be remapped to Virtual Key Function or Macro When Virtual Key is selected you can choose to force SHIFT to be on or off when the virtual key is sent If No Force is selected the shift state is dependent on whether the shift state is on or off at the time the virtual key is sent When Function is selected a list of valid functions appears in the dialog box When Macro is selected the macro keys available on your unit are listed in the dialog box Choose Virtual Key gt Function or Macro Choose a function from the Function list and tap on OK Editing a Scancode Remap e Inthe Scancode Remapping tab tap on the remap you want to edit Tap on the Edit button and make the appropriate changes Tap on OK to save your changes Removing a Remap e Inthe Scancode Remapp
255. reset Po e Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box e Tap on OK to save your changes The preset list is displayed the new custom preset appears at the end of the list It is marked as read and write Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix C Imagers Applet Modifying a Custom Preset C 3 6 C 3 7 PTS Imager Setting ea a Til BRE qu 8 35 About Imaging gt Barcoding Camera Presets Imager Default RA Motion R Low light near R Custom Preset R Edit Add Remove Activate R Read W Wrte 4 Active Modifying a Custom Preset The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset To ensure that it will work reliably it should be as close as possible to the original predefined preset To change a parameter value Highlight the custom preset and tap on the Edit button PTS Imager Settini ea a Til BRE qu 8 35 PTS Imager Settiny ea a Til U gu 8 37 Preset Custom Preset About Imaging gt Barcoding Camera Presets Imager Low light near Custom Preset Image Corrections E Exposure E Windowing Pre defined Preset are read only Press space or double click to change a setting in Customer preset Press lt Esc gt to cancel e Tap on the symbols to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings e Scroll through the parameter list until yo
256. rovides a variety of sounds when a key is pressed a keyboard character is rejected scan input is accepted or rejected an operator s entry does not match in a match field or the battery is low To specify how you want your EP10 to respond under various conditions refer to Sounds Tab on page 104 3 6 1 Vibration Settings You can set the EP10 to Vibrate or Vibrate and Ring when you receive an incoming phone call Refer to No tifications Tab on page 104 for details about choosing Events and Ring types 3 6 2 Adjusting Speaker Volume The Volume button is located on the left side of the EP10 just above the Scan button It is a rocker button pressing the top half of the button increases volume while pressing the bottom half of the button decreases it Sf Inserting the microSD and SIM Card O Note If the EPIO is equipped with a CDMA radio only a microSD slot is available A SIM card slot is not present There are two card holders available in the battery compartment of the EP10 the lower holder is provided for a microSD micro Secure Digital card and the upper holder is for a SIM Subscriber Identity Module card The microSD cards provide additional non volatile memory to your EP10 SIM cards provide access to the voice option the Internet and so on 3 7 1 Inserting the Cards e Press and release the Power button to turn the unit off e To access the card slots slide the battery latch to the right to unlock the battery
257. rs icon 156 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Manage Triggers Ml IF Manage Moger Manage Triggers ea eo Ti 1 41 L Side Se Up Down Decoded Scar Up Down Decoded Sca lt UpDowmn Up Down Decoded Scar Eag Show all modules Double click 90 1000 msec o a e A r A Add Ee Remove OK 5 11 13 1 Trigger Mappings A trigger mapping is an association between a particular key on the keyboard and a driver or application the module s sometimes referred to as trigger consumer s of the trigger source Along with key board keys trigger sources can also be grip triggers external hardware triggers or software based When the specified key is pressed the trigger consumer for example a decoded scanner is sent a message AN Important It is not possible to have two or more identical mappings for example F1 cannot be mapped to the Non Decoded Scanner twice even if the trigger type is different A keyboard key that is used as a trigger source will no longer generate key data or perform its normal function For example if the space button is used as a trigger source it will not be able to send space characters to applications Double Click When a key is pressed and released then pressed again within the configured time between O to 1000 mil liseconds a double click occurs See also Trigger Press Type on page 158 Show All Modul
258. s Using Applications 3 15 Programs Using Applications Tap the Start button in the softkey bar to display the programs installed on your EP10 Figure 3 5 Program Icons Co g FO ei 0 4 06 me G g 20 e qu 4 09 4 Settings s 3 2 O ar K i uu 4 09 Phone Pictures amp Videos 7 Start DO 4 T 4 10 Lamera J Active Syne E 1 la dl J Office Mobile 2010 GS P Internet Sharing Modem Link Pasion PartnerLip e O fice Mobile 2010 x gt J Remote Desktop Mobile Calculator SIM Toolkit Ll WiFConmect pa MyMobiler al Opening an Application e Tap on a Program icon to launch the associated program Minimizing an Application Tap on the X button in the lower right corner of an application screen to minimize the application a Note Although it looks like a Close button this button does not close the application it only mini mizes it Opening Closing and Switching Applications Tap on Start gt Settings gt System icon Use your stylus to scroll to the Task Manager icon Tap on Task Manager to display the associated screen Task Manager ao ge Ti E m 4 59 Application 5 ActiveSync Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual ES Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 Settings 3 16 3 17 The Task Manager screen lists all running tasks applications This applet provides a number of options to manage your opened applications End Task To shut down an appli
259. s Oe ee we ee BOS A BORE Roe Be eo 202 O54 TroUblesho0l a zeus arrasa oO ERR eA SRO SER GO DRE HE eee 202 6 5 41 Docking Station does not Power On 202 65042 EPIOCharde LED Stays OM acosada aa aa 202 6 5 4 3 EP10 Charge LED Flashes Yellow o ee 202 6 5 4 4 Dock Battery LED Fast Flashes Red with Spare Battery Inserted 202 6 5 4 5 Dock Battery LED does not Turn On when Battery is Inserted 202 6 6 Quad Docking Station Model No RV4004 ee 203 GOI Operator CONOS 25646544585 ara 203 COL INCO e ak etare bene eee eG oe a AA hee eee 203 66 5 QUIT DOCK OpergiiOn sa rere 2262886058656 4438 Be Oh eee SE Be eS 203 6631 Charging the EPIO Battery lt lt lt 46 lt lt e ee80 bee ee cee reia ee RS ee EX 203 OOSA A 203 6 6 3 3 Connecting to the Ethernet Network o 204 6 6 4 Cleaning the RV4004 eee 204 60 5 Troubleshooting a s serme re 2 eee hod bee Ae AON O AAA 205 6 6 5 EPIO Charge Indicator LED Stays Ol i6 lt d244884 8488484 be ERE RE A 205 6 6 5 2 Power LED Does Not Light Up eo cc iia wee ee ee ee wes 205 6 6 5 3 EP10 Charge LED Flashes Yellow o ee ees 205 6 6 5 4 EP10 Charge Indicator LED Flashes Red o 205 6 6 5 5 Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off 205 6 7 Quad Charger Model N
260. s information is used to diagnose the error not te identify or contact you You can choose to stop reporting problems at any time GPS Global Positioning System With a Global Positioning System GPS receiver you can locate your exact position on a map However even without a GPS receiver several different mapping programs can run on your EP10 e Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab gt GPS icon Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 151 Chapter 5 Settings GPS Global Positioning System GPS Settings fF g Y Ga 11 06 Access lt Programs gt Hardware Choose the port that programs will use to obtain GPS cata Any program that uses GPS will need to communicate with this port GPS program por GPD1 e Tap on the GPS program port drop down menu and choose the communication port that the GPS software will use to communicate with the GPS receiver O Note Your EP10 may automatically detect the GPS receiver that you are using and enter the settings in the Hardware tab If not you ll need to enter this information yourself You can find this information in the user manual of the GPS receiver Windows Embedded 6 5 automatically manages access to the GPS receiver However some programs may not work with automatic configuration If this is the case e Tap on the Access tab and disable Manage GPS automatically recommended GPS Settings EN Y 11 10 Hardware lt Access gt Programs Win
261. s the key you want to insert The ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed 5 11 21 1 2 Display Parameters Scan Result When this parameter is enabled the type of bar code and the result of the scan appear on the screen Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and is visible only while the scanner button is pressed When the button is released this information is cleared from the screen Scan Indicator When this parameter is enabled the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the scanner is activated Scan Result Time msec The value assigned to the Scan Result Time sec parameter determines how long the scan results of a successful scan are displayed on the screen Time is measured in seconds and a value of 0 zero disables the parameter When you choose this option a dialog box appears where you can enter a value O Note To remove the scan result from the screen before the Result Time has expired point the scanner away from the bar code and press the trigger Good Scan Beep and Bad Scan Beep These parameters determine whether or not the EP10 emits an audible scanner beep when a good suc cessful scan or a bad unsuccessful scan is performed the number of vibrates the duration of the vibrate and so on Set these parameters to tailor the behaviour of this parameter Multiple Beep Tones This parameter determines whether or not multiple beeps wil
262. s to frequently used numbers e In the phone keypad tap on the Speed Dial button to display the speed dial Phone dialog box Speed Dial Number Phone o gt Ti Ge 3 50 y Y Voicemail 1 416 555 1212 Call softkey This dialog box lists the phone numbers and the speed dial key to which the phone number has been assigned Tap on the Speed Dial Number the number to the left of the phone number you want to dial or Tap on the Call softkey in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen the phone receiver icon the number is dialled for you Using the Phone Keypad to Program a Speed Dial There are a number of ways to add a speed dial number You can create a speed dial number using the Con tacts list or by using the Speed Dial button on the phone keypad Adding a New Phone Number e Inthe phone keypad tap on the Speed Dial button e Inthe speed dial Phone dialog box tap on Menu gt New In the list choose a contact for a speed dial Phone EE Select a Contact J SS ex O ka ri Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual EN Chapter 4 Programs The Phone Keypad e Type a contact name in the field where the cursor is displayed or tap on a name in the list Phone eo Ti 4 28 Speed Dial Contact A BEE Mame Number 4165551212 Location 2 lt Available gt A sequential speed dial key is automatically assigned in the Location field You can tap on the arrows to the right of the Location field t
263. sa tarot ER a Ra da RAS 133 5 9 1 A o OO ana sate aceon EE EAAS ENES 134 Oe PURON a brapencsaracacvtarehussesonesedonetap O OO Ta II 135 5 9 21 Poor pl AA e A EE A T 136 5922 A 136 a ORE NOS tad E EAEE EAE EA EEEE TE ART 137 392A Mao AA EEEE ENEE REEE EEA 137 Dee Unicode Mappi cars deals EA O ENAS ds eat a 138 37256 Stancode R MapN conosca EE a E EAT EEEE 140 IL AWOL Teee ee E E ETE E S ENARE EEA 141 O POE e A E A NP AI E E S 142 Is A e e AIER EE EEEN AE 142 5 11 1 EE E AE run A 142 511 2 Backlight Screen and Keypad oooococcoccocccccocnnoncn corno nono 143 511 21 O A E IIA 143 A A EE E 144 OMS Banery OWED Tdi ros rosados 144 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual EM Table of Contents 5 11 3 5 11 4 a55 3 110 Dsl lel 5 11 8 SAL 9 11 10 5 1 11 5 11 12 311 13 5 11 14 oA Pl be 5 11 16 5 11 17 Sle 5 1 19 5 11 20 5 11 21 S22 3 11 23 5 11 24 Deo 5411 26 311 21 5k24 External Power TaD rra coverartone iria sida o 145 OTM ICS 5 ra ia E E A E E E TE 145 5 11 31 COO moa COPA aree a a aa aar A A ee a E 145 A E e EEE eo E EE NE I O E EEE EE 147 CONU asrorin eo hat esa LE EE E E TESE E E E E 148 Customer FeedDaCK AAR N A CGQXUeE ro POP E o O kaerra eeeeonss 148 A A O e oo O o OO A 148 SHIA O O MR A 149 A PP O o II rewire nenenies enue E 149 les MOON ME asis ori ida iaa 150 A UNS ac oe ese ae eee ea nn ep eee EET 150 ENCON mantas rr danos 150 SITO GOOF ING ara actas dra lid citarse es 15
264. scan vibrate settings 176 Options tab 175 Translation tab 177 bar code reader integrated scanner operation of 214 bar code symbologies color camera C 18 C 19 imager C 18 batteries a description of 198 Advanced backlight tab 107 Battery capacity tab 107 Battery Details tab 102 Battery Health tab 103 Battery Power tab 143 charging 17 failure to power up 17 installing 17 installing main battery 11 main battery 11 pinouts B 3 removing 17 run time 28 storing 29 Suspend Threshold tab 102 swap time 17 yellow LED battery failure 17 battery charger safety instructions 198 Battery Power settings 144 battery specifications D 9 D 10 Baud port replicator 180 beeper beep conditions 26 volume adjustment 26 Bluetooth microphone adjusting volume 161 pairing 108 radio ISM band 105 specs D 6 Bluetooth setup 105 About Tab 111 GPRS setup 112 Mode tab 110 Paired tab 111 peripherals 215 Servers tab 110 boot reset 12 Boot to BooSt 13 built in microphone adjusting volume 161 C calendar attendees assigning 39 categories using 38 creating amp editing entries 37 deleting appointments 39 reminders creating 38 status assigning 39 using 36 calibrating touchscreen 24 camera See digital camera camera using 68 case carrying 197 198 CDMA radio modem connection Sprint connect A 8 Verizon connect A 11 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Na Index Certificates 145 charger safety instructions 1
265. screen displays a drop down menu from which the operator can choose from an array of related options In the example following Stay Linked Documentation was chosen PartnerUp E gr Y y E 10 14 3 A 22 Partner Up Click your preferred pre loaded client to learn more Tr mw Pion Lerminal has hen pre hyachul wilh Slay Jl inkl Client sal barre Tie salha an be inilellerd bry Copyright Psion 2011 All rights reserved Sdiecing an the rs ball tink on the Partner pe i snlrol panel managenmenl sal are soclilicne Ghev linkeelovere ames lypin challenges asni baler wilh ipiis virhe Lerinels in yonr RE besen Liin isn marelle AE rellatde prosmwalion ul wireles lerminal omulalion sessin itoy Linked users consletenthe repat imerovec cerfam reliability and security while endosIna centralized monag Y PsionVU PsionVU allows the administrator to tailor how the EP10 operates and the options the user can access Note that the look of the Today screen will change from icons that are finger accessible to a list of items that is best accessed using a stylus e Tap on Start gt Settings gt System gt PsionVU If an administrative password has not already been set up and you tap on the Administrator password option the following screen is displayed where you can assign a password Administrator Pa I g Ty 92 Gm 10 28 Enter the current password New password ae
266. seie sa onaseessareaaueuees D 4 DLG VCS ONT Py OI gt be rara a a AEA D 4 DIES ACOS CHGS astas rre ies D 4 A An Po UA D 5 D111 Environmental SDECHIC aL OMS lt ccnneosmencrcaasussneuseusus ERE D 5 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual ES Table of Contents D 2 Radio Specifications ccxusrcrarisarna id it ai D 5 D 21 Murata 802 11 a b g n Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Radio cece cece seen cece ceeees D 5 D22 Nula CIO Ral species D 6 Dis lea Wireless ME gt IZO I tanec ete cs deencaceeuceca wuss AAEE ia eaS eNEAN EEA D 7 D24 Cinterion PHS GSM GPRS EDGE RaGiO susi ioda D 7 D 3 Lithium lon 2400 mAh Battery Specifications 00 ccccccecccdecdcavccscduccecavesecevdsecdaucsceveseseaeees D 9 DA Lithitin lons600 mAn Battery SNEOcIICatiON Ss verso rra rr EAr Ers NA E D 10 Index aia l ES Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual INTRODUCTION 11 About This Manual la TOX CONVENON 244s oo oe orar ee ee PRED daa 3 13 Overview of the EP10 Hand Held Computer 2 0 es 3 Lal TPEEPIO Hand Held six oa daa heed hohe EE AAA aaa da 5 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Ea 1 1 1 1 2 bp o gt Chapter 1 Introduction About This Manual About This Manual This manual describes how to configure operate and maintain the EP10 Hand Held Computer Model Number EP10 7515 Chapter 1 Introduction provides a basic overview of the EP10 Hand Held Chapter 2 Getting Started descri
267. sk Screen Tap on Menu in the softkey bar and tap on Filter You can choose All Tasks Recently Viewed No Categories Active Tasks or Completed Tasks The tasks are displayed on the screen according to the preference you chose 4 16 File Explorer Windows Embedded 6 5 files are stored in folders and sub folders that are accessible through File Explorer You can open save rename copy and paste files in the same manner as you would on any desktop PC AN Important Refer to Managing Files and Folders on page 82 for details about this feature Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs ActiveSync 4 17 ActiveSync ActiveSync is Microsoft PC connectivity software that can be used to connect the EP10 to PCs running this software You can synchronize the EP10 with your PC using this utility ActiveSync Co gt Tp d Gm 2 26 By connecting the EP10 to a PC through your desktop docking station and running ActiveSync or Mobile Device Center on your PC you can view EP10 files drag and drop files between the EP10 and the PC connect to the Internet and so on 4 17 1 Synchronization AN Important For information about using ActiveSync and Mobile Device Center on your PC refer to Synchronizing E mail with Outlook PC with Windows XP OS on page 60 and Synchronizing E mail with Outlook PC with Windows Vista or Windows 7 on page 62 To download either ActiveSync or Mobile Device Center vis
268. spx Tap on Start gt Settings gt System Tap on the Total Recall icon Total Recall Total Recall 5 0 Y Yj Or 8 13 In the start up screen you can choose from four options Create Backup Create Clone Manage Profile and Delete Profile 5 11 26 1 Creating a Backup Tap on the Create Backup button to begin the process Total Recall Click Start to create a backup profile for this device This dialog box displays the Profile Name and the storage destination for the profile file In the Profile Name field type a name for a profile e If you want to choose another location for your backup file optional tap on the button to the right of the Profile Location field and choose one of a number of folders Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 185 Chapter 5 Settings Total Recall AN Important Any profile not stored in persistent memory Flash Disk external USB drive will be erased during a clean boot therefore you should store profiles on a persistent drive Important When performing an autorestore the program only searches for the profile located in the Flash Disk TotalRecall folder If you store your profile anywhere else it will not be restored Only one profile can reside in that folder Tap on Start A backup of the current settings will be created and saved to the specified location The unit will then reboot To view profiles and choose restore options refer to Managing Profiles on
269. stom Preset C 4 4 The associated preset window is displayed PTS Imager Settin Fi e a H Options image Corrections FFl Exposure E Windowing Pre defined Preset are read only Press space or double click to change a setting in Customer preset Press lt Esc gt to cancel e Tap on the sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings Creating a Custom Preset A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset either a predefined preset or an existing custom preset To create a custom preset e Highlight a preset and tap on the Add button A screen like the sample following is displayed PTS Imager Settiny ea se Til 00 om 8 48 Cloning from existing preset Default Enter name of new preset fo e Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box e Tap on OK to save your changes The preset list is displayed the new custom preset appears at the end of the list It is marked as read and write Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix C Imagers Applet Modifying a Custom Preset PTS Imager Settiny EY 2 BE qu Imaging lt Barcoding gt Filter My Default Factory Default C 4 5 Modifying a Custom Preset The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset To ensure that it will work reliably it should be as close as possible to the original predefined preset To chang
270. t http 10 10 10 10 0007 Profile Mame Flash Disk Default1 pf A Progress e Clone to USB writes a clone of the profile to the USB drive After you tap on the button a message will come up either confirming that the USB drive is ready for deployment or that it is not available e When you are ready to install the profile on another unit turn on the next computer to be cloned and insert the USB key The profile will be automatically installed to the computer s Flash Disk TotalRecall folder There is a short delay in deployment so that you can cancel the process if needed USB drive prepared for cloning Autorun installation on next EP10 Autorun o gt Yi 4 Gi 4 37 The following profile options are Terminal Provisioning System available Starting installation in 9 USB drive ready for deployment Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 189 Chapter 5 Settings TweakIT 5 11 26 4 Deleting a Profile In the Total Recall home screen tap on Delete Profile Total Recall 5 0 Please select a profile from the list Flash Disk Default1 pfl Flash Disk Default2 p Flash Disk Default3 pfl Highlight the backup you want to delete and tap on the gt Next button A warning pop up screen appears asking if you re certain that you want to delete this file Tap on the Yes to delete the file 5 11 27 TweakIT Tap on Start gt Settings gt System Tap on the TweakIT Settings icon This utility allows y
271. t tac on 208 6 10 2 3 Inserting the EP10 in the Vehicle Cradle ccc ccc ccc cece cence cence ee eneeeeeeeeeees 209 610 3 Charging Coble SOU sarro roscar lcos drid iia lodo nas 209 610 4 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations ooooccoccoccocconcncnorcn cnn e eee narrar nr 209 6 10 5 Cleaning the RV100O Vehicle Cradle recinasviaini iii rias 209 6 11 The Powered Vehicle Cradle Model No RV1IOO5 ccc cece cece eee eee e eee eee e eee een eee rr 210 6 11 1 RV1005 Vehicle Cradle Mounting RECOMMENCATIONS ccc cece eee e cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeneeees 211 6 1111 MOU UIMCMTOM DIGG 22 25 lt lt cnccnentendecnctueescsxee cud costaria seek 211 Bike Cape Arrangement emslanst riorerrs seas EEEE EENEN A Ei 212 6 11 3 Electrical Requirements eee cee cece cece eee corn 212 6 11 31 Wiring Vehicle Power to the Cradle cc cece ccc cece eee e cence ne eeeeeeeneeeeseeeeees 213 6114 JUSB and Serial COnMeCHONS erci eana a tend edie ddan cena seinen AE 213 6 11 5 Inserting the EPIO in the Vehicle Cladle sicccccscacviadccedadatadedcnwudsdevedee Cadieeinindechdenecaiwe 213 Cibo Mamntamnng the venice Cradle cosida ro rr e 214 AA erne ro Ello A EEE A E E EE E ET 214 6 121 Operating Two Dimensional 2D IMAJETS ooococcoccocnnccncnnccocnorcn ccoo non rn rn 214 6 13 Bluetooth Peripherals ci ccccccccacctvsiacissunseterecddenesaduniddewsssunestenedess a denddenows 215 AA A A 215 Appendix A Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN
272. tailor the double click parameters the display options and the data handling options associated with your scanner Scanner Sethngs ea Hg Til on mu 7 30 Parts Options gt Transla bons Internal scanner Mon configurable Double Click Display E Data handling To change a setting press space or double click 5 11 21 1 1 Double Click Parameters Click Time msec This parameter controls the maximum gap time in milliseconds for a double click If the time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time it is considered a double click The allowa ble range is O to 1000 A value of zero disables this feature A double click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in the Click Data parameter When a value is not assigned for the Click Data double clicking the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the Dot Time parameter and initiates a normal scan sweep If a value is assigned for the Click Data parameter double clicking the scanner trigger inserts the Click Data value rather than initiating a scan Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 175 Chapter 5 Settings Scanner Settings Click Data For both integrated and external scanners this parameter determines which character is sent to the appli cation installed in your EP10 following a double click A dialog box appears asking that you pres
273. tance To dial a phone number 1 Voicemail 1 oe Pro B tuv O 0 Hide show keypad gt F a Fi ghit M5 7 a I aj 411 Assistance a def 3 h 6 Speed Dial e A p agal wxyz Call History al Menu Use the phone keypad to enter the phone number and tap on Talk to dial the phone number To end a phone call e Tapon End on the phone keypad EP10 Keyboard on page 53 for details 4 3 1 2 Making a Conference Call Note You can also tap on the End key on the physical keyboard of the EP1O to end the call The End key is labelled with a red phone receiver Refer to Sending amp Ending Calls using the To set up a conference call between yourself and two or more other parties e Inthe phone keypad type the first phone number Tap on Talk e While you are connected to the first number tap on Menu gt Hold e Type the second number Tap on Talk e Tap on Menu gt Conference e Jo add another party tap on Menu gt Hold type the number and then tap Menu gt Conference e Tap on End to disconnect all calls EN Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs 4 3 1 3 4 3 1 4 The Phone Keypad Receiving an Incoming Call To answer an incoming call e Tapon the Talk button it s labelled with a green phone receiver Programming Speed Dial The phone keypad provides a Speed Dial button for quick acces
274. tates to Unicode values This tab shows the configured Unicode character along with the Unicode value For ex ample a U O061 indicates that the character a is represented by the Unicode value 0061 and so on Keep in mind that Unicode configurations are represented as hexadecimal rather than decimal values All user defined Unicode mappings are listed in the Unicode Mapping tab in order of virtual key value and then by order of the shift state If a Unicode mapping Is not listed the Unicode mapping is mapped to the default Unicode value Adding and Changing Unicode Values O Note Changes to Unicode mappings are not saved until you exit the Unicode Mapping tab by tapping on OK Tap on the Add Edit button en Ti tun 7 48 SHIFT Pressed CTRL pressed Unicode Mapping Default Unicode Mapping Highlight a value in the Unicode mapping list Position the cursor in the Unicode Mapping field and type a Unicode value for the highlighted key O Note To add a shifted state SHIFT and or CTRL tap on the checkbox next to SHIFT Pressed and or CTRL Pressed Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 139 Chapter 5 Settings Buttons Removing Unicode Values e Inthe Unicode Mapping tab highlight the item you want to delete and tap on the Remove button 5 9 2 6 Scancode Remapping A scancode is a number that is associated with a physical key on a keyboard Every key has a unique
275. ter User Manual Highlight the custom preset and tap on the Edit button Appendix C Imagers Applet Removing a Custom Preset PTS Imager Settiny ea a Til M gm 9 12 Preset Custom Symbologies Fre defined Preset are read only Fress space or double click to change a setting in Customer preset Press lt Esc gt to cancel e Tap on the symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change For a parameter that can take a range of values Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click the parameter An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting is displayed Type a value in the field provided For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click on the parameter Either method toggles between the two available values When you ve completed your edits tap on OK The parameter list is displayed the new value for the changed parameter is shown Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes C 4 12 Removing a Custom Preset e Highlight the custom preset you want to delete and tap on the Remove button A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the
276. ter User Manual 19 Chapter 5 Settings Network Cards 5 8 7 2 Network Cards ao Er MES mm 9 14 Network Adapters My network card Connects to Network Cards ac e Til ao Gi 2 21 Tap an adapter ta modify settings Bluetooth PAN Driver SMSCOSO0 USE2 0 FAST Ethernet Drivel ASIX AXBEF72ZB USB 2 0 Fast Ethernet ASIS AXSBY 72 USB 2 0 Fast Ethernet D VPN Connection Setup A VPN connection provides a secure connection to servers through the Internet Before you begin you need the following information from your network administrator password domain name TCP IP settings and a host name or IP address of the VPN server Tap on Start gt Settings Tap on the Connections folder icon followed by the Connections icon Connections as 2 alo 2 26 Advanced lt Tasks gt Advanced Connections ao gr Ti E 2 27 Make New Connection Marne My VPN Hest names IP dl i tesecLoTe art Eee il 120 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Network Cards 5 8 7 3 e Inthe Name field type a name for this connection In Host name IP type the VPN server name or IP address e Tap on the VPN type radio button next to the type of authentication for your EP10 IPSec L2TP or PPTP Your network administrator will let you know which option applies to your unit e Tap on Next e Choose the type of authentication in this screen If you choose A pre shared key type the key provided by yo
277. ters can detect your EP10 and can establish a bond or use a Bluetooth service Note that other devices can detect your unit whether or not a bond has been created If Allow Bluetooth to wake system is enabled this feature allows remote Bluetooth devices to wake the EP10 by requesting a Bluetooth service that requires host intervention This feature can also be used when the EP10 is waking from suspend to significantly to reduce the initialization time of Bluetooth system 5 8 2 5 About Tab Bluetooth dr Ti 3 54 Mde About gt Paired Mame Local Address HET Version LMP Version Component Profiles Serial Client Server OBEX Client Server HSF HFF HID host DUN DT Name displays the broadcasted name of the EP10 The name can be changed in the About applet tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab gt About icon Tap on the Device ID tab and change the name Local Address displays the MAC address BD_Addr of the Bluetooth chip HCI Version amp LMP Version display the version of the chip firmware Component indicates the version of the Psion Bluetooth Subsystem the manager drivers etc Profiles lists the supported profiles on this specific EP10 5 8 2 6 Paired Tab This tab lists all paired devices and their corresponding services The format of the name is lt Device Name gt lt Service Name gt Additional information may appear in this screen such as the Port Numbers for Serial Profiles service Blue
278. th an AP that supports the OFDM data rates 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 54 Mbps 5 8 9 4 3 11n Mode This radio supports MIMO data rates in both 2 4 GHz and 5 G band although it only supports single stream operation SISO This increases the maximum data rate to 65 Mbps e Enabled If this option is enabled it is activated for the band or bands that were selected in Network type For example if Network Type b only Tin is only switched on for the 2 4GHz band 5 8 9 4 4 11n Block Ack When Tin Block Ack is enabled the EP10 will not send an ACK for every packet received but it will send an ACK after a block of data is received The duration of time before sending an ACK is negotiated with the AP 5 8 9 4 5 Power Save Mode If Power Save Mode is enabled the radio remains on continuously The disadvantage to enabling this option is increased power consumption The advantage to enabling this option is instant response to TCP IP traffic It is recommended that Power Save Mode be enabled to increase battery run time It should only be disa bled if the application is sensitive to timing 5 8 9 4 6 Roaming AP Density The Roaming AP Density setting controls how aggressively the EP10 attempts to roam The available options are High Medium and Low with High providing the most aggressive roaming and Low providing the least aggressive roaming Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Wireless Manager
279. they will overwrite the changes caused by the import operation After importing a file a dialog will appear to enable you to reset now or later 5 11 18 7 Activating a Change User Mode To activate the changes you ll need change from Administrator to User Mode In the tab you are working with tap on OK In the next screen the PsionVU menu screen tap on OK A new screen the PsionVU Access screen is displayed Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Regional Settings PsionVU Access A a gm 5 14 Administrator mode is active 7 Remain in Administrator mode a Change to User mode d ETS e Tap on Change to User mode You ll need to reset the EP10 so that the changes you specified can take effect PsionVU Access A ff m 5 19 User mode is active A device reset is recommended to ensure full functionality reset now No e Tap on Yes to reset the EP10 and activate your changes 5 11 19 Regional Settings To display the Regional Settings screen tap on Start gt Settings and then tap on the System icon followed by the Regional Settings icon Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual MA Chapter 5 Settings Remove Programs Regional Settings Regional Settings ET Y y d Gm 11 18 Region gt Number Appearance samples Positive numbers 123 456 789 00 Positive currency 123 456 789 00 Time 11 18 05 PM Short date 9 6 11 Long date Wednesday Apri
280. this refer to Connections Con necting to the Internet on page 114 e Tap on Start gt Internet Explorer to open Internet Explorer Tap on the address bar the field near the top of the screen where URLs are entered to highlight the current URL e Type a new URL in the address bar Tapping on the softkeys in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen displays Internet Explorer commands like those you find on your PC Psion mgged mo ea eo Ti t http www psion comp mobil ym ZII E F Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Calendar 4 8 Calendar This option is used to map out all your upcoming appointments meetings and so on in the weeks months and years ahead Calendar 5 E 10 11 12 No appointments AN Important Refer to Calendar of Upcoming Appointments on page 78 for details about this feature 4 9 Alarms Refer to Time Date and Alarms on page 75 for details about this applet 4 10 Pictures amp Videos The Pictures amp Videos applet allows you to snap photographs and record video footage It is also a photo and video viewing program AN Important The Pictures amp Videos program can only display bmp or jpg formats Photos in other formats will need to be converted on your PC before they are transferred to the EP10 4 10 1 Using the Camera e Tap on Start gt Pictures Videos 68 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual
281. tings to display the activation screen A 8 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix A Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN A 4 1 1 Sprint Connection A AA Ga 1 54 Your device is not activated Would you like to activate your device on Sprint now This screen appears when your service has not yet been initialized e Tap on Yes to begin preparing the service for initialization The next screen asks whether you d like to Provision your device Since a SIM card is not present in units equipped with CDMA radios network settings need to be loaded into the modem This process is referred to by Sprint as provisioning SWIOMADMClient Cry e Vij q qu 1 51 Would you like to provision the device or update the PRL Click OF to exit the application om e Tap on Provision to load network settings onto the modem and activate your service The data connection is set up automatically on boot up Important Since the network settings are updated wirelessly make certain that you have good network coverage when you tap on Provision Repairing a Network Connection If your data connection is accidentally deleted you can use this screen to set up your connection Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual A 9 Appendix A Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Sprint Connection Phone 7 Er ul 4 Ga 1 46 Location lt Data Settings gt System 5 By clicking the Repair Connectoid
282. to Appendix E Omnii Specifications A network profile contains settings for SSID Service Set Identifier and security options O Note In most situations the configuration of your 802 11 radio will require parameter settings and access keys from a network administrator To launch the Wi Fi Config application e Tap on the Start button followed by the following icons Settings gt Connections gt Wi Fi Config La er Yi e m 2 22 do a 4 La e Yi 4 uu 2 23 zonnections La er Yi d qu 2 24 Clock amp Alarms Lock e Beam Connections re la n Bluetooth T Dornaln Enroll USB to PC o gt Nebwork Cards gt Microsoft My Phone tg Wireless Manager The Wi Fi screen is displayed 124 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Wi Fi Config Setting Up the 802 11a b g n Radio 5 8 9 1 5 8 9 2 Wi Fi Config EJ er i ME Go 2 31 Data Rate mb s RSSI Status E SSID BSSID Auth Encrypt IF Status Configure Advanced Wi Fi Config Status Tab The Status tab displays information about the wireless network to which EP10 is configured to connect When there are no network profiles configured this tab is not populated Wi Fi Config ae Ye ME Ge 2 31 Data Rate eee May s RSSI EN SSID BSSID Auth Encrypt IF Status Configure Advanced Disable Enable Radio This button toggles between Disable Radio and Enable Radio
283. to download Extended Ephemeris EE files from a secure host on the inter net using any interface that has an internet connection WWAN or WiFi These files contain several days worth of ephemeris orbital data that can be used if the satellite s broadcast ephemeris is not available The Status field above the Update button displays the progress of the download and once successfully downloaded the Status field will read Idle Settings Click on the Settings softkey to define the AGPS server connection settings GPS Settings Cl pt E Go 11 21 AGPS server connection settings Use default settings User name Password Update Manual updates o Y The AGPS server connection settings drop down menu allows you to choose from two settings Use default settings and Use custom settings The Use default settings option is generally acceptable for most applications Note that aside from the Update field in which you can choose how long the fix is stored in your EP10 the field values cannot be edited 154 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings GPS Global Positioning System Settings The Use custom settings option is generally used to configure devices that will have access only to an in tranet rather than the Internet and should only be altered with the assistance of qualified Psion personnel They will be able to help you configure your Psion device s and web server to retrieve the ephemeris data
284. to enable Internet Protocol version 6 that has been published to use 128 bit IP address replacing version 4 Modem Logging TweakIT Settings EN e Y pele 4 15 Modem Logging O Enable Logging to File AMadmLog tet AD When this option is enabled the EP10 logs AT commands e g dial out information password string etc that the administrator can monitor for debugging purposes Modem commands are stored in MdmLog txt 5 11 27 3 Advanced Services Settings TweakIT Settings CI e Y 4 18 Registry E lt Advanced gt User H 2 Advanced CE Services Setting A 3 Advanced Interface and Ne atx Advanced Services Settings Hs Server SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol Server TweakIT Settings CW Ty am 4 20 SNTP Server SNTE Server Name po KA Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 5 11 28 5 12 Registry Editor Wireless WAN Chapter 5 Settings Registry Editor The SNTP Server Name typed in this dialog box is used to synchronize EP10 time with that of the time server A warm reset must be performed once the server name has been entered This option is reserved for senior administrators who have a strong understanding of registry keys and values Careless registry editing can cause irreversible damage to the EP10 TweakIT Settings CP gt Ti aff Ge 9 21 Advanced Registry Editor gt Advanced H p HKEY LOCAL MACHINE qa HKEY_CLASSES ROOT Ls HKEY_CURRENT_USER
285. to the Estimated Battery Backup reserve specified in the Suspend Threshold tab the EP10 shuts off au tomatically and uses the reserve power to preserve the data stored on the EP10 Once the EP10 shuts down it cannot be switched on until a fresh battery is installed or the unit is inserted in a docking station or cradle Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the right to increase the battery capacity reserved for backup purposes Data will be preserved to a maximum of 100 hours Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the left to decrease the power reserved for backup purposes this increases the EP10 s operating time the amount of time the EP10 will operate before shutting down but reduces the power reserved for backup purposes to a minimum of 24 hours Internal super capacitors will protect the data stored in the EP10 while the depleted battery is swapped for a fully charged one O Note Once the battery is removed the super capacitor will preserve the data stored on the EPIO for approximately 5 minutes It is critical that you install a charged battery before this time elapses KA Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Battery Health 5 6 5 Battery Health The Battery Health service provides an estimate of battery health based on a number of different measure ments beyond battery capacity AN Important Battery Health is an estimate and should not be depended on to provide a 100 account of battery condition
286. tooth ac go Ty fe m 9 55 About Paired gt Device Select device to view options TORPSG 011 06EX OPP Tap and hold down the stylus on an item in the Paired tab to display an associated pop up menu Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual m Chapter 5 Settings Connecting Using a Bluetooth GPRS Phone Bluetooth A Gam 9 57 About Paired gt Device Select device to view options TORPSG OTTIOBES OPP Send File Query services Remove This is a service dependent menu that is it varies slightly depending on the service chosen in the Servers tab Query Services and Remove Commands O Note The Query Services and Remove commands are available in all service dependent menus regard less of the type of service chosen e Query Services displays a Services dialog box where a pairing service is chosen e Remove unpairs the highlighted service and deletes the entry from the tab OBEX OPP Object Exchange Object Push Profile Commands The OPP defines two roles a Push Server and a Push Client Push Server is the device that provides an object exchange server Push Client is the device that pushes and pulls objects to and from the Push Server OBEX OPP contains the following unique menu option e Send File displays an Open File dialog box where the file to be sent can be selected When the transmis sion begins another dialog box tracks the progress of the file transmission HSP HFP Headset Profil
287. trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries ES Bluetooth The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by Psion Inc is under license All trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners Return To Factory Warranty Psion Inc provides a return to factory warranty on this product for a period of twelve 12 months in accord ance with the Statement of Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability provided at www psion com warranty The warranty on Psion manufactured equipment does not extend to any product that has been tampered with altered or repaired by any person other than an employee of an authorized Psion service organiza tion See Psion terms and conditions of sale for full details Important Psion warranties take effect on the date of shipment Service and Information Psion provides a complete range of product support services and information to its customers worldwide Services include technical support and product repairs To locate your local support services please go to www psion com service and support htm To access further information on current and discontinued products please go to our Teknet site and log in or tap on Not Registered depending on whether you have previously registered for Teknet http community psion com support A section of archived product information is also availa
288. ts in the Windows Mobile platform Some other major components of WEH 6 5 are Office Mobile 2010 Word Excel PowerPoint OneNote SharePoint Internet Explorer 8 Remote Desktop protocol 5 2 Settings The applets contained under the Settings icon in the Start screen allow you to tailor how your EP10 be haves the appearance of the Today screen and so on The Settings applications are further divided into Personal System and Connection options Tap on Start gt Settings to display the Settings applets ao gr Til Gm 1 17 o i Phone E mail Intemet Explorer Contacts y Connections ETT aM A Sounds amp FE F Notifications Pia A e Mierosoft My Phone Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Clocks amp Alarms 5 3 5 4 5 5 Clocks amp Alarms Refer to Time Date and Alarms on page 75 for details about this applet Lock This option allows you to assign a password to protect access to your phone service Tap on Start gt Settings and then tap on the Lock icon Password ao ga Yiri Gm 12 50 Password It is critical that you store your password in a safe place If you forget it a clean start must be performed by certified Psion personnel A clean start returns the EP10 to factory settings Only the data stored in a CF or SD memory card are preserved Tap in the checkbox next to Prompt if phone unused for to turn on password protection f
289. twork Your configured network is listed in the Configure tab An X next to a network indicates that this is the network to which EP10 will connect Wi Fi Config La ee Yi ME m 7 01 Production XxX Status Configure Advanced e Tapon the Connect button to activate your network Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 129 Chapter 5 Settings Wi Fi Config Setting Up the 802 11a b g n Radio The Status tab is displayed The Status field displays ASSOCIATING while the 802 11a b g n radio attempts to connect to the network Once the association is complete the Status tab is populated with the appropri ate information about your network Wi Fi Config La e Y 4 uu 7 10 Channel Disable Radio Data Rate 54 Mbs 5 8 9 3 Configuring TCP IP If your network is not using a DHCP server you will need to assign an IP address 5 8 9 3 1 IP Address and Name Servers To assign an IP Address for the EP10 Tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections icon gt Wireless Manager icon Tap on the Menu button and choose Wi Fi Settings Wireless Manager 227 2 qu 3 03 Disconnect Cellular Data Wi Fi Settings Bluetooth Settings Phone Settings SACD Eme A In the Wi Fi screen use the scroll bar at the top of the screen to scroll to the Network Adapters tab 130 Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Settings Wi Fi Config Setting Up the 802 11a b g n Radio
290. u reach the parameter that you want to change e For a parameter that can take a range of values Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click the parameter An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed Type a value in the field provided e For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click on the parameter Either method toggles between the two available values e When you ve completed your edits tap on OK The parameter list is displayed the new value for the changed parameter is shown e Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes Removing a Custom Preset e Highlight the custom preset you want to delete and tap on the Remove button A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix C Imagers Applet Configuring the Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets e Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation C 4 Configuring the Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets To configure the bar code decoding camera presets e Tap on Start gt Settings gt System e Tap on the Barcoding tab Figure C 3 Bar Code Presets PTS Imager Settiny fm 2 Yi Mi que Imaging lt Barcoding gt Filter Ca
291. ur network administrator e Tap on Next e Type your user name password and domain name If a domain name was not provided to you try the connection without entering a domain name Note Normally you will not need to change any advanced settings You will need to make changes only under only the following circumstances The server to which you are connecting does not dynamically assign addresses and TCP IP settings need to be entered Server DNS or WINS settings need to be changed If you need to edit the Advanced settings refer to Advanced Modem Settings on page 116 for details about this tab e Tap on Finish e Launch a program like Internet Explorer to activate the connection The VPN connection will start automatically Managing an Existing Connection Once you ve defined a connection a new option appears in the first Connections screen Manage existing connections Editing a Connection e Tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections folder icon Tap on the Connections icon e Tap on Manage existing connections ISP WWAN GPR ao Yil Gam 2 38 Connections ao g Yil lt lt am 10 05 General lt Modem gt Proxy Set Advanced lt Tasks gt Advanced Tap and hold on an existing connection for more options PTX GPRS ISP WWAN GPRS To launch a connection from this screen press and hold the stylus on the connection you want to acti vate Choose Connect from the pop up menu e To de
292. use the imager to perform specified tasks without having to understand and set numerous var ables In almost all cases these predefined presets are sufficient Bar Code Predefined Presets These presets encompass the majority of the most popular bar codes and their subtypes The bar code de coding symbology predefined presets define which bar codes can be decoded The bar code decoding camera predefined presets determine how the bar code images are captured Bar Code Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets The following presets select groups of similar bar codes for decoding Note It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible Factory Default This preset enables the decoding of frequently used bar codes My Default The bar codes in this preset can be enabled disabled and so on Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix C Imagers Applet Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets All This preset enables the decoding of all bar codes that the imager can decode For a list of these symbolo gies see Imager Bar Code Symbologies on page C 18 and Color Camera Bar Code Symbologies on page C 19 Linear This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D symbologies that the imager can decode For a list of these symbologies see Imager Bar Code Symbologies on page C 18 and Color Camera Bar Code Symbologies on page C 19 Linear and PDF 417 This preset enables the decoding of all
293. uter User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Communicate Tab Adding Contacts Searching for a Contact 4 6 2 CW go Vp m 2 31 Type a contact name here Tap onan alpha group to narrow the search jj an E Publishing Smarter 4 we 3 Clugston A 416 504 1212 4 mo om To search for a particular entry e Tap on the Enter a name field and type the name you are searching for in the Contacts list e Jo narrow your search to names beginning with a particular letter tap on the appropriate alpha char acter grouping Communicate Tab Adding Contacts Adding a New Contact The New softkey located to the right of the Start softkey allows you to add additional entries to your con tacts list e Tap on the New softkey E Aschwandan E g Clugston A 416 5804 1212 4 mo Publishing Smarter 4 whe SIM Contact E mail G pa E mail Group amp Messaging Group Choose the contact type to which you want to add an entry In the Communicate screen tap on each of the options you want to complete for the new contact you are creating Each item you tap on in this screen produces an associated pop up screen in which you can enter the appropriate information For example in the sample screen following tapping on Add a name displays an associated screen for you to complete Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual 65 Chapter 4 Programs Info Tab Contacts Notes lt Communicate gt Info Cr yt
294. vate network primarily for use with Active Remote Configuration A R C WiFiConnect A R C configures the default WiFi interface The WEP key is set to PsionPsion123 The SSID is set to Psion The default interface becomes the active interface Keep in mind that you must configure the access point and the hand held s to use the same settings Refer to the Active Remote Configuration A R C Administrators Guide PN 8000252 for details about up dating devices on your network This manual is available at http community psion com knowledge w knowledgebase 1189 aspx EA Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual SETTINGS Overview of Software 511 Psion Software Advantage ne 97 ake MEO OC OWE a enneeeeees oe eek eee ee een ee ds Ree Sees eee 9r Se SONNI eers israr ea a aaa ST 23 COCKS AMS eee keane sarao dan ee ee ee wees 98 De MCR A sewed aeeeheon Wee ee ee chee eee se eee aeet 98 y MOM ems is ad eee AAA AAA ees Jo 5 51 Appearances Tab Changing the Theme Background sasaaa ee ee eee 99 5 5 2 Beaming a Theme to Another Device ao 5 5 3 Items Tab Customizing the Today Screen eee 100 OG PONT anos dass Bato Se eee eh eee ee ee ee ARA 100 561 Battery POWE s reasons adan ora eee CH aS ee ee ees 101 Se AOvanced D es ode asad eee doe wee ew ee VES be ees Eee eee eRe ee eee eee 101 5 6 3 Battery Derails TaD 0280s rara eC ea KGS EMS Ow Rw EE wee ERE ER EOS 102 5 6 4 Suspend
295. ver that you will not have further access to messages that you moved to folders from anywhere except with the EP10 For IMAP4 accounts the folders you create and the messages you move are reflected on the server making messages available any time whether you connect to your mail server from your EP10 or your PC Synchronizing E mail with Outlook PC with Windows XP OS Important For PCs running Windows Vista or Windows 7 follow the guidelines under Syn chronizing E mail with Outlook PC with Windows Vista or Windows 7 on page 62 By synchronizing the EP10 E mail program with Outlook on your PC your e mail is available on both the EP10 and on your PC EN Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Synchronizing E mail with Outlook PC with Windows XP OS O Note Synchronizing e mail does not require that the EP10 have an independent connection to the Internet e In ActiveSync on your PC tap on Tools gt Options in the tool bar at the top of the screen Settings Pocket PC and click OF or select a source and click Select the information you want to synchronize with your Settings Microsoft Exchange Contacts Calendar E mail Tasks Windows PC O E3 Contacts O Calendar O 2 E mail O Tasks O Notes Settings Co Cre e Make certain that a check mark is displayed in the checkbox next to E mail Tap on OK Once you check E mail for synchronization Out
296. versity antenna GPS antenna active passive USB 2 0 High Speed 480Mbit s device interface Serial Interface ASCO e 8 wire modem interface with status and control lines unbalanced asynchronous e Adjustable baud rates from 9 600bps up to 921 600bps e Supports RTSO CTSO hardware flow control e Multiplex ability according to GSM 0710 Multiplexer Protocol UICC Interface Supported chip cards UICC SIM USIM 3V 1 8V Special features Phonebook SIM and phone Antenna SAIC Single Antenna Interference Cancellation DARP Downlink Advanced Receiver Performance RX diversity type 31 D 3 Lithium lon 2400 mAh Battery Specifications Table D 7 eO O 2 Discharge Temperature 20 C to 60 C 49F To 140 F typical Charge Taper Current 8 120 mA Charge Time 3 hrs typical Pre condition Charge 200 240 mA Current Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual D 9 Appendix D Specifications Lithium lon 3600 mAh Battery Specifications Table D 7 Description Specification Pre condition Charge Ter 3 V mination Voltage Cycle Life 300 charge discharge cycles with no degradation below 80 of nominal capacity based on 0 5 C charge 0 5 C discharge rates to 3 0 V 23 C D 4 Lithium lon 3600 mAh Battery Specifications Table D 8 noma ooo Pre condition Charge 300 360 mA Current Pre condition Charge Ter 3 V mination Voltage Cycle Life 300 charge discharge cycles with no degradation below 80 of nom
297. vironments in which our products are typically used These tests usually include shock and vibration testing as well as IP testing for water and dust electrical shock etc If a third party vehicle mount is used the third party should perform the same type of testing in order to ensure that the design will maintain the factory specifications of the product If the third party company is unwilling to perform the necessary testing and take responsibility for the effects of the design then we highly recommend using Psion designed and supported accessories If you elect to use a third party company produced cradle Psion cannot take responsibility for the effects of that third party product if it causes failure of our device AN Important Before using a vehicle cradle read all instructions and markings on the housing Do not operate a vehicle cradle if damaged by a sharp blow dropped or otherwise damaged in any way gualified service personnel should inspect for internal damage Shock and vibration specifications for the EP10 are verified using Psion approved RAM mounts and mounting hardware Use of non certified Psion mounting hard ware is not recommended and may void warranty coverage Do not expose to rain or snow However the Powered Vehicle Cradle is designed to accept a wet EP10 handheld without harmful effect This Powered Vehicle Cradle cannot be used with non EP10 cradle accessories Figure 6 9 RV1005 Powered Vehicle Cradle
298. ximizing Run Time IM door microSD door Slide the microSD card onto the guides on the card door with the connector pads at the bottom UNO e Gently snap the microSD door closed e Close the SIM card door and slide it down to lock it in place 3 8 Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time O Note When the battery is at 50 capacity a low battery warning is displayed When the battery is at about 10 capacity a very low battery notification bubble appears As Lithium lon batteries age their capacity decreases gradually and they are generally considered de pleted after approximately 2 years of use less than 60 of original capacity remaining Keep in mind however that heavy usage or operating the EP10 at temperature extremes will shorten the battery life Lithium lon batteries do not require conditioning cycles and the EP10 battery system including chargers requires no user interaction to maintain peak performance To maximize the run time of your batteries consider the following e The display backlight is a large drain on the battery Try to keep its brightness as low as possible e The EPIO is event driven that is when it is not in use the EP10 reverts to sleep mode even when it appears to be running saving battery power Events include a key press touchscreen taps and scan triggers Power consumption is reduced if you avoid unnecessary events and allow the EP10 to sleep as muc
299. you know if you have any unread e mail To view e mail e Tap on the E mail option in the Today screen or tap on Start gt E Mail to launch your e mail O Note Refer to Synchronizing E mail with Outlook PC with Windows XP OS on page 129 or Syn chronizing E mail with Outlook PC with Windows Vista or Windows 7 on page 132 for details about synchronizing your e mail 3 10 4 Calendar of Upcoming Appointments This option is used to map out all your upcoming appointments meetings and so on in the weeks months and years ahead O Note You can synchronize the Calendar so that any meetings appointments and so on are dis played on your EP10 Today screen as well as on your PC Refer to Synchronization on page 80 for details e Inthe Today screen tap on Calendar or tap on Start gt Calendar icon to display the calendar applet Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting to Know the EP10 Calendar of Upcoming Appointments Calendar ao A m 1 35 d o Fri Aproi 20u0 OD 5 E 10 di 4 3 No appointments Calendar softkey Menu softkey The default calendar displays any scheduled appointments To choose the format of your calendar e Tap on the Calendar softkey this key scrolls through the calendar formats ac gr Vy d Gm 1 44 Fri Aproi 2011 2 GEE SERES To pi ea CEE ests wool ro 4 apri SE ery 218 4 Sa es ae Sees A 2011 A gt Fae pee WPT le os e ee E gapapa A sae
300. you to tailor your available services to meet your requirements Voice Mail Setup If your service includes Voice Mail choosing this option for the first time displays a screen in which you can enter your voice mail provider phone number 4 3 3 4 Phone Network Tab Phone GT ge Yi m 6 35 Services Network gt Data Current network ROGERS Find Network Network selection m Automatic m Select k Preferred networks Set Networks Note For details about choosing networks refer to Network Configuration on page A 8 4 3 3 5 Phone Data Tab Phone fr en ies am 10 33 siiin 4 Data Bands fj Phone E gt Ty w 10 35 Create a data connection for the current network C PAF only authentication for Network Data gt Bands Infrared Port Ena ble Auto Cormect for y Infrared Port Set Auto Connect reattempt time to C Enable Auto Connect for 30 minutes Y x Allow End key to drop data connection Psion EP10 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Programs Managing Phone Settings This screen is used to configure your WWAN data connection to the ISP Note For details about setting up your data connection refer to Establishing a Packet Data Con nection on page A 3 or Establishing a CDMA Radio Modem Connection on page A 8 depending on the type of radio installed in your EP10 4 3 3 6 Phone Bands Tab Phone EMT Data lt

EP10™ - IngenuityWorking

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

EP10&trade; - IngenuityWorking

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

EP10™ - IngenuityWorking